2010 FORESTER Owner's Manual 2010 FORESTER Owner's Manual

2010 FORESTER Owner’s Manual

A8150BE-A Issued February 2009 Printed in USA 03/09 2010A FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN MSA5M1003A Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer. The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle. Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need the information found herein. FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

* The illustrated vehicle is one of the FORESTER series.

Warranties & Models with HID headlights How to use this Owner’s Manual & Warranties for U.S.A. CAUTION All SUBARU vehicles distributed by & Using your Owner’s Manual High Intensity Discharge (HID) head- Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail lights contain mercury. For that Before you operate your vehicle, carefully by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the read this manual. To protect yourself and United States come with the following reason, it is necessary to remove HID headlights before vehicle dis- extend the service life of your vehicle, warranties: follow the instructions in this manual. . posal. Once removed, please reuse, SUBARU Limited Warranty recycle or dispose of the HID head- Failure to observe these instructions may . Emission Control Systems Warranty lights as hazardous waste. result in serious injury and damage to your . Emissions Performance Warranty vehicle. This manual is composed of fourteen All warranty information, including details & Models without HID head- of coverage and exclusions, is in the chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. lights table of contents, so you can usually tell at Please read these warranties carefully. a glance if that chapter contains the CAUTION information you want. & Warranties for Canada This vehicle does not contain mer- Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS All SUBARU vehicles distributed by cury devices or parts. airbags Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by This chapter informs you how to use the an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada seat and seatbelt and contains precau- come with the following warranties: tions for the SRS airbags. . SUBARU Limited Warranty Chapter 2: Keys and doors . Anti-Corrosion Warranty This chapter informs you how to operate . Emission Control Warranty the keys, locks and windows. Chapter 3: Instruments and controls All warranty information, including details This chapter informs you about the opera- of coverage and exclusions, is in the “ ” tion of instrument panel indicators and Warranty and Service Booklet . Please how to use the instruments and other read these warranties carefully. switches.

– CONTINUED – 2

Chapter 4: Climate control Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION This chapter informs you how to operate This chapter informs you about dimen- the climate control. sions and capacities of your SUBARU. A CAUTION indicates a situation in Chapter 5: Audio Chapter 13: Consumer information and which injury or damage to your This chapter informs you how to operate Reporting safety defects vehicle, or both, could result if the your audio system. This chapter informs you about Uniform caution is ignored. Chapter 6: Interior equipment tire quality grading standards and Report- This chapter informs you how to operate ing safety defects. NOTE interior equipment. Chapter 14: Index ’ A NOTE gives information or sugges- Chapter 7: Starting and operating This is an alphabetical listing of all that sin tions how to make better use of your This chapter informs you how to start and this manual. You can use it to quickly find vehicle. operate your SUBARU. something you want to read. Chapter 8: Driving tips & & Safety symbol This chapter informs you how to drive your Safety warnings SUBARU in various conditions and ex- You will find a number of WARNINGs, plains some safety tips on driving. CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual. Chapter 9: In case of emergency These safety warnings alert you to poten- This chapter informs you what to do if you tial hazards that could result in injury to have a problem while driving, such as a you or others. flat tire or engine overheating. Please read these safety warnings as well Chapter 10: Appearance care as all other portions of this manual care- This chapter informs you how to keep your fully in order to gain a better understand- SUBARU looking good. ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely. Chapter 11: Maintenance and service This chapter informs you when you need WARNING to take your SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you A WARNING indicates a situation in You will find a circle with a slash through it how to keep your SUBARU running which serious injury or death could in this manual. This symbol means “Do properly. result if the warning is ignored. not”, “Do not do this”,or“Do not let this happen”, depending upon the context. 3

Vehicle symbols Mark Name Mark Name There are some of the symbols you may Tail lights, license plate light Seat heater and instrument panel illumi- see on your vehicle. nation For warning and indicator lights, refer to “Warning and indicator lights” F18. Child restraint top tether anchorages Headlights Mark Name Child restraint lower anchorages Turn signal WARNING

Horn Illumination brightness CAUTION

Windshield wiper deicer Fan speed Power door lock and unlock

Wiper intermittent Instrument panel outlets Passengers’ windows lock and unlock Windshield wiper and washer Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets Fuel Windshield wiper mist (for single wipe) Foot outlets Front fog lights

Rear window wiper Windshield defroster and foot outlets Hazard warning flasher

Rear window washer Windshield defroster Engine hood

Lights Rear window defogger/Out- side mirror defogger

– CONTINUED – 4

. The SRS airbags deploy with Mark Name Safety precautions when driving considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper Air recirculation & Seatbelt and SRS airbag position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious Engine oil WARNING injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deploy- . All persons in the vehicle should ment, the driver should always Washer fasten their seatbelts BEFORE sit upright and well back in the the vehicle starts to move. Other- seat as far from the steering wise, the possibility of serious wheel as practical while still Door lock (Transmitter) injury becomes greater in the maintaining full vehicle control event of a sudden stop or acci- and the front passenger should dent. move the seat as far back as Door unlock (Transmitter) possible and sit upright and well . To obtain maximum protection in back in the seat. the event of an accident, the Rear gate (Transmitter) driver and all passengers in the For instructions and precautions, carefully vehicle should always wear seat- read the following sections. belts when the vehicle is moving. . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- The SRS (Supplemental Restraint ” F System) airbag does not do away belts 1-11. . with the need to fasten seatbelts. For the SRS airbag system, refer to “ In combination with the seat- *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint ” F belts, it offers the best combined System airbag) 1-34. protection in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag. 5

& Child safety The SRS airbag deploys with . Never leave unattended children considerable speed and force in the vehicle. They could acci- WARNING and can injure or even kill chil- dentally injure themselves or dren, especially if they are 12 others through inadvertent op- . Never hold a child on your lap or years of age and under and are eration of the vehicle. Also, on in your arms while the vehicle is not restrained or improperly re- hot or sunny days, temperature moving. The passenger cannot strained. Because children are in a closed vehicle could quickly protect the child from injury in a lighter and weaker than adults, become high enough to cause collision, because the child will their risk of being injured from severe or possibly fatal injuries be caught between the passen- deployment is greater. to them. ger and objects inside the vehi- . NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD cle. FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE For instructions and precautions, carefully . While riding in the vehicle, in- FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS read the following sections. fants and small children should SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- always be placed in the REAR THE CHILD BY PLACING THE belts” F1-11. seat in an infant or child restraint CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO . For the child restraint system, refer to system which is appropriate for THE SRS AIRBAG. “Child restraint systems” F1-23. ’ the child s age, height and . Always turn the child safety locks . For the SRS airbag system, refer to weight. If a child is too big for a to the “LOCK” position when “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint child restraint system, the child children sit on the rear seat. System airbag)” F1-34. should sit in the REAR seat and Serious injury could result if a be restrained using the seatbelts. child accidentally opens the door & Engine exhaust gas (carbon According to accident statistics, and falls out. Refer to “Child monoxide) children are safer when properly safety locks” F2-19. restrained in the rear seating . ’ positions than in the front seat- Always lock the passenger s win- WARNING dows using the lock switch when ing positions. Never allow a child . Never inhale engine exhaust gas. to stand up or kneel on the seat. children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure Engine exhaust gas contains . Put children aged 12 and under in could result in injury to a child carbon monoxide, a colorless the REAR seat properly re- operating the power window. Re- and odorless gas which is dan- strained at all times in a child fer to “Power windows” F2-20. gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. restraint device or in a seatbelt. . Always properly maintain the en- – CONTINUED – 6

gine exhaust system to prevent & Drinking and driving & Drugs and driving engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle. WARNING WARNING . Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except Drinking and then driving is very There are some drugs (over the for the brief time needed to drive dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- counter and prescription) that can the vehicle in or out of it. stream delays your reaction time delay your reaction time and impair . and impairs your perception, judg- your perception, judgment and at- Avoid remaining in a parked ment and attentiveness. If you drive tentiveness. If you drive after taking vehicle for a lengthy time while after drinking – even if you drink just them, it may increase your, your the engine is running. If that is a little – it will increase the risk of passengers’ and other persons’ risk unavoidable, then use the venti- being involved in a serious or fatal of being involved in a serious or lation fan to force fresh air into accident, injuring or killing yourself, fatal accident. the vehicle. your passengers and others. In . Always keep the front ventilator addition, if you are injured in the If you are taking any drugs, check with inlet grille free from snow, leaves accident, alcohol may increase the your doctor or pharmacist or read the or other obstructions to ensure severity of that injury. literature that accompanies the medication that the ventilation system al- Please don’t drink and drive. to determine if the drug you are taking can ways works properly. impair your driving ability. Do not drive . If at any time you suspect that Drunken driving is one of the most after taking any medications that can exhaust fumes are entering the frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- make you drowsy or otherwise affect your vehicle, have the problem hol affects all people differently, you may ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If checked and corrected as soon have consumed too much alcohol to drive you have a medical condition that requires as possible. If you must drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your you to take drugs, please consult with under these conditions, drive blood is below the legal limit. The safest your doctor. only with all windows fully open. thing you can do is never drink and drive. Never drive if you are under the influence . Keep the rear gate closed while However if you have no choice but to of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your driving to prevent exhaust gas drive, stop drinking and sober up comple- own health and well-being, we urge you from entering the vehicle. tely before getting behind the wheel. not to take illegal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to those drugs. 7

& Driving when tired or sleepy & Modification of your vehicle & Driving with pets Unrestrained pets can interfere with your WARNING CAUTION driving and distract your attention from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, When you are tired or sleepy, your Your vehicle should not be modified unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown reaction time will be delayed and other than with genuine SUBARU around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your perception, judgment and at- parts and accessories. Other types your passengers. Besides, the pets can tentiveness will be impaired. If you of modifications could affect its be hurt under these situations. It is also for drive when tired or sleepy, your, performance, safety or durability, their own safety that pets should be your passengers’ and other per- and may even violate governmental ’ properly restrained in your vehicle. Re- sons chances of being involved in regulations. In addition, damage or strain a pet with a special traveling a serious accident may increase. performance problems resulting harness which can be secured to the rear from modification may not be cov- seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier Please do not continue to drive but ered under warranties. which can be secured to the rear seat by instead find a safe place to rest if you routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you & handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers should make periodic rest stops to refresh Car phone/cell phone and in the front passenger’s seat. For further yourself before continuing on your journey. driving information, consult your veterinarian, When possible, you should share the local animal protection society or pet driving with others. CAUTION shop. Do not use a car phone/cell phone while driving; it may distract your attention from driving and can lead to an accident. If you use a car phone/cell phone, pull off the road and park in a safe place before using your phone. In some States/ Provinces, only hands-free phones may legally be used while driving.

– CONTINUED – 8

& Tire pressures & California proposition 65 order to prevent serious injury or death Check and, if necessary, adjust the warning due to loss of control, rollover and other accidents. Refer to “On-pavement and off- pressure of each tire (including the spare) ” F at least once a month and before any long WARNING road driving 8-6. journey. Engine exhaust, some of its consti- Check the tire pressure when the tires are tuents, and certain vehicle compo- cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the nents contain or emit chemicals tire pressures to the values shown on the known to the State of California to tire placard. For detailed information, refer cause cancer and birth defects or to “Tires and wheels” F11-31. other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids in vehicles and WARNING certain components of product wear contain or emit chemicals known to Driving at high speeds with exces- the State of California to cause sively low tire pressures can cause cancer and birth defects or other the tires to deform severely and to reproductive harm. rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of & the tires. The resulting loss of On-pavement and off-road vehicle control could lead to an driving accident. This vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance and higher center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over than ordinary passenger cars. It also handles and maneuvers differently from other passenger cars. For this reason, please read carefully the following section and follow the instructions and precautions in Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1 Keys and doors 2 Instruments and controls 3 Climate control 4 Audio 5 Interior equipment 6 Starting and operating 7 Driving tips 8 In case of emergency 9 Appearance care 10 Maintenance and service 11 Specifications 12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13 Index 14 10

Illustrated index 1) Engine hood (page 11-5) 2) Headlight switch (page 3-26) & 3) Replacing bulbs (page 11-47) Exterior 4) Wiper switch (page 3-30) 5) Moonroof (page 2-23) 6) Roof rail (page 8-13) 7) Door locks (page 2-4) 8) Tire pressure (page 11-33) 9) Flat tires (page 9-6) 10) Tire chains (page 8-11) 11) Front fog light switch (page 3-28) 12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-12) 13) Towing hook (page 9-12) 11

1) Rear window defogger button (page 3-35) 2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4) 3) Child safety locks (page 2-19) 4) Tie-down hook (page 9-13) 5) Rear gate (page 2-22) 6) Towing hook (page 9-13)

– CONTINUED – 12

& Interior 1) Lower anchorages for child restraint system (page 1-30) ! Passenger compartment area 2) Seatbelt (page 1-11) 3) Parking brake lever (page 7-33) 4) Front seat (page 1-2) 5) Rear seat (page 1-7) 13

1) Center console (page 6-5) 2) Cup holder (page 6-8) 3) Front power supply socket (page 6-9) 4) Glove box (page 6-5)

– CONTINUED – 14

& Instrument panel 1) Door locks (page 2-4) 2) Outside mirror switch (page 3-34) 3) Illumination brightness control (page 3-28) 4) Light control lever (page 3-25) 5) Combination meter (page 3-5) 6) Wiper control lever (page 3-29) 7) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-5) 8) Audio (page 5-1) 9) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-15)/ Selector lever (AT) (page 7-16) 10) Climate control (page 4-1) 11) Cruise control (page 7-36) 12) Horn (page 3-38) 13) SRS airbag (page 1-34) 14) Tilt/telescopic steering (page 3-37/ page 3-38) 15) Audio control buttons (page 5-26) 16) Fuse box (page 11-45) 17) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch (page 7-31) 18) Hood lock release knob (page 11-5) 19) Power windows (page 2-20) 15

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-30) 2) Mist (page 3-31) 3) Windshield washer (page 3-31) 4) Rear window wiper and washer switch (page 3-32) 5) Wiper intermittent time control switch (page 3-31) 6) Wiper control lever (page 3-29) 7) Light control switch (page 3-25) 8) Fog light switch (page 3-28) 9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-26) 10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change (page 3-26) 11) Turn signal (page 3-27)

– CONTINUED – 16

& Combination meter 1) Tachometer (page 3-8) 2) Speedometer (page 3-6) ! U.S.-spec. models 3) Fuel gauge (page 3-8) 4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter reset knob (page 3-6) 5) Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-6) 6) Selector lever and gear position indicator (AT models) (page 3-21) 7) Coolant temperature low indicator light/ Coolant temperature high warning light (page 3-13) 17

! Except U.S.-spec. models 1) Tachometer (page 3-8) 2) Speedometer (page 3-6) 3) Fuel gauge (page 3-8) 4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter reset knob (page 3-6) 5) Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-6) 6) Selector lever and gear position indicator (AT models) (page 3-21) 7) Coolant temperature low indicator light/ Coolant temperature high warning light (page 3-13)

– CONTINUED – 18

& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page

Mark Name Page Front fog light indicator / ABS warning light 3-16 light (if equipped) 3-21 Seatbelt warning light 3-10 Brake system warning / light 3-17 Security indicator light 3-20 Front passenger’s seatbelt warning light 3-10 Door open warning light 3-18 Headlight indicator light 3-21

SRS airbag system 3-11 warning light AWD warning light Cruise control indicator (AT models) 3-18 light 3-21 ’ / Front passenger s fron- 3-12 tal airbag ON indicator Hill start assist warning Cruise control set indi- light (MT models) 3-18 cator light 3-21 Front passenger’s fron- / tal airbag OFF indicator 3-12 Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol operation indicator 3-19 Low fuel warning light 3-18 CHECK ENGINE light warning light/Malfunction 3-12 Vehicle Dynamics Con- Low tire pressure warn- indicator lamp ing light 3-15 trol warning light/Vehicle 3-19 Coolant temperature low Dynamics Control OFF (U.S.-spec. models) indicator light indicator light/Coolant 3-13 temperature high warn- SPORT mode indicator 3-20 ing light Turn signal indicator light (AT models) lights 3-21 Charge warning light 3-14 High beam indicator light 3-21 Oil pressure warning light 3-14 Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (models with HID 3-18 AT OIL TEMP warning headlights) light (AT models) 3-14 19

Function settings

A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with the genuine SUBARU navigation system, the settings for some of these functions can be changed using the navigation monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the navigation system.

Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-14 Monitoring start delay time (after closure 0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-16 of doors) Impact sensor operation (only vehicles Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-19 with shock sensors (dealer option)) Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-17 Dome light/map lights illumination ON/OFF OFF 2-14 Remote keyless entry sys- Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7 tem Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-10

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7 Remote engine start system Horn chirp confirmation ON/OFF ON 7-12 (dealer option) Defogger and deicer system Rear window defogger, outside mirror Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15 minutes 3-35 for vehicles with the auto- defogger and windshield wiper deicer Continuous operation matic climate control system Map light/Dome light Operation of map light/dome light OFF OFF/Short/Normal/Long Long 6-2/ delay timer 6-3 Battery drainage prevention Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-5 function Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation 1-12 ————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————

———————————————————————————————————————— Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1 Front seats...... 1-2 System servicing ...... 1-22 Manual seat ...... 1-3 Precautions against vehicle modification...... 1-23 Power seat (driver’s seat – if equipped) ...... 1-4 Child restraint systems ...... 1-23 Head restraint adjustment...... 1-5 Where to place a child restraint system...... 1-24 Active head restraint ...... 1-5 Choosing a child restraint system ...... 1-25 Seat heater (if equipped) ...... 1-6 Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR Rear seats...... 1-7 seatbelt ...... 1-26 Armrest ...... 1-7 Installing a booster seat...... 1-29 Head restraint adjustment...... 1-8 Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ...... 1-30 Reclining the seatback (if equipped) ...... 1-9 Top tether anchorages ...... 1-33 Folding down the rear seatback...... 1-10 *SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Seatbelts ...... 1-11 System airbag)...... 1-34 Seatbelt safety tips...... 1-11 Vehicles with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ...... 1-12 restraints for driver, front passenger, and Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor window-side rear passengers...... 1-34 (A/ELR) ...... 1-12 SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ...... 1-38 Seatbelt warning light and chime ...... 1-12 SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag...... 1-49 Fastening the seatbelt ...... 1-14 SRS airbag system monitors...... 1-59 Seatbelt maintenance ...... 1-20 SRS airbag system servicing ...... 1-59 Front seatbelt pretensioners ...... 1-20 Precautions against vehicle modification...... 1-60 System monitors ...... 1-21 1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats position when the SRS airbag with considerable speed and force deploys could suffer very serious and can injure or even kill children, injuries. Because the SRS airbag especially if they are 12 years of age WARNING needs enough space for deploy- and under and are not restrained or ment, the driver should always improperly restrained. Because chil- . Never adjust the seat while driv- sit upright and well back in the dren are lighter and weaker than ing to avoid the possibility of seat as far from the steering adults, their risk of being injured loss of vehicle control and of wheel as practical while still from deployment is greater. For that personal injury. maintaining full vehicle control reason, we strongly recommend . Before adjusting the seat, make and the front passenger should that ALL children (including those sure the hands and feet of rear move the seat as far back as in child seats and those that have seat passengers and cargo are possible and sit upright and well outgrown child restraint devices) sit clear of the adjusting mechan- back in the seat. in the REAR seat properly re- ism. strained at all times in a child . Seatbelts provide maximum re- restraint device or in a seatbelt, straint when the occupant sits whichever is appropriate for the ’ well back and upright in the seat. child s age, height and weight. Se- To reduce the risk of sliding cure ALL types of child restraint under the seatbelt in a collision, devices (including forward facing the front seatbacks should be child seat) in the REAR seats at all always used in the upright posi- times. tion while the vehicle is running. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- If the front seatbacks are not CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT used in the upright position in a SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS collision, the risk of sliding under INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD the lap belt and of the lap belt BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD sliding up over the abdomen will TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. increase, and both can result in WARNING According to accident statistics, serious internal injury or death. children are safer when properly . The SRS airbags deploy with Put children aged 12 and under in restrained in the rear seating posi- considerable speed and force. the rear seat properly restrained at tions than in the front seating posi- Occupants who are out of proper all times. The SRS airbag deploys tions. For instructions and precau- Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3

tions concerning child restraint sys- ! Reclining the seatback tems, refer to “Child restraint systems” F1-23.

& Manual seat ! Forward and backward adjustment

WARNING Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired position. Then To prevent the passenger from slid- release the lever and make sure the ing under the seatbelt in the event of seatback is securely locked into place. a collision, always put the seatback The seatback placed in a reclined position in the upright position while the can spring back upward with force when vehicle is in motion. Also, do not Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the lever is pulled. While operating the place objects such as cushions the desired position. Then release the lever to return the seatback, hold the between the passenger and the lever and move the seat back and forth to seatback lightly so that it may be raised seatback. If you do so, the risk of make sure that it is securely locked into back gradually. sliding under the lap belt and of the place. lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

– CONTINUED – 1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Seat cushion height adjustment & Power seat (driver’s seat – if justment of the seat, you cannot adjust (driver’s seat) the seat cushion angle or seat cushion equipped) height. 2) Seat cushion angle control switch To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up or push down the front end of the control switch. 3) Seatback angle (reclining) control switch To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch. 4) Seat height control switch To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch. 5) Lumbar support control switch To increase lower back support, push the front side of the switch. To decrease 1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat lower back support, push the rear side of is lowered. the switch. 2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat rises. The height of the seat can be adjusted by moving the seat cushion adjustment lever up and down.

1) Seat position forward/backward control switch To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch forward or backward. During forward/backward ad- Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. & WARNING Active head restraint To lower it, push the head restraint down To prevent the passenger from slid- while pressing the release button on the ing under the seatbelt in the event of top of the seatback. a collision, always put the seatback . To remove the head restraint in the upright position while the While pressing the release button, pull out vehicle is in motion. Also, do not the head restraint. place objects such as cushions . To install the head restraint between the passenger and the Install the head restraint into the holes that seatback. If you do so, the risk of are located on the top of seatback until it sliding under the lap belt and of the locks. lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in The head restraint should be adjusted so serious internal injury or death. that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupant’s ears. The front seats of your vehicle are equipped with active head restraints. They & Head restraint adjustment WARNING automatically tilt forward slightly in the Never drive the vehicle with the event the vehicle is struck from the rear, head restraints removed because decreasing the amount of rearward head they are designed to reduce the risk movement and thus reducing the risk of of serious neck injury in the event whiplash. For maximum effectiveness, the that the vehicle is struck from the head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest rear. Therefore, when you remove ’ the head restraints, you must re- to the top of the occupant s ears. install all of the head restraints to CAUTION protect vehicle occupants. . Each active head restraint is effective only when its height is properly adjusted and driver/pas- 1) Head restraint senger sits in the correct posi- 2) Release button tion on the seat. – CONTINUED – 1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

. If your vehicle is involved in a Seat heater (if equipped) adjustment dial for each seat heater rear-end collision, have an illuminates when that seat heater is authorized SUBARU dealer in- activated. spect the active head restraints. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed . The active head restraints may enough or before you leave the vehicle, not operate in the event the always turn the adjustment dial to the vehicle experiences only a slight most rearward position so that the “ ” impact in the rear. mark reaches to the “OFF” position. . The active head restraints may be CAUTION damaged if they are pushed hard from behind or subjected to . There is a possibility that people shock. As a result, they may not with delicate skin may suffer function if the vehicle suffers a slight burns even at low tempera- rear impact. tures if they use the seat heater for a long period of time. When Each front seat is equipped with a seat using the heater, always be sure heater. to warn the persons concerned. The seat heater operates when the igni- . Do not put anything on the seat tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON” which insulates against heat, position. such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the Each seat heater has four levels of seat heater to overheat. adjustment. To use the heater in the right-hand seat, turn the “R” adjustment dial forward until the “ ” mark reaches the NOTE desired position. To activate the heater in Use of the seat heater for a long period the left-hand seat, turn the “L” adjustment “ ” of time while the engine is not running dial forward until the mark reaches the can cause battery discharge. desired position. Each heater warms the seat most quickly with the “ ” mark on the adjustment dial in the furthest-forward position. An indicator light next to the Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7

Rear seats & Armrest

WARNING To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge WARNING Never stack luggage or other cargo of the armrest. higher than the top of the seatback Seatbelts provide maximum re- because it could tumble forward and WARNING straint when the occupant sits well injure passengers in the event of a To avoid the possibility of serious back and upright in the seat. Do not sudden stop or accident. injury, passengers must never be put cushions or any other materials allowed to sit on the center armrest between occupants and seatbacks while the vehicle is in motion. or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

– CONTINUED – 1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

& Head restraint adjustment The head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is WARNING closest to the top of the occupant’s ears. When the seats are not occupied, lower Never drive the vehicle with the the head restraints to improve rearward head restraints removed because visibility. they are designed to reduce the risk ! Rear center seating position of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear. CAUTION The head restraint is not intended to ! Rear windows side seating position be used at the lowest position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the CAUTION A) When not used (retracted position) head restraint to an appropriate B) When used (click position) position depending on your sitting The head restraint is not intended to height. be used at the lowest position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to an appropriate position depending on your sitting height.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the A) When not used (retracted position) top of the seatback. B) When used (click position) Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9

& Reclining the seatback (if CAUTION equipped) If the vehicle is equipped with a cargo area cover, observe the following precautions. . Be careful not to pinch your hand between the headrest and the cargo area cover when you re- cline the rear seat. . Move the front cover of the cargo area cover backward so that the cover is not damaged by the “ To raise the head restraint, pull it up while reclined seatback. Refer to Car- go area cover (dealer option)” pressing the release button on the top of F the seatback. 6-13. To lower it, push the head restraint down WARNING while pressing the release button. When the rear-center seating position is To prevent the passenger from slid- occupied, raise the head restraint to an ing under the seatbelt in the event of appropriate position depending on your a collision, always put the seatback sitting height. When the rear center seat- in the upright position while the ing position is not occupied, lower the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not head restraint to improve rearward visibi- place objects such as cushions lity. between the passenger and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death. Push the switch and adjust the seatback to the desired position.

– CONTINUED – 1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Then release the switch and make sure . For vehicles equipped with the 1. Lower the head restraints. the seatback is securely locked into place. rear seat center table, when fold- 2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the ing down the rear seatback, re- release knob and then fold the seatback & Folding down the rear seat- turn the rear seat center table to down. back its original position. If the rear To return the seatback to its original seat center table is not returned position, raise the seatback until it locks WARNING to its original position, the rear into place and make sure that it is securely seat center table could break and locked. . After returning the rear seatback bodily injury could occur. to its original position, be certain to place all of the seatbelts and the tab attached to the seat CAUTION cushion above the seat cushion. And make certain that the Vehicles with the reclining function shoulder belts are fully visible. may automatically fold down strongly because of it’sinternal . Never allow passengers to ride spring. Operate the seatback assist- on the folded rear seatback or in ing with your hands. the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury or death. . Secure all objects and especially long items properly to prevent them from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious injury during a sudden stop, a sudden steering maneuver or a rapid acceleration. Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11

Seatbelts the rear seat properly restrained According to accident statistics, at all times. The SRS airbag children are safer when properly & Seatbelt safety tips deploys with considerable speed restrained in the rear seating and force and can injure or even positions than in the front seat- WARNING kill children, especially if they are ing positions. For instructions 12 years of age and under and and precautions concerning the . All persons in the vehicle should are not restrained or improperly child restraint system, refer to fasten their seatbelts BEFORE restrained. Because children are “Child restraint systems” F1-23. the vehicle starts to move. Other- lighter and weaker than adults, wise, the possibility of serious their risk of being injured from Your vehicle is equipped with a crash injury becomes greater in the deployment is greater. For that sensing and diagnostic module, which will event of a sudden stop or acci- reason, we strongly recommend record the use of the seatbelt by the front dent. that ALL children (including passenger when any of the SRS frontal . All belts should fit snugly in order those in child seats and those and side airbags deploy. that have outgrown child re- to provide full restraint. Loose ! Infants or small children fitting belts are not as effective in straint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all Use a child restraint system that is preventing or reducing injury. suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child . times in a child restraint device Each seatbelt is designed to or in a seatbelt, whichever is restraint systems” F1-23. support only one person. Never appropriate for the child’s height ! Children use a single belt for two or more and weight. persons – even children. Other- If a child is too big for a child restraint wise, in an accident, serious Secure ALL types of child re- system, the child should sit in the rear seat injury or death could result. straint devices (including for- and be restrained using the seatbelts. ward facing child seats) in the According to accident statistics, children . Replace all seatbelt assemblies REAR seats at all times. are safer when properly restrained in the including retractors and attach- rear seating positions than in the front ing hardware worn by occupants NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD seating positions. Never allow a child to of a vehicle that has been in a FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE stand up or kneel on the seat. serious accident. The entire as- FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS sembly should be replaced even SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses if damage is not obvious. THE CHILD BY PLACING THE ’ the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt . CHILD S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO anchor height (window-side seating posi- Put children aged 12 and under in THE SRS AIRBAG. – CONTINUED – 1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags tions only) and then if necessary move the & Emergency Locking Retrac- Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. child closer to the belt buckle to help tor (ELR) When the child restraint system is re- provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must ’ be taken to securely place the lap belt as The driver s seatbelt has an Emergency moved, make sure that the seatbelt low as possible on the hips and not on the Locking Retractor (ELR). retracts fully and the retractor returned to child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the The emergency locking retractor allows the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) belt cannot be properly positioned, a child normal body movement but the retractor mode. restraint system should be used. Never locks automatically during a sudden stop, For instructions on how to convert the place the shoulder belt under the child’s impact or if you pull the belt very quickly retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to “ arm or behind the child’s back. out of the retractor. the ELR mode, refer to Installing child ” ! restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt Expectant mothers & Automatic/Emergency Lock- F1-26. ing Retractor (A/ELR) & Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto- Seatbelt warning light matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ and chime ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt Retractor normally functions as an Emer- warning device at the driver’s and front gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ passenger’s seat, as required by current ELR has an additional locking mode safety standards. “ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” ” mode intended to secure a child restraint position, this device reminds the driver system. When the seatbelt is once drawn and front passenger to fasten their seat- out completely and is then retracted even belts by illuminating the warning lights in slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in the locations indicated in the following that position and the seatbelt cannot be Expectant mothers also need to use the illustration and sounding a chime. extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks seatbelts. They should consult their doctor will be heard which indicate the retractor for specific recommendations. The lap belt functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is should be worn securely and as low as retracted fully, the ALR mode is released. possible over the hips, not over the waist. When securing a child restraint system on the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, the seatbelt must be changed over to the Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” turned ON next time, however, the position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will complete sequence of the warning flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the operation resumes. For further details seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri- about canceling the warning operation, ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will please contact your SUBARU dealer. also sound simultaneously. If there is no passenger on the front NOTE passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning device for the front passenger’s seat will . If the driver’s and/or front passen- ’ ’ be deactivated. The front passenger s ger s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened occupant detection system monitors 6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning whether or not there is a passenger on device operates as follows according the front passenger’s seat. to the vehicle speed. Observe the following precautions. Failure Driver’s warning light – At speeds lower than approxi- to do so may prevent the device from mately 9 mph (15 km/h) functioning correctly or cause the device The warning light(s) for unfastened to fail. seatbelt(s) will alternate between . steady illumination and flashing at Do not install any accessory such as a 15-second intervals. The chime will table or TV onto the seatback. not sound. . Do not store a heavy load in the – At speeds higher than approxi- seatback pocket. mately 9 mph (15 km/h) . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to The warning light(s) for unfastened place his/her hands or legs on the front seatbelt(s) will alternate between passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to flashing and steady illumination at pull the seatback. 15-second intervals and the chime . Do not use front seats with their back- will sound while the warning light(s) ward-forward position and seatback not Front passenger’s warning light is/are flashing. being locked into place securely. If any of . them are not locked securely, adjust them ! It is possible to cancel the warning Operation operation that follows the 6-second again. For the adjustment procedure of If the driver and/or front passenger have/ warning after turning ON the ignition the manual seats, refer to “Manual seat” has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when switch. When the ignition switch is F1-3.

– CONTINUED – 1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

If the seatbelt warning device for the front increase the risk or severity of . Do not put cushions or any other passenger’s seat does not function cor- injury. materials between occupants rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the . and seatbacks or seat cushions. ’ Keep the lap belt as low as front passenger s seat is empty or it is possible on your hips. In a colli- If you do so, the risk of sliding deactivated even when the front passen- sion, this spreads the force of the under the lap belt and of the lap ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), lap belt over stronger hip bones belt sliding up over the abdomen take the following actions. instead of across the weaker will increase, and both can result . Ensure that no article is placed on the abdomen. in serious internal injury or seat other than a child restraint system death. . Seatbelts provide maximum re- and the child occupant, although we straint when the occupant sits strongly recommended that all children well back and upright in the seat. sit in the rear seat properly restrained. . To reduce the risk of sliding Ensure that there is no article left in the under the seatbelt in a collision, seatback pocket. the front seatbacks should be . Ensure that the backward-forward po- always used in the upright posi- sition and seatback of front passenger’s tion while the vehicle is running. seat are locked into place securely by If the front seatbacks are not moving the seat back and forth. used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under If the seatbelt warning device for front the lap belt and of the lap belt passenger’s seat still does not function sliding up over the abdomen will correctly after taking relevant corrective increase, and both can result in actions described above, immediately serious internal injury or death. contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. WARNING & Fastening the seatbelt Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an WARNING accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury. . Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15

CAUTION ! Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.

! Front seatbelts 1. Adjust the seat position according to the following procedure. Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the 4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle upright position. Move the seat as far from until you hear a click. the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control. The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for the Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat- driver/front passenger. back to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as possible. To lower the anchor height, pull the release knob and slide the anchor down. 2. Sit well back in the seat. To raise the anchor height, slide the 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If make sure that it is locked in place. the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more Always adjust the anchor height so that slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, the shoulder belt passes over the middle let the belt retract slightly after giving it a of the shoulder without touching the neck. strong pull, then pull it out slowly again. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist. – CONTINUED – 1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING ! Rear seatbelts (except rear center seatbelt) When wearing the seatbelts, make 1. Sit well back in the seat. sure the shoulder portion of the 2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the webbing does not pass over your belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt the belt stops before reaching the buckle, anchor to a lower position. Placing return the belt slightly and pull it out more the shoulder belt over the neck may slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, result in neck injury during sudden let the belt retract slightly after giving a braking or in a collision. strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly again. ! Unfastening the seatbelt 4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. 5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle Push the button on the buckle. until you hear a click. Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door. Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17

Push the button on the buckle. Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door. ! Rear center seatbelt

WARNING WARNING Fastening the seatbelt with the web- Be sure to fasten both tongue plates bing twisted can increase the risk or to the respective buckles. If the severity of injury in an accident. seatbelt is used only as a shoulder ’ 1) Center seatbelt tongue plate When fastening the belt after it is belt (with the connector s tongue pulled out from the retractor, espe- plate not fastened to the connec- 2) Connector (tongue) ’ 3) Connector (buckle) cially when inserting the connector s buckle on the right-hand side), ’ 4) Center seatbelt buckle tor s tongue plate into the mating it cannot properly restrain the wear- buckle (on right-hand side), always er in position in an accident, possi- check that the webbing is not bly resulting in serious injury or twisted. death.

– CONTINUED – 1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

2. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it through the belt guide.

The rear center seatbelt is stowed in a 4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate recessed compartment located in the into the center seatbelt buckle marked ceiling above the cargo area. 3. After confirming that the webbing is not “CENTER” on the left-hand side until it 1. Remove the tongue plate from the slot twisted, insert the connector (tongue) clicks. in the recessed compartment and pull out attached at the webbing end into the the seatbelt slowly. buckle on the right-hand side until a click is heard. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible You should hold the webbing end and on your hips, not on your waist. guide it back into the retractor while it is rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in ! Unfastening the seatbelt the recessed compartment and then insert the connector (tongue) plate into the slot.

1. Insert a key or other hard pointed object into the slot in the connector (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will Push the release button of the center disconnect from the buckle. seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to unfasten the seatbelt. CAUTION NOTE . Do not allow the retractor to roll When the seatback is folded down for up the seatbelt too quickly. greater cargo area, it is necessary to Otherwise, the metal tongue disconnect the connector. plates may hit against the trim, resulting in damaged trim.

2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. – CONTINUED – 1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up Front seatbelt pretensioners seat occupant. so that the tongue plates are When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, neatly stored. A hanging tongue an operating noise will be heard and a plate can swing and hit against small amount of smoke will be released. the trim during driving, causing These occurrences are normal and not damage to the trim. harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle. & Seatbelt maintenance Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap activated, the seatbelt retractor remains and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not the belts because this could seriously be pulled out and retracted and therefore affect their strength. must be replaced. Inspect the seatbelts and attachments NOTE including the webbing and all hardware . periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, The driver’s and front passenger’s seat- Seatbelt pretensioners are not de- tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The signed to activate in minor frontal or seatbelt pretensioners for the driver’s seat side impacts or in rear impacts. Replace the seatbelts even if only minor . ’ ’ damage is found. and front passenger’s seat operate at the The driver s seat and passenger s same time as the frontal, and side SRS seat pretensioners and frontal, side or CAUTION airbags. If the vehicle rolls over, they curtain SRS airbags operate simulta- operate simultaneously with the curtain neously. . . Keep the belts free of polishes, airbag. Pretensioners are designed to func- oils, chemicals and particularly tion on a one-time-only basis. In the battery acid. The front and side airbag sensors and the event that a pretensioner is activated, rollover sensor are used as the preten- ’ ’ . Never attempt to make modifica- both the driver s and front passenger s sioner sensors. If a sensor detects a tions or changes that will prevent seatbelt retractor assemblies must be certain predetermined amount of force the seatbelt from operating prop- replaced only by an authorized during a frontal collision, a side impact erly. SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat- collision or a rollover collision, the front belt retractor assemblies, use only seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the genuine SUBARU parts. retractor to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively restrains the front Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21

. If either front seatbelt does not equipped with seatbelt preten- seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag retract or cannot be pulled out due to sioners, see your nearest system warning light will illuminate. The a malfunction or activation of the SUBARU dealer. SRS airbag system warning light will show pretensioner, contact your SUBARU . When discarding front seatbelt normal system operation by lighting for dealer as soon as possible. approximately 6 seconds when the igni- . retractor assemblies or scrap- “ ” If the front seatbelt retractor assem- ping the entire vehicle due to tion switch is turned to the ON position. bly or surrounding area has been collision damage or for other The following components are monitored damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer reasons, consult your SUBARU as soon as possible. by the indicator: dealer. . . When you sell your vehicle, we urge Front sub sensor (right-hand side) you to explain to the buyer that it has . Front sub sensor (left-hand side) seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him & System monitors . Airbag control module (including im- to the contents of this section. pact and rollover sensors) . Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) WARNING . Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s side) . To obtain maximum protection, . Side airbag sensor (center pillar right- the occupants should sit in an hand side) upright position with their seat- . belts properly fastened. Refer to Side airbag sensor (center pillar left- “Seatbelts” F1-11. hand side) . ’ . Side airbag module (driver s side) Do not modify, remove or strike . ’ the front seatbelt retractor as- Side airbag module (front passenger s semblies or surrounding area. side) . This could result in accidental Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house right-hand side) activation of the seatbelt preten- SRS airbag system warning light sioners or could make the sys- . Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel tem inoperative, possibly result- A diagnostic system continually monitors house left-hand side) ing in serious injury. Seatbelt the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner . Curtain airbag module (right side) while the vehicle is being driven. The pretensioners have no user-ser- . Curtain airbag module (left side) seatbelt pretensioners share the control viceable parts. For required ser- . Satellite safing sensor (under the rear vicing of front seatbelt retractors module with the SRS airbag system. Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a center seat) – CONTINUED – 1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) . No illumination of the warning . Tampering with or disconnecting . Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen- light when the ignition switch is the system’s wiring could result ger’s side) first turned to the “ON” position in accidental activation of the . Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- . Continuous illumination of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or ger’s side) warning light SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may . Front passenger’s seatbelt tension . Illumination of the warning light sensor result in serious injury. Do not while driving use electrical test equipment on . Front passenger’s occupant detection any circuit related to the seatbelt system weight sensor . ’ & pretensioner and SRS airbag Front passenger s occupant detection System servicing systems. For required servicing control module of the seatbelt pretensioner, con- . Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON WARNING sult your nearest SUBARU deal- and OFF indicator . er. . All related wiring When discarding a seatbelt retractor assembly or scrapping WARNING the entire vehicle damaged by a CAUTION collision, consult your SUBARU If the warning light exhibits any of dealer. The front sub sensors are located the following conditions, there may on both the right and left sides at the be a malfunction in the seatbelt front of the vehicle, and the SRS pretensioners and/or SRS airbag airbag control module including the system. Immediately take your vehi- impact sensors is located under the cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer center console. If you need service to have the system checked. Unless or repair in those areas or near the checked and properly repaired, the front seatbelt retractors, have the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS work performed by your authorized airbag will not operate properly in SUBARU dealer. the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of injury. . Flashing or flickering of the warn- NOTE ing light If the front part of the vehicle is damaged in an accident to the extent Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23 that the seatbelt pretensioner does not Child restraint systems properly secured in the vehicle. When operate, contact your SUBARU dealer installing the child restraint system, care- as soon as possible. fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions. According to accident statistics, children & Precautions against vehicle are safer when properly restrained in the modification rear seating positions than in the front Always consult your SUBARU dealer if seating positions. you want to install any accessory parts to All U.S. states and Canadian provinces your vehicle. require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint CAUTION system at all times while the vehicle is Do not perform any of the following moving. modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt pretensioners. Infants and small children should always . Attachment of any equipment be placed in an infant or child restraint (bush bar, winches, snow plow, system in the rear seat while riding in the skid plate, etc.) other than genu- vehicle. You should use an infant or child ine SUBARU accessory parts to restraint system that meets Federal Motor the front end. Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com- . Modification of the suspension patible with your vehicle and is appro- system or front end structure. priate for the child’s age and size. All child . Installation of a tire of different restraint systems are designed to be size and construction from the secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or tires specified on the vehicle the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt placard attached to the driver’s (except those described in “Installation of WARNING door pillar or specified for indivi- child restraint systems by use of lower and dual vehicle models in this Own- tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-30). Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap or in his or her er’s Manual. Children could be endangered in an arms while the vehicle is moving. accident if their child restraints are not The passenger cannot protect the – CONTINUED – 1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

child from injury in a collision, or in an accident and can be injured A: Front passenger’s seat because the child will be caught seriously. You should not install a child restraint between the passenger and objects Additionally, children standing up or system (including a booster seat) due to inside the vehicle. kneeling on or in front of the front the hazard to children posed by the Additionally, holding a child in your seat are exposed another serious passenger’s airbag. lap or arms in the front seat exposes danger. Since the SRS airbag de- B: Rear seat, window-side seating that child to another serious danger. ploys with considerable speed and positions Since the SRS airbag deploys with force, the child could be injured or Recommended positions for all types of considerable speed and force, the even killed. child restraint systems. child could be injured or even killed. In these positions, Automatic/Emergency & Where to place a child re- Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and straint system lower anchorages (bars) are provided for installing a child restraint system. ’ The following are SUBARU s recommen- Some types of child restraints might not be dations on where to place a child restraint able to be secured firmly due to projection system in your vehicle. of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt. C: Rear seat, center seating position Installing a child restraint system is not WARNING recommended, although the A/ELR seatbelt and an upper anchorage (tether Children should be properly re- anchorage) are provided in this position. strained at all times. Never allow a Some types of child restraints might not be child to stand up, or to kneel on any able to be secured firmly due to projection seat. Unrestrained children will be of the seat cushion. thrown forward during sudden stop In this seating position, you should use Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25 only a child restraint system that has a cording to accident statistics, chil- & Choosing a child restraint bottom base that fits snugly against the dren are safer when properly re- system contours of the seat cushion and can be strained in the rear seating posi- securely retained using the seatbelt. tions than in the front seating posi- If it is unavoidable to install a child tions. restraint system in the rear seat’s center seating position, lower the center head restraint to the lowest position and install the child restraint system by correctly passing the rear center seatbelt through the belt guide. WARNING Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys Choose a child restraint system that is with considerable speed and force appropriate for the child’s age and size and can injure or even kill children, (weight and height) in order to provide the especially if they are 12 years of age child with proper protection. The child and under and are not restrained or WARNING restraint system should meet all applic- improperly restrained. Because chil- able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi- dren are lighter and weaker than SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS cle Safety Standards for the United States adults, their risk of being injured EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- from deployment is greater. SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A dards for Canada. It can be identified by For that reason, be sure to secure REARWARD FACING CHILD looking for the label on the child restraint ’ ALL types of child restraint devices SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS- system or the manufacturer s statement of (including forward facing child SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS compliance in the document attached to seats) in the REAR seats at all times. SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO the system. You should choose a restraint de- THE CHILD BY PLACING THE Also it is important for you to make sure vice which is appropriate for the CHILD’SHEADTOOCLOSETO that the child restraint system is compa- child’s age, height and weight. Ac- THE SRS AIRBAG. tible with the vehicle in which it will be used. – CONTINUED – 1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

& Installing child restraint sys- child suffering personal injury in the tems with A/ELR seatbelt event of an accident may be increased. WARNING ! Installing a rearward facing child . Child restraint systems and seat- restraint belts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it. . Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. 4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. Unsecured child restraint sys- 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the tems can be thrown around in- retractor to change the retractor over from side of the vehicle in a sudden the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) stop, turn or accident; they can to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) strike and injure vehicle occu- function. Then, allow the belt to rewind pants as well as result in serious into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, injuries or death to the child. 1. Place the child restraint system in the clicks will be heard which indicate the rear seating position. retractor functions as ALR. 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through CAUTION or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its When you install a child restraint manufacturer. ’ system, follow the manufacturer s 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle instructions supplied with it. After until you hear a click. installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27

NOTE When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully. ! Installing forward facing child restraint

6. Push and pull the child restraint 8. To remove the child restraint system, system forward and from side to side to press the release button on the seatbelt check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a buckle and allow the belt to retract child restraint can be more firmly secured completely. The belt will return to the by pushing it down into the seat cushion ELR mode. and then tightening the seatbelt. 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt WARNING to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning). NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT 1. Place the child restraint system in the PASSENGER’SSEAT.DOINGSO rear seating position. RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE or around the child restraint system CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE following the instructions provided by its SRS AIRBAG. manufacturer. 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

– CONTINUED – 1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. Before having a child sit in the child 8. If the child restraint system requires a 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, move it back and forth top tether, latch the hook onto the top retractor to change the retractor over from and right and left to check if it is firmly tether anchorage and tighten the top the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) secured. Sometimes a child restraint can tether. For additional instructions, refer to to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) be more firmly secured by pushing it down “Top tether anchorages” F1-33. function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the seat cushion and then tightening into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, the seatbelt. clicks will be heard which indicate the 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt retractor functions as ALR. to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning). Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29

9. To remove the child restraint system, injuries or death to the child. seat. press the release button on the seatbelt 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through buckle and allow the belt to retract or around the booster seat and the child completely. The belt will return to the CAUTION following the instructions provided by its ELR mode. manufacturer. When you install a child restraint 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle system, follow the manufacturer’s until you hear a click. Take care not to NOTE instructions supplied with it. After twist the seatbelt. When the child restraint system is no installing the child restraint system, longer in use, remove it and restore the check to ensure that it is held Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned ’ ELR function of the retractor. That securely in position. If it is not held across the center of child s shoulder and function is restored by allowing the tight and secure, the danger of your that the lap belt is positioned as low as ’ seatbelt to retract fully. child suffering personal injury in the possible on the child s hips. & event of an accident may be in- Installing a booster seat creased. WARNING . Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it. . Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. 4. To remove the booster seat, press the Unsecured child restraint sys- release button on the seatbelt buckle and tems can be thrown around in- allow the belt to retract. side of the vehicle in a sudden 1. Place the booster seat in the rear stop, turn or accident; they can seating position and sit the child on it. The strike and injure vehicle occu- child should sit well back on the booster pants as well as result in serious – CONTINUED – 1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING & Installation of child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your systems by use of lower and child suffering personal injury in the . Never use a belt that is twisted or tether anchorages (LATCH) event of an accident may be in- reversed. In an accident, this can creased. increase the risk or severity of WARNING injury to the child. Some types of child restraint systems can . Never place the shoulder belt . Child restraint systems and seat- be installed on the rear seat of your under the child’s arm or behind belts can become hot in a vehicle vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such the child’s back. If an accident that has been closed up in sunny child restraint systems are secured to the occurs, this can increase the risk weather; they could burn a small designated anchorages provided on the or severity of injury to the child. child. Check the child restraint vehicle body. The lower and tether an- system before you place a child chorages are sometimes referred to as the . The seatbelt should fit snugly in in it. LATCH system (Lower Anchors and order to provide full restraint. Tethers for CHildren). Loose fitting belts are not as . Do not leave an unsecured child effective in preventing or redu- restraint system in your vehicle. cing injury. Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around in- . Placethelapbeltaslowas side of the vehicle in a sudden possible on the child’s hips. A stop, turn or accident; they can high-positioned lap belt will in- strike and injure vehicle occu- crease the risk of sliding under pants as well as result in serious the lap belt and of the lap belt injuries or death to the child. sliding up over the abdomen, and both can result in serious internal injury or death. CAUTION . Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of When you install a child restraint child’s shoulder. Placing the system, follow the manufacturer’s shoulder belt over the neck may instructions supplied with it. After result in neck injury during sud- installing the child restraint system, den braking or in a collision. check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31

the rear seat window-side seating positions. For each window-side seating position, two lower anchorages are provided. Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.

Your vehicle is equipped with four lower 1) Cover anchorages (bars) and three upper an- You will find marks “ ” on the cover at the chorages (tether anchorages) for accom- bottom of the rear seat seatbacks. These modating such child restraint systems. marks indicate the positions of the lower anchorages (bars). The tether anchorages (upper anchorages) are provided at the locations shown in the above illustration.

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for installing a child restraint system only on Each lower anchorage is located where – CONTINUED – 1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags the seat cushion meets the seatback. 1. Use the “ ” marks to locate the two lower anchorages (bars) for the position where you want to install the child restraint system.

3. [If your child restraint system is of a 5. Before seating a child in the child flexible attachment type (which uses restraint system, try to move seat back tether belts to connect the child restraint and forth and right and left to verify that it system properly to the lower anchorages)] is held securely in position. While pushing the child restraint into the 6. To remove the child restraint system, seat cushion, pull both left and right lower follow the reverse procedures of installa- 2. While following the instructions sup- tether belts up to secure the child restraint tion. plied by the child restraint system manu- system firmly by taking up the slack in the facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the belt. If you have any question concerning this lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on type of child restraint system, ask your 4. Connect the top tether hook to the the bottom of the rear seatback. When the SUBARU dealer. hooks are connected, make sure the tether anchorage and firmly tighten the adjacent seatbelts are not caught. tether. For information on how to set the top tether, refer to “Top tether anchorages” F1-33. Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33

& Top tether anchorages ! Anchorage location roof. Your vehicle is equipped with three top ! To hook the top tether tether anchorages so that a child restraint system having a top tether can be installed in the rear seat. When installing a child restraint system using top tether, proceed as follows, while observing the instructions by the child restraint system manufacturer. Since a top tether can provide additional stability by offering another connection between a child restraint system and the vehicle, we recommend that you use a top tether whenever one is required or available. 1. Remove the headrest at the window- side seating position where the child restraint system has been installed with the lower anchorages or seatbelt; lift up the headrest while pressing the release button. Store the headrest in the cargo area. Avoid placing the headrest in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn. 1) For right seat 2) For center seat 3) For left seat There are three anchorages for each seating position on the rear edge of the

– CONTINUED – 1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Please contact your SUBARU dealer if *SRS airbag (Supplemental you have any question regarding the Restraint System airbag) installation of a child restraint system. CAUTION *SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used be- Always remove the headrest when cause the airbag system supplements the ’ mounting a child restraint system vehicle s seatbelts. with a top tether. Otherwise, the top Your vehicle is equipped with a crash tether cannot be fastened tightly. sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seatbelt by the front passenger when any of the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags deploys. 2. For both window-side seating positions, remove the cover for the appropriate & Vehicles with SRS airbags upper anchorage. and lap/shoulder restraints for driver, front passenger, and window-side rear passengers Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in addition to a lap/shoulder belt at each front seating position and each rear window-side seating positions. The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of six airbags. The configurations are as follows. . Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal airbags . ’ ’ 3. Attach the child restraint top tether Driver s and front passenger s side hook to the appropriate upper anchorage. airbags . 4. Tighten the top tether securely. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas- Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35 senger, and window-side rear passen- concerning the seatbelt system, needs enough space for deploy- gers) refer to “Seatbelts” F1-11. ment, the driver should always . sit upright and well back in the These SRS airbags are designed only Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because seat as far from the steering as a supplement to the primary protec- wheel as practical while still tion provided by the seatbelt. the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed – faster than maintaining full vehicle control The system also controls front seatbelt the blink of an eye – and force to and the front passenger should pretensioners. For operation instructions protect in high speed collisions, move the seat as far back as and precautions concerning the seatbelt the force of an airbag can injure possible and sit upright and well pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre- an occupant whose body is too back in the seat. tensioners” F1-20. close to SRS airbag. . Do not place any objects over or WARNING It is also important to wear your near the SRS airbag cover or seatbelt to help avoid injuries between you and the SRS airbag. . To obtain maximum protection in that can result when the SRS If the SRS airbag deploys, those the event of an accident, the airbag contacts an occupant not objects could interfere with its driver and all passengers in the in proper position such as one proper operation and could be vehicle should always wear seat- thrown forward during pre-acci- propelled inside the vehicle and belts when the vehicle is moving. dent braking. cause injury. The SRS airbag is designed only Even when properly positioned, as a supplement to the primary there remains a possibility that protection provided by the seat- an occupant may suffer minor belt. It does not do away with the injury such as abrasions and need to fasten seatbelts. In com- bruises to the face or arms bination with the seatbelts, it because of the SRS airbag de- offers the best combined protec- ployment force. tion in case of a serious accident. . The SRS airbags deploy with Not wearing a seatbelt increases considerable speed and force. the chance of severe injury or Occupants who are out of proper death in a crash even when the position when the SRS airbag vehicle has the SRS airbag. deploys could suffer very serious For instructions and precautions injuries. Because the SRS airbag

– CONTINUED – 1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING positions than in the front seat- get fresh air promptly. ing positions. . A deploying SRS airbag releases . Put children aged 12 and under in For instructions and precautions hot gas. Occupants could get the rear seat properly restrained concerning the child restraint burned if they come into direct at all times. The SRS airbag system, refer to “Child restraint contact with the hot gas. deploys with considerable speed systems” F1-23. and force and can injure or even . NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD NOTE kill children, especially if they are FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE 12 years of age and under and FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS When you sell your vehicle, we urge are not restrained or improperly SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO you to explain to the buyer that it is restrained. Because children are THE CHILD BY PLACING THE equipped with SRS airbags by alerting lighter and weaker than adults, ’ him or her to the applicable section in CHILD S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO ’ their risk of being injured from THE SRS AIRBAG. this Owner s Manual. deployment is greater. . Never allow a child to stand up, For that reason, we strongly or to kneel on the front passen- recommend that ALL children ger’s seat, or never hold a child (including those in child seats on your lap or in your arms. The and those that have outgrown SRS airbag deploys with consid- child restraint devices) sit in the erable force and can injure or REAR seat properly restrained at even kill the child. all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the child’s age, CAUTION height and weight. . Secure ALL types of child re- When the SRS airbag deploys, straint devices (including for- some smoke will be released. ward facing child seats) in the This smoke could cause breath- REAR seats at all times. ing problems for people with a history of asthma or other According to accident statistics, breathing trouble. If you or your children are safer when properly passengers have breathing pro- restrained in the rear seating blems after SRS airbag deploys, Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37

! Components 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right- hand side) 10) Airbag wiring 11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) 12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s side) 13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house right-hand side) 14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house left-hand side) 15) Curtain airbag module (right side) 16) Curtain airbag module (left side) 17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s side) 18) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sensor 19) Front passenger’s occupant detection system weight sensor 20) Front passenger’s occupant detection control module 21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator 22) SRS airbag system warning light 23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear center seat)

1) Airbag control module (including impact 5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side) and rollover sensors) 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side) 2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s 3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s side) side) 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand 4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) side) – CONTINUED – 1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

& SUBARU advanced frontal system. BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD airbag system The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. in the center portion of the steering wheel. Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU ’ advanced frontal airbag system that com- The front passenger s SRS frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard plies with the new advanced frontal airbag “ ” requirements in the amended Federal under an SRS AIRBAG mark. Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) In a moderate to severe frontal collision, No. 208. the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag frontal airbags deploy and supplement the system automatically determines the de- seatbelts by reducing the impact on the ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal driver’s and front passenger’s head and airbag at the time of deployment as well as chest. whether or not to activate the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if activated, the deployment force of the SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment. WARNING Your vehicle has warning labels on the driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors Never allow a child to stand up, or to beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH kneel on the front passenger’s seat. ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag The SRS airbag deploys with con- attached to the glove box lid beginning siderable force and can injure or with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air even kill the child. Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels and tag. Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU WARNING advanced frontal airbag system is a supplemental restraint system and must NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- be used in combination with a seatbelt. All CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT occupants should wear a seatbelt or be SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS seated in an appropriate child restraint INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39

seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in proper position such as one thrown toward the front of the vehicle during pre- accident braking.

WARNING WARNING Never hold a child on your lap or in The SRS airbag deploys with con- your arms. The SRS airbag deploys siderable speed and force. Occu- with considerable force and can pants who are out of proper position injure or even kill the child. when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Be- cause the SRS airbag needs enough WARNING space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well Do not put any objects over the back in the seat as far from the steering wheel pad and dashboard. steering wheel as practical while If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, still maintaining full vehicle control those objects could interfere with its and the front passenger should proper operation and could be pro- move the seat as far back as pelled inside the vehicle and cause possible and sit upright and well injury. back in the seat. It is also important to wear your

– CONTINUED – 1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

NOTE . Do not apply any strong impact to the The driver’s SRS side airbag, SRS front passenger’s seat such as by kicking. curtain airbag and seatbelt preten- . Do not spill liquid on the front passen- sioner are not controlled by the ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- immediately. tem. . Do not remove or disassemble the front ’ ! ’ passenger s seat. Front passenger s SRS frontal air- . bag Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a genuine ’ The front passenger s SRS frontal airbag SUBARU accessory under the front pas- uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator senger’s seat. operates in different ways depending on . Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel- the severity of impact. la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat. The total load on the seat is monitored by . ’ WARNING ’ The front passenger s seat must not be the occupant detection system s weight used with the head restraint removed. sensor located under the seat. Do not attach accessories to the . Do not leave any article including a windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- The system has another sensor that child restraint system on the front passen- ror over the rear view mirror. If the monitors the tension of the front passenger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue and SRS airbag deploys, those objects ger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and buckle engaged when you leave your could become projectiles that could seatbelt tension data from the sensors, vehicle. seriously injure vehicle occupants. the occupant detection system determines . whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal Do not place a magnet near the airbag should or should not be inflated. seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor. ! ’ . Driver s SRS frontal airbag The occupant detection system may not Do not use front seats with their back- The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal ward-forward position and seatback not dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal being locked into place securely. If any of different ways depending on the severity airbag deploys. This is normal. them are not locked securely, adjust them of impact. again. For the adjustment procedure of Observe the following precautions. Failure the manual seats, refer to “Manual seat” Have the system inspected by your to do so may prevent the SUBARU F1-3. SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS advanced frontal airbag system from airbag system warning light illuminates. functioning correctly or cause the system If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front to fail. passenger’s occupant detection system Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41 have failed, the SRS airbag system ! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal warning light will illuminate. Have the OFF indicators airbag determined by the SUBARU ad- system inspected by your SUBARU deal- vanced frontal airbag system monitoring. er immediately if the SRS airbag system If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag warning light illuminates. is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag If your vehicle has sustained impact, this ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF may affect the proper function of the indicator will remain off. SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag Have your vehicle inspected at your is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal SUBARU dealer. airbag ON indicator will remain off while NOTE the OFF indicator will illuminate. With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” ’ The front passenger s SRS side airbag, position, if both the ON and OFF indica- SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre- tors remain illuminated or off simulta- tensioner are not controlled by the neously even after the system check SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- ON or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag period, the system is faulty. Contact your tem. ON indicator SUBARU dealer immediately for an in- or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag spection. OFF indicator ! Conditions in which front passen- The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not and OFF indicators show you the status of activated the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag The indicators are located next to the will not be activated when any of the clock in the center portion of the dash- following conditions are met regarding the board. front passenger’s seat: When the ignition switch is turned to the . The seat is empty. “ON” position, both the ON and OFF . The seat is equipped with a rearward indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during facing child restraint system and an infant which time the system is checked. Follow- is restrained with it. (See WARNING that ing the system check, both indicators turn follows.) off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the . indicators illuminates depending on the The seat is equipped with a forward – CONTINUED – 1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags facing child restraint system and a small passenger’s seat may be killed or ! If the front passenger’s frontal air- child is restrained with it. (See WARNING severely injured should the front bag ON indicator illuminates and the that follows.) passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de- OFF indicator turns off even when . The seat is equipped with a booster ploy. REAR seats are the safest an infant or a small child is in a child seat and a small child is in the booster place for children. restraint system (including booster seat. (See WARNING that follows.) seat) . The seat is relieved of the occupant When the front passenger’s seat is occu- Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” load for a time exceeding the predeter- pied by a child, observe the following position if the front passenger’s frontal mined monitoring time period. precautions. Failure to do so may increase airbag ON indicator illuminates and the . the load on the front passenger’s seat, OFF indicator turns off even when an The seat is occupied by a child who ’ has outgrown a child restraint system or activating the front passenger sSRS infant or a small child is in a child restraint by a small adult. (See WARNING that frontal airbag even though that seat is system (including booster seat). Remove follows.) occupied by a child. the child restraint system from the seat. By . . The front passenger’s occupant detec- Do not place any article on the seat referring to the child restraint manufac- tion system is faulty. other than the child occupant and a child turer’s recommendations as well as the restraint system. child restraint system installation proce- WARNING . Do not place more than one child on dures in “Child restraint systems” F1-23, the seat. correctly install the child restraint system. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- . Do not install any accessory such as a Turntheignitionswitchtothe“ON” CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT table or TV onto the seatback. position and make sure that the front PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE . passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator ’ Do not store a heavy load in the FRONT PASSENGER S SRS FRON- seatback pocket. turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to sure to install it in the REAR seat in If the ON indicator still remains illuminated place his/her hands or legs on the front a correct manner. Also, it is strongly while the OFF indicator turns off, take the passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to recommended that any forward fa- following actions. pull the seatback. cing child seat or booster seat be . Ensure that no article is placed on the installed in the REAR seat, and that seat other than the child restraint system even children who have outgrown a and the child occupant. child restraint system be also . Ensure that there is no article left in the seated in the REAR seat. This is seatback pocket. because children sitting in the front . Ensure that the backward-forward po- Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43 sition and seatback of front passenger’s above have been taken, seat the child/ lift the front passenger’s seat cushion seat are locked into place securely by small adult in the rear seat and im- using his/her feet. moving the seat back and forth. mediately contact your SUBARU dealer . Do not place any article under the front for an inspection. Even if the system passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article If the ON indicator still remains illuminated has passed the dealer inspection, it is from behind and under the seat. This may while the OFF indicator turns off after recommended that on subsequent trips lift the seat cushion. taking relevant corrective actions de- the child/small adult always take the . Do not squeeze any article between scribed above, relocate the child restraint rear seat. ’ system to the rear seat and immediately the front passenger s seat and side trim/ contact your SUBARU dealer for an Children who have outgrown a child pillar, door or center console box. This inspection. restraint system should always wear the may lift the seat cushion. seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag NOTE is deactivated or activated. ! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF When a child who has outgrown a child ! Conditions in which front passen- indicator illuminates and the ON restraint system or a small adult is ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated indicator turns off even when the front passenger’s seat is occupied seated in the front passenger’s seat, ’ The front passenger s SRS frontal airbag by an adult the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon system may or may not activate the impact when any of the following condi- This can be caused by the adult incor- ’ ’ front passenger s SRS frontal airbag tions are met regarding the front passen- rectly sitting in the front passenger s seat. ’ “ ” depending on the occupant s seating ger’s seat. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK ’ posture. If the front passenger s SRS . position. Ask the front passenger to set When the seat is occupied by an adult. the seatback to the upright position, sit up frontal airbag is activated (the ON . indicator remains illuminated while When a heavy article is placed on the straight in the center of the seat cushion, the OFF indicator turns off), take the seat. correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ following actions. When the front passenger’s seat is occu- her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to . Ensure that no article is placed on the rearmost position. Turn the ignition pied by an adult, observe the following “ ” the seat other than the occupant. precautions. Failure to do so may lessen switch to the ON position. If the OFF . Ensure that there is no article left in the load on the front passenger’s seat, indicator remains illuminated while the ON the seatback pocket. deactivating the front passenger’s SRS indicator remains off, take the following frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat actions. If the ON indicator still remains illumi- . “ ” is occupied by an adult. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK nates while the OFF indicator turns off . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to position. despite the fact that the actions noted . Ensure that there are no articles, – CONTINUED – 1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags books, shoes, or other objects trapped the following SUBARU distributors. you bought your vehicle. under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side of the seat. . Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger’s Subaru of America, Inc. seat are locked into place securely by Customer Dealer Services Department moving the seat back and forth. P.O. Box 6000 . Next, turn the ignition switch to the Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000 “ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783) the system to complete self-checking. Following the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii indicator should illuminate while the OFF 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu, indicator remains off. HI 96819 808-839-2273 If the OFF indicator still remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo- and immediately contact your SUBARU bile dealer for an inspection. 491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo, ! Effect vehicle modifications made Guam for persons with disabilities may 671-633-2698 have on SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system operation (U.S. only) Trebol Motors Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico front side frame, radiator panel, instrument 00910 panel, combination meter, steering wheel, 787-793-2828 steering column, tire, suspension or floor There are currently no SUBARU distribu- panel can affect the operation of the tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are SUBARU advanced airbag system. If in such an area, please contact the you have any questions, you may contact SUBARU distributor or dealer from which Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45

! Operation The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is designed to determine the activation or deactivation condition of the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag depending on the total load on the front passenger’s seat monitored by the front passenger’s occupant detection system weight sensor. For this reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the system. If the front sub sensors and the impact sensors in the airbag control module detect a predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s module or both driver’s and front passenger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags use dual stage inflators.

A) Driver’s side B) Passenger’s side 1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs. 2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not obstructed.

– CONTINUED – 1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

The two inflators of each airbag are CAUTION the visible damage done to the vehicle triggered either sequentially or simulta- itself. neously, depending on the severity of Do not touch the SRS airbag system ! impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS Example of accident in which the components around the steering driver’s/driver’s and front passen- frontal airbag and depending on the wheel and dashboard with bare ’ severity of impact and the total load on ger s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most hands right after deployment. Doing likely deploy. the seat in the case of the front passen- so can cause burns because the ger’s SRS frontal airbag. After deploy- components can be very hot as a ment, the SRS airbag immediately starts result of deployment. to deflate so that the driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time required from detect- The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front ing impact to the deflation of the SRS passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de- airbag after deployment is shorter than the signed to deploy in the event of an blink of an eye. accident involving a moderate to severe Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal frontal collision. It is basically not designed airbag deploys and the driver’s and front to deploy in lesser frontal impacts be- passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy, cause the necessary protection can be the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they pretensioners operate at the same time. are basically not designed to deploy in side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci- Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS dents because deployment of only the A head-on collision against a thick con- airbag would activate in a non-accident driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision would not help the occupant in those only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both and will not interfere with the driver’s situations. The driver’s and front passen- driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal ability to maintain control of the vehicle. ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti- function on a one-time-only basis. vated when the vehicle is exposed to a When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, frontal impact similar in fashion and fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and SRS airbag deployment depends on the magnitude to the collision described some smoke will be released. These level of force experienced in the passen- above. occurrences are a normal result of the ger compartment during a collision. That deployment. This smoke does not indicate level differs from one type of collision to a fire in the vehicle. another, and it may have no bearing on Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47

! Examples of the types of accidents Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or in which it is possible that the both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS driver’s/driver’s and front passen- frontal airbags may be activated when the ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de- vehicle sustains a hard impact in the ploy. undercarriage area from the road surface (such as when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).

– CONTINUED – 1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a ’ telephone pole or sign pole. and front passenger s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur. 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a truck. 3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset frontal impact. 4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal collision. There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved. Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49

! Examples of the types of accidents to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the & SRS side airbag and SRS in which the driver’s/driver’s and side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its curtain airbag front passenger’s SRS frontal side or roof, or if it is involved in a low- airbag(s) will basically not deploy. speed frontal collision. The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback, which bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label. Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant’s chest and waist. The SRS side airbag operates only for front seat occupants. The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over 1) First impact the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is 2) Second impact located at the top of each center pillar. In an accident where the vehicle is Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact impacted more than once, the driver’s collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal impacted side of the vehicle deploys airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first between the occupant and the side impact. window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant’s Example: In the case of a double collision, head. first with another vehicle, then against a In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both concrete wall in immediate succession, sides of the vehicle deploy between the once either or both of the driver’s and front occupant and the side window and sup- passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are plement the seatbelt by reducing the The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS activated on the first impact, it/they will not impact to the occupant’s head. frontal airbags are designed basically not be activated on the second impact.

– CONTINUED – 1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

WARNING door, and it provides protection by deploying rapidly (faster than The SRS side airbag and SRS the blink of an eye) in the event of curtain airbag are designed as only a side impact collision. However, a supplement to the primary protec- theforceofSRSsideairbag tion provided by the seatbelt. They deployment may cause injuries do not do away with the need to if your head or other parts of the fasten seatbelts. It is also important body are too close to the SRS to wear your seatbelt to help avoid side airbag. injuries that can result when an . Since your vehicle is equipped occupant is not seated in a proper with SRS curtain airbags, do not upright position. sit or lean unnecessarily close to the front or rear door on either side. Also, do not put your head, arms and hands out of the win- WARNING dow. The SRS curtain airbag on Do not rest your arm on either front each side of the cabin is stored in door or its internal trim. It could be the roof side (between the front injured in the event of SRS side pillar and a point over the rear airbag deployment. seat), and it provides protection by deploying rapidly (faster than the blink of an eye) in the event of a side impact or a rollover. How- ever, the force of its deployment may cause injuries if your head is too close to it. WARNING . Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to either front door. The SRS side airbag is stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51

WARNING . Never allow a child to kneel on the front passenger’s seat facing the side window or to wrap his/ her arms around the front seat seatback. In the event of an accident, the force of the SRS side airbag deployment could injure the child seriously because his/her head or arms or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side airbag. Since your vehicle is also WARNING equipped with a front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag, children . Do not attach accessories to the aged 12 and under should be door trim or near either SRS side placed in the rear seat anyway airbags and do not place objects and should be properly re- near the SRS side airbags. In the strained at all times. event of the SRS side airbag . Never allow a child to kneel on deployment, they could be pro- any passenger’s seat facing the pelled dangerously toward the side window or put their head, vehicle’s occupants and cause arms and hands out of the win- injuries. dow. In the event of an accident, . Do not attach a hands-free micro- the force of the SRS curtain phone or any other accessory to airbag deployment could injure a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear the child seriously because his/ pillar, the windshield, a side win- her head is close to the SRS dow, an assist grip, or any other curtain airbag. cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag.

– CONTINUED – 1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

deploy independently of each other since A hands-free microphone or WARNING other accessory in such a loca- each has its own impact sensor. There- tion could be propelled through Do not put any kind of cover or fore, they may not both deploy in the same the cabin with great force by the clothes or other objects over either accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag, or it could prevent SRS curtain airbag deploys independently front seatback and do not attach ’ ’ correct deployment of the curtain labels or stickers to the front seat of the driver s and front passenger s SRS airbag. In either case, the result surface on or near the SRS side frontal airbags in the steering wheel and could be serious injuries. airbag. They could prevent proper instrument panel. . Never hang or place coat hangers deployment of the SRS side airbag, An impact sensor, which senses impact or other hard or pointed objects reducing protection available to the force, is located in each of the left and near the side windows. If such front seat’s occupant. right center pillars and rear wheel houses. items are present when the SRS Another impact sensor, which also senses curtain airbags deploy, they ! Operation impact force, is located under the rear could be thrown through the center seat. In addition, a rollover sensor passenger compartment and is located inside the airbag control mod- cause serious injuries. They ule. If one of the center pillar impact could also prevent proper opera- sensors and the impact sensor that is tion of the SRS curtain airbags. located under the rear center seat together sense an impact force above a predetermined level in a side collision, the control module causes both the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag on the impacted side to inflate regardless of whether the rear wheel house impact sensor on the same side senses an impact. If one of the rear wheel house impact sensors and the impact sensor that is located under the The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain rear center seat together sense a suffi- airbag can function only when the ignition “ ” ciently strong impact force, the control switch is in the ON position. module causes only the SRS curtain The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS airbag on the impacted side to inflate. If side airbags and SRS curtain airbags the rollover sensor detects rollover of the Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53 vehicle, the control module inflates the After deployment, do not touch any and inclination at the time of the rollover. curtain airbags. After the deployment, the part of the SRS curtain airbag ! Example of the type of accident in SRS side airbag immediately starts to system (from the front pillar to the which the SRS side airbag will most deflate. The time required from detection part of the roof side over the rear likely deploy. of an impact to deflation of an SRS side seat). Doing so can cause burns airbag after deployment is shorter than the because the components can be blink of an eye. very hot as a result of deployment. The SRS curtain airbags remain inflated for a while following deployment then The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain slowly deflates. airbags are designed to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain to severe side impact collision. Also, in the airbags deploy even when no one occu- case of a rollover, the SRS curtain airbags pies the seat on the side on which an deploy. They are basically not designed to impact is applied. deploy in a lesser side impact. Also, they When the SRS side airbag and SRS are basically not designed to deploy in curtain airbags deploy, a sudden, fairly frontal or rear impacts because SRS side loud inflation noise will be heard and some airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy- smoke will be released. These occur- ment would not help the occupant in those A severe side impact near the front seat rences are a normal result of the deploy- situations. activates the SRS side airbag and SRS ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain curtain airbag. in the vehicle. airbags are designed to function on a one- time-only basis. CAUTION SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag Do not touch the SRS side airbag deployment depend on the level of force system components around the experienced in the passenger compart- front seat seatback with bare hands ment during a side impact collision. That right after deployment. Doing so can level differs from one type of collision to cause burns because the compo- another, and it may have no bearing on nents can be very hot as a result of the visible damage done to the vehicle deployment. itself. Also, the SRS curtain airbags deploy depending on the vehicle’s position – CONTINUED – 1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most 1) A severe side impact near the front seat or the rear seat activates the SRS curtain likely deploy. airbag. 2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof. 3) If the angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone laterally. Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side 1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy. 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole 3) Landing hard or vehicle falling It is possible that the SRS side and curtain airbags will deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

– CONTINUED – 1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-on impact. deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment. 3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object. 4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle. 5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof. There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved. Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-on impact. to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment. 3) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle. There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS curtain airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS curtain airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

– CONTINUED – 1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

! Examples of the types of accidents 2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on in which the SRS side airbag and The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain the first impact, they will not be activated SRS curtain airbag will basically not airbag are basically not designed to on the second. deploy. deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal ! Example of the type of accident in collision or is struck from behind. Exam- which the SRS curtain airbag will ples of such accidents are illustrated. basically not deploy.

1) First impact 2) Second impact The SRS curtain airbags are not basically A) SRS curtain airbag designed to deploy if the vehicle pitches B) SRS side airbag end over end. In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy only once on the first impact. Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle and 1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision immediately followed by another from the with another vehicle (moving or station- same direction, once the SRS side airbag ary). Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59

’ & SRS airbag system monitors ger s side) WARNING . Side airbag sensor (center pillar right- hand side) If the warning light exhibits any of . Side airbag sensor (center pillar left- the following conditions, there may hand side) be a malfunction in the seatbelt . Side airbag module (driver’s side) pretensioners and/or SRS airbag . Side airbag module (front passenger’s system. Immediately take your vehi- side) cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer . to have the system checked. Unless Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel checked and properly repaired, the house right-hand side) seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS . Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel airbag will not operate properly in house left-hand side) the event of a collision, which may . Curtain airbag module (right side) increase the risk of injury. . A diagnostic system continually monitors Curtain airbag module (left side) . Flashing or flickering of the warn- the readiness of the SRS airbag system . Satellite safing sensor (under the rear ing light (including front seatbelt pretensioners) center seat) . No illumination of the warning . ’ while the vehicle is being driven. The Seatbelt pretensioner (driver s side) light when the ignition switch is SRS airbag system warning light “AIR- . Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen- first turned to the “ON” position BAG” will show normal system operation ’ ger s side) . Continuous illumination of the by lighting for approximately 6 seconds . Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- warning light when the ignition switch is turned to the ’ ger s side) . “ON” position. . ’ Illumination of the warning light Front passenger s seatbelt tension while driving The following components are monitored sensor by the indicator: . Front passenger’s occupant detection . Front sub sensor (right-hand side) system weight sensor & SRS airbag system servicing . Front sub sensor (left-hand side) . Front passenger’s occupant detection . Airbag control module (including im- control module WARNING pact and rollover sensors) . Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON . . Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) and OFF indicator When discarding an airbag mod- . ule or scrapping the entire vehi- . Frontal airbag module (front passen- All related wiring – CONTINUED – 1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

cle damaged by a collision, con- . Top of the dashboard on front the front pillar to a point over the rear sult your SUBARU dealer. passenger’s side and nearby seat) is scratched, cracked, or other- . areas wise damaged. The SRS airbag has no user- . serviceable parts. Do not use . Each front seat and nearby area Center pillar, rear wheel house or rear sub frame, or an area near these electrical test equipment on any . Inside each center pillar parts, was involved in an accident in circuit related to the SRS airbag . system. For required servicing of In each roof side (from the front which the SRS side airbag and SRS pillar to a point over the rear seat) curtain airbag did not deploy. the SRS airbag, consult your . nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper- . Between the rear seat cushion The fabric or leather of either front ing with or disconnecting the and rear wheel house on each seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise system’s wiring could result in side damaged. . The rear part of the vehicle was accidental inflation of the SRS . Under the rear center seat airbag or could make the system involved in an accident in which no SRS airbag was deployed. inoperative, which may result in In the event that the SRS airbag is serious injury. deployed, replacement of the system should be performed only by an author- & Precautions against vehicle ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- modification CAUTION nents of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use only genuine SUBARU If you need service or repair in areas WARNING parts. indicated in the following list, have To avoid accidental activation of the the work performed by an author- NOTE system or rendering the system ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- In the following cases, contact your inoperative, which may result in bag control module, impact sensors SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. serious injury, no modifications and airbag modules are stored in . should be made to any components these areas. The front part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which only or wiring of the SRS airbag system. . Under the center console the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both This includes following modifica- . On both the right and left sides at driver’s and front passenger’sSRS tions: the front of the vehicle frontal airbags did not deploy. . . Installation of custom steering . Steering wheel and column and The pad of the steering wheel, the ’ wheels nearby areas cover over the front passenger s SRS frontal airbag, or either roof side (from . Attachment of additional trim Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-61

materials to the dashboard CAUTION . Installation of custom seats Do not perform any of the following . Replacement of seat fabric or modifications. Such modifications leather can interfere with proper operation . Installation of additional fabric or of the SRS airbag system. leather on the front seat . Attachment of any equipment . Attachment of a hands-free mi- (bush bar, winches, snow plow, crophone or any other accessory skid plate, etc.) other than genu- to a front pillar, a center pillar, a ine SUBARU accessory parts to rear pillar, the windshield, a side the front end. window, an assist grip, or any . Modification of the suspension other cabin surface that would be system or front end structure. near a deploying SRS curtain airbag. . Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the . Installation of additional electri- tires specified on the vehicle cal/electronic equipment such as placard attached to the driver’s a mobile two-way radio on or door pillar or specified for indivi- near the SRS airbag system dual vehicle models in this Own- components and/or wiring is not er’s Manual. advisable. This could interfere with proper operation of the . Attachment of any equipment SRS airbag system. (side steps or side sill protectors, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory parts on your vehicle. ————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————

———————————————————————————————————————— Keys and doors

Keys ...... 2-2 Replacing lost transmitters ...... 2-11 Key number plate...... 2-2 Alarm system...... 2-14 2 Immobilizer ...... 2-2 System operation...... 2-14 Security ID plate...... 2-3 Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-15 Security indicator light ...... 2-3 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm Key replacement ...... 2-4 system ...... 2-15 Door locks ...... 2-4 Arming the system ...... 2-15 Locking and unlocking from the outside ...... 2-4 Disarming the system ...... 2-17 Locking and unlocking from the inside ...... 2-5 Valet mode ...... 2-17 Battery drainage prevention function ...... 2-5 Passive arming...... 2-17 Power door locking switches...... 2-6 Tripped sensor identification ...... 2-18 Shock sensors (dealer option)...... 2-19 Key lock-in prevention function ...... 2-7 Remote keyless entry system ...... 2-7 Child safety locks ...... 2-19 Locking the doors ...... 2-8 Windows...... 2-20 Unlocking the doors...... 2-9 Power windows ...... 2-20 Unlocking the rear gate ...... 2-9 Rear gate...... 2-22 Illuminated entry ...... 2-9 Moonroof (if equipped)...... 2-23 Vehicle finder function...... 2-9 To open the moonroof ...... 2-24 Sounding a panic alarm...... 2-10 To close the moonroof ...... 2-24 Selecting audible signal operation ...... 2-10 Anti-entrapment function...... 2-24 Replacing the battery ...... 2-10 Sun shade ...... 2-25 2-2 Keys and doors

Keys glove box locked when you leave your Immobilizer vehicle and valet key at a parking facility. The immobilizer system is designed to CAUTION prevent an unauthorized person from starting the engine. Only keys registered Do not attach a large key holder or with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can key case to either key. If it bangs be used to operate your vehicle. Even if against your knees while you are an unregistered key fits into the ignition driving, it could turn the ignition switch and can be turned to the “START” switch from the ON position to the position, the engine will automatically stop Acc or OFF position, thereby stop- after several seconds. ping the engine. Each immobilizer key contains a transponder in which the key’s ID code is & Key number plate stored. When a key is inserted into the “ ” 1) Master key (black) The key number is stamped on the key ignition switch and turned to the ON number plate attached to the key set. position, the transponder transmits the 2) Submaster key (black) ’ ’ 3) Valet key (gray) Write down the key number and keep it in key s ID code to the immobilizer system s 4) Key number plate another safe place, not in the vehicle. This receiver. If the transmitted ID code 5) Security ID plate number is needed to make a replacement matches the ID code registered in the key if you lose your key or lock it inside the immobilizer system, the system allows the Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle. engine to be started. Since the ID code is vehicle: transmitted and acted upon almost in- Master key, submaster key and valet key. For information on making replacement stantly, the immobilizer system does not keys for vehicles with the immobilizer impede normal starting of the engine. The master key and submaster key fit all system, refer to “Security ID plate” F2-3. locks on your vehicle. If the engine fails to start, pull out the key “ . Ignition switch once before trying again. Refer to Ignition switch” F3-3. . Driver’s door . Glove box This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of The valet key fits only the ignition switch Industry Canada. Operation is subject and driver’s door lock. You can keep the to the following two conditions: (1) This Keys and doors 2-3 device may not cause harmful inter- . Do not get the key wet. If the key & Security indicator light ference, and (2) this device must gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth accept any interference received, in- immediately. cluding interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not ex- & Security ID plate pressly approved by the party respon- sible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. NOTE To protect your vehicle from theft, please pay close attention to the following security precautions: . Never leave your vehicle unattended with its keys inside. The security indicator light deters potential . Before leaving your vehicle, close all thieves by indicating that the vehicle is windows and lock the doors and rear equipped with an immobilizer system. It begins flashing (approximately once every gate. 1) Key number plate . Do not leave spare keys or any 2) Security ID plate 3 seconds) approximately 60 seconds record of your key number in the after the ignition switch is turned from the vehicle. The security ID is stamped on the security “ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK” ID plate attached to the key set. Write position or immediately after the key is down the security ID and keep it in CAUTION pulled out. another safe place, not in the vehicle. If the security indicator light does not flash, . Do not place the key under direct This number is needed to make a replace- the immobilizer system may be faulty. If sunlight or anywhere it may ment key if you lose your key or lock it this occurs, contact your SUBARU dealer become hot. inside the vehicle. as soon as possible. This number is also needed for replacement or repair of the engine control unit, In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g. integrated unit, and combination meter. an imitation key), the security indicator light illuminates. – CONTINUED – 2-4 Keys and doors

NOTE NOTE Door locks Even if the security indicator light A vehicle that is equipped with the flashes irregularly or its fuse blows remote engine start system as a dealer & Locking and unlocking from (the light does not flash if its fuse is option can register up to three keys for the outside blown), the immobilizer system will use with one vehicle. function normally.

& Key replacement Your key number plate and security ID plate will be required if you ever need a replacement key made. Any new key must be registered for use with your vehicle’s immobilizer system before it can be used. Up to four keys can be registered for use with one vehicle. For security, all the keys registered with your vehicle’s immobilizer system will have their ID codes erased and re- To lock the driver’s door from the outside registered when a new key is made. with the key, turn the key toward the rear. Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must To unlock the door, turn the key toward the be presented when a new key is regis- front. tered. Any key that is not re-registered Pull the outside door handle to open an when a new key is made cannot be used unlocked door. after the other keys are re-registered. For information on replacement keys and on the registration of keys with your immobilizer system, contact your SUBARU dealer. Keys and doors 2-5

doors from the outside without the key. WARNING & Locking and unlocking from Keep all doors locked when you the inside drive, especially when small children are in your vehicle. Along with the proper use of seatbelts and child restraints, locking the doors reduces the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is acciden- 1) Rotate the lock lever rearward. tally opened, and intruders from 2) Close the door. unexpectedly opening doors and entering your vehicle. To lock the door from the outside without the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and then close the door. 1) Lock & Battery drainage prevention 2) Unlock To lock the door from the outside using the function power door locking switch, push the front To lock the door from the inside, rotate the If a door or the rear gate is not completely side of the switch (“LOCK” side) and then lock lever rearward. To unlock the door closed, the interior lights will remain close the door. In this case, all closed from the inside, rotate the lock lever illuminated as a result. However, several doors and the rear gate are locked at the forward. lights are automatically turned off by the same time. The red mark on the lock lever appears battery drainage prevention function to Always make sure that all doors and the when the door is unlocked. prevent the battery from discharging. The rear gate are locked before leaving your following interior lights are affected by this Pull the inside door handle to open an function. vehicle. unlocked door. NOTE Always make sure that all doors and the Make sure that you do not leave the key rear gate are closed before starting to inside the vehicle when locking the drive.

– CONTINUED – 2-6 Keys and doors

NOTE Switch Automatically turning Power door locking switches Item position off . The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as “operational”. *1 Approximately 20 . Map lights OFF minutes later When leaving the vehicle, please make sure that all doors and the rear Approximately 20 Dome light DOOR minutes later gate are completely closed. . The battery drainage prevention Ignition — Approximately 20 function does not operate while the switch light minutes later key is in the ignition switch. Door step — *2 lights None

Cargo area None*2 light DOOR

*1: The map lights can be controlled by the battery drainage prevention function only when 1) Lock the map light switches are in the OFF position 2) Unlock and the door interlock switch is in the DOOR position. For the switch positions, refer to “Map All doors and the rear gate can be locked light” F6-3. and unlocked by the power door locking switches located at the driver’s side and *2: The door step lights and the cargo area light the front passenger’s side doors. are not affected by the battery drainage prevention function, so the lights do not turn To lock the doors, push the front side of off automatically. To turn off the lights, it is the switch. necessary that each door and the rear gate are To unlock the doors, push the rear side of completely closed. the switch. The operational/non-operational setting of When you close the doors after you set this function can be changed by a the door locks, the doors remain locked. SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer to change the setting. NOTE Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before locking the Keys and doors 2-7 doors from the outside using the power NOTE Remote keyless entry system door locking switches. When leaving the vehicle, make sure you are holding the key before locking & Key lock-in prevention func- the doors. CAUTION tion . Do not expose the remote trans- This function prevents the doors from mitter to severe shocks, such as being locked with the key still in the those experienced as a result of ignition switch. dropping or throwing. ! Behavior with key lock-in preven- . Do not take the remote transmit- tion function operational ter apart except when replacing With the driver’s door open, the doors are the battery. automatically kept unlocked even if the . Do not get the remote transmitter door locking switch is pushed to the front wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with (“LOCK”) position. a cloth immediately. ! Behavior with key lock-in preven- . When you carry the remote trans- tion function non-operational mitteronanairplane,donot . If the lock lever is turned to the rear press the button of the remote (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door transmitter while in the airplane. open and the driver’s door is then closed When any button of the remote with the lock lever in that position, the transmitter is pressed, radio driver’s door is locked. waves are sent and may affect the operation of the airplane. . If the spare key is used to lock the ’ When you carry the remote trans- driver s door from the outside of the mitter in a bag on an airplane, vehicle, the door is locked. take measures to prevent the The setting of this function to operational/ buttons of the remote transmitter non-operational status can be changed by from being pressed. a SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU dealer for details. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject – CONTINUED – 2-8 Keys and doors to the following two conditions: (1) This TV tower, or remote controller of home & Locking the doors device may not cause harmful inter- electronic appliances. ference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- The keyless entry system does not oper- cluding interference that may cause ate when the key is inserted in the ignition undesired operation. switch. Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party respon- sible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Two transmitters are provided for your vehicle.

The keyless entry system has the follow- Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and ing functions. the rear gate. An electronic chirp will . Locking and unlocking the doors and sound once and the turn signal lights will rear gate without a key flash once. . Unlocking the rear gate without a key : Rear gate unlock button If any of the doors or the rear gate is not . Sounding a panic alarm : Unlock/disarm button fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound . Arming and disarming the alarm sys- : Lock/arm button five times and the turn signal lights will tem. For detailed information, refer to A: Panic button flash five times to alert you that the doors “Alarm system” F2-14. 1) Front or the rear gate are not properly closed. 2) Back When you close the door, it will automa- The operable distance of the keyless entry tically lock and then an electronic chirp will system is approximately 30 feet (10 sound once and the turn signal lights will meters). However, this distance will vary flash once. depending on environmental conditions. The system’s operable distance will be shorter in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast station, Keys and doors 2-9

& Unlocking the doors & Unlocking the rear gate nation period setting of the interior light in accordance with your preference. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. & Vehicle finder function Use this function to find your vehicle parked among many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “ ” button three times in a 5-second period will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound once and its turn signal lights to flash three times. NOTE Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s Pressing the “ ” button opens the rear door. An electronic chirp will sound twice gate. If the interval between presses is too short when you press the “ ” button and the turn signal lights will flash twice. An electronic chirp will sound twice and three times, the system may not re- To unlock all doors and the rear gate, the turn signal lights will flash twice. briefly press the “ ” button a second time spond to the signals from the remote within 5 seconds. & Illuminated entry transmitter. NOTE The interior (dome) light and the map light If the interval between the first and will illuminate when the “ ” button is second presses of the “ ” button (for pressed. These lights stay illuminated for unlocking of all of the doors and the approximately 30 seconds if any of the rear gate) is extremely short, the sys- doors or the rear gate is not opened. tem may not respond. If the “ ” button is pressed before 30 seconds have elapsed, these lights will turn off. The dome light must be set to the DOOR position in order for this function to operate. A SUBARU dealer can change the illumi-

– CONTINUED – 2-10 Keys and doors

& Sounding a panic alarm the audible signal off. touch the battery and any re- Do the following to deactivate the audible moved parts; children could signal. You can also use the same steps swallow them. to restore the function. . There is a danger of explosion if 1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all an incorrect replacement battery doors and the rear gate. is used. Replace only with the 2. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the same or equivalent type of bat- power door locking switch. tery. 3. While holding down the “UNLOCK” . Batteries should not be exposed side of the power door locking switch, pull to excessive heat such as sun- the key out and re-insert it into the ignition shine, fire or the like. switch at least 6 times within 10 seconds after Step 2. When the transmitter battery begins to get 4. Open and close the driver’s door once weak, transmitter range will begin to A “PANIC” button is located on the back of within 10 seconds after Step 3. decrease. Replace the battery as soon the transmitter. 5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to as possible. To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC” indicate completion of the setting. To replace the battery: button once. The horn will sound and the turn signal You may have the above settings done by lights will flash. your SUBARU dealer. To deactivate the panic alarm, press any & Replacing the battery button on the remote transmitter. Unless a button on the remote is pressed, the alarm CAUTION will be deactivated after approximately 30 seconds. . Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the transmitter when repla- & Selecting audible signal op- cing the battery. eration . Be careful not to damage the Using an electronic chirp, the system will printed circuit board in the trans- give you an audible signal when the doors mitter when replacing the battery. 1. Open the transmitter case using a flat- lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn . Be careful not to allow children to Keys and doors 2-11 head screwdriver. CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to Programming transmitter codes into install the new battery with the negative system: (−) side facing up. 4. Refit the removed half of the transmitter case. After the battery is replaced, the transmitter must be synchronized with the keyless entry system’s control unit. Press either the “ ” or “ ” button six times to synchronize the unit. & Replacing lost transmitters If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional transmitters (up to 2. Remove the old battery from the four can be programmed), you should re- Bag containing transmitter holder. program all of your transmitters for security reasons. It is recommended that you have your dealer program all of your transmitters into your system. ! Programming the transmitters The keyless entry system is equipped with a special code learning feature that allows you to program new transmitter codes into the system or to delete old ones. The systemcanlearnuptofourunique transmitter codes. The four transmitter codes may be the same or different.

1) Negative (−) side facing up Transmitter circuit board To register a new transmitter with the 3. Replace with a new battery (type keyless entry system, it is necessary to – CONTINUED – 2-12 Keys and doors program the transmitter’s code (identifica- NOTE tion number) into the system. A label . When part 4 of the procedure is showing the code is affixed to the bag completed, an electronic tone will containing the transmitter, and another is sound for 30 seconds. affixed to the circuit board inside the . If you do not perform the operations transmitter. If there is no bag, open the in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error transmitter case and make a note of the will occur and the electronic tone will eight-digit number. Program the number not sound. In this event, perform the into the system in accordance with the registration steps again beginning with following procedure: part 3 of the procedure. 1. Firmly close the doors and the rear gate. 2. Open the driver’s door, sit on the driver’s seat, and close the door. 1) ON 3. Perform the following steps within 45 2) LOCK seconds. (2) Insert the key into the ignition switch, then turn it from the “LOCK” position to the “ON” position 10 times within 15 seconds. NOTE . When you complete step (2), an electronic tone will sound once. . If you do not perform steps (1) and 5. Before the electronic tone stops (2) within 45 seconds, an error will sounding, push the lock side of the power occur. Neither an electronic tone nor door lock switch the same number of the buzzer will sound, and the interior times as the leftmost digit of the transmit- lamp will not flash. In this event, per- ter code. For example, push the lock form the whole procedure again begin- switch eight times if the leftmost digit of (1) Open and close the driver’s door ning with part 1. the code is 8. once. 4. Open and close the door once within 15 seconds. Keys and doors 2-13

NOTE switch within 5 seconds. NOTE . The electronic tone will stop sound- If you do not start entering the number ing when you start entering the num- NOTE using the lock switch before the elec- ber. . An electronic tone will sound. tronic tone stops sounding, an error . If you do not start entering the . If you push the unlock side of the will occur. In this event, perform the number using the lock switch before lock switch when more than 5 seconds procedure again beginning with part 3. the electronic tone stops sounding, an have passed, an error will occur. In this 9. When you have finished entering the error will occur. In this event, perform event, perform the procedure again code a second time, an electronic tone will the registration steps again beginning beginning with part 4. If an error occurs sound for 1 second and automatic door with part 3 of the procedure. six times, perform the procedure again locking and unlocking operation will take . If the interval between one push of starting with part 3. place once to indicate completion of the switch and the next exceeds 5 7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure registration, provided the code entered seconds, an error will occur. In this for each of the remaining digits of the the second time is identical to that entered event, perform the procedure again transmitter code beginning with the sec- the first time. beginning with part 4. If an error occurs ond digit (counting from the left) and six times, perform the procedure again finishing with the eighth digit. NOTE starting with part 3. If the code entered the second time is NOTE not identical to the code entered the . When you finish entering the eighth first time, an error will occur. In this digit, an electronic tone will sound for event, perform the procedure again 30 seconds. beginning with part 5. If an error occurs . If the interval between one push of five times, perform the procedure again the switch and the next exceeds 5 starting with part 3. seconds, an error will occur. In this event, perform the procedure again 10. If you wish to program another trans- beginning with part 4. If an error occurs mitter code into the system (up to four six times, perform the procedure again transmitter codes can be programmed into starting with part 3. the system), perform the procedure beginning with part 4. When you have finished 8. Before the electronic tone stops programming all of the necessary trans- sounding, use the power door lock switch mitter codes into the system, remove the 6. When you have finished entering the to reenter the transmitter code beginning key from the ignition switch. number, push the unlock side of the lock with the leftmost digit. – CONTINUED – 2-14 Keys and doors

11. Test every registered transmitter to system, allowing them unauthorized Alarm system confirm correct operation. access to your vehicle. The alarm system helps to protect your ! Deleting old transmitter codes vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn The control unit of the keyless entry sounds and the turn signal lights flash if system has four memory locations to store someone attempts to break into your transmitter codes, giving it the ability to vehicle. The starter motor is also inter- operate with up to four transmitters. When rupted to prevent starting the vehicle you lose a transmitter, the lost transmit- without a key. ter’s code remains in the memory. For The system can be armed and disarmed security reasons, lost transmitter codes with the remote transmitter. should be deleted from the memory. The system does not operate when the To delete old transmitter codes, program key is inserted into the ignition switch. four transmitter codes into the system. If you have only one current transmitter, Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set program it four times. If you have two for activation at the time of shipment from current transmitters, program each one the factory. You can set the system for twice. If you have three current transmit- deactivation yourself or have it done by ters, program two of them once and the your SUBARU dealer. third one twice. This process will leave only current transmitter codes in the & System operation system’s memory. The alarm system will give the following NOTE alarms when triggered. . ’ Make sure no one else is operating The vehicle s horn will sound for 30 their keyless entry system within range seconds. of your vehicle when programming . The turn signal lights will flash for 30 transmitters. If someone else were to seconds. operate their remote transmitter while If any of the doors or the rear gate remains you are programming your transmit- open after the 30-second period, the horn ters, it is possible that their transmitter will continue to sound for a maximum of 3 code will be programmed into your minutes. If the door or the rear gate is Keys and doors 2-15 closed while the horn is sounding, the & Activating and deactivating NOTE horn will stop sounding with a delay of up the alarm system You may have the above setting to 30 seconds. To change the setting of your vehicle’s change done by your SUBARU dealer. The alarm is triggered by: alarm system for activation or deactiva- & If you have accidentally trig- . Opening any of the doors or the rear tion, do the following. gered the alarm system gate 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to . Physical impact to the vehicle, such as “Disarming the system” F2-17. ! To stop the alarm forced entry (only vehicles with shock 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all Do any of the following operations: sensors (dealer option)) doors and the rear gate. . Press any button on the remote trans- 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” NOTE mitter. position. . Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” The alarm system can be set to trigger 4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the position. the illumination of the following interior driver’s power door locking switch, open lights. the driver’s door within the following 1 & Arming the system . Dome light (illuminates only when second, and wait 10 seconds without the dome light switch is in the “DOOR” releasing the switch. The setting will then ! To arm the system using remote position) be changed as follows. transmitter . Map lights (illuminate only when the door interlock switch is in the “DOOR” If the system was previously activated: 1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if position) The odometer/trip meter screen displays equipped). “AL oF” and the horn sounds twice, 2. Remove the key from the ignition The notifications regarding the dome indicating that the system is now deacti- switch. light and the map lights are deactivated vated. 3. Open the doors and get out of the as the factory setting. A SUBARU vehicle. If the system was previously deacti- dealer can activate the system. Contact 4. Make sure that the engine hood is vated: your SUBARU dealer for details. locked. The odometer/trip meter screen displays 5. Close all doors and the rear gate. “AL on” and the horn sounds once, indicating that the system is now activated.

– CONTINUED – 2-16 Keys and doors

once, and the indicator lights will start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the indicator lights will then flash slowly (twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the system has been armed for surveil- lance. If any of the doors or the rear gate is not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times, the turn signal lights flash five times to alert you that the doors or the rear gate are not properly closed. When you close the door, the system will automati- : Press to Arm the system. “ ” cally arm and doors will automatically lock. 6. Push the front side ( LOCK side) of : Press to Disarm the system. the power door locking switch to set the ! To arm the system using power door locks. door locking switches 7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will 1. Close all windows. sound once, the turn signal lights will flash 2. Remove the key from the ignition once and the indicator lights will start switch. flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 3. Open the doors and get out of the seconds (standby time), the indicator vehicle. lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi- 4. Make sure that the engine hood is mately every 2 seconds), indicating that locked. the system has been armed for surveil- lance. 5. Close the doors and the rear gate but leave only the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door open. NOTE . The system can be armed even if the “ ” 6. Briefly press the button (for less engine hood, the windows and/or than 2 seconds). All doors and the rear moonroof (if equipped) are open. Al- gate will lock, an electronic chirp will ways make sure that they are fully sound once, the turn signal lights will flash closed before arming the system. Keys and doors 2-17

. The 30-second standby time can be NOTE your vehicle’s alarm system for activation eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- After disarming the alarm system, mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat- formed by your SUBARU dealer. briefly press the “ ” button a second ing the alarm system” F2-15. . The system is in the standby mode time within 5 seconds to unlock all for a 30-second period after locking the other doors and the rear gate. & Passive arming doors with the remote transmitter. The ! Emergency disarming When passive arming mode has been security indicator light will flash at programmed by the dealer, arming of the short intervals during this period. If you cannot disarm the system using the . system is automatically accomplished If any of the following actions are transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, without using the remote transmitter. Note done during the standby period, the broken or the transmitter battery is too that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE system will not switch to the surveil- weak), you can disarm the system without MANUALLY LOCKED. lance state. using the transmitter as follows. ! – Doors are unlocked using the . Turn the ignition switch from the To enter the passive mode remote transmitter. “LOCK” to the “ON” position with a If you wish to program the passive arming – Any door (including the rear registered key. mode, have it done by your SUBARU gate) is opened. dealer. – Ignition switch is turned to the & Valet mode ! Arming the system “ ” ON position. When you choose the valet mode, the & Disarming the system alarm system does not operate. In valet CAUTION mode, the remote transmitter is used only Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than for locking and unlocking the doors and In passive mode, the system will 2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The rear gate and panic activation. automatically activate the alarm but driver’s door will unlock, an electronic WILL NOT automatically lock the chirp will sound twice, the turn signal To enter the valet mode, change the doors. In order to lock the doors lights will flash twice. The flashing of the setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for you must either lock them as in- security indicator light will then change deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating dicated in step 4 below or with the slowly (once approximately every 3 sec- and deactivating the alarm system” F2- key once they have been closed. onds from twice approximately every 2 15. The security indicator light will con- Failure to lock the doors manually seconds), indicating that the alarm system tinue to flash once every 3 seconds will result in a higher security risk. has been disarmed. indicating that the system is in the valet mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” To exit valet mode, change the setting of position. – CONTINUED – 2-18 Keys and doors

& Tripped sensor identification The security indicator light flashes when the alarm system has been triggered. Also, the number of flashes indicates the location of unauthorized intrusion or the severity of impact on the vehicle. When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the indicator light will light for 1 second and then flash as follows. . When a door or rear gate was opened: 5 times . When the ignition switch was turned to 1) ON 4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors the “ON” position: 3 times 2) LOCK with the inside door lock levers. . When a strong impact or multiple 2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to 5. Close the doors. The system will impacts were sensed: twice (only vehicles “LOCK” position and remove the key from automatically arm after 1 minute. with shock sensors (dealer option)) the ignition switch. . When a light impact was sensed: once In the passive mode, the system can also (only vehicles with shock sensors (dealer 3. Open the doors and get out of the be armed with the remote transmitter or option)) vehicle. with the power door locking switches. If the remote transmitter or power door NOTE locking switch is used to lock the vehicle, Any of the above indicator light flash- arming will take place immediately regard- ings will recur each time the ignition less of whether or not the passive mode switch is turned to the “ON” position. has been selected. Rearming the alarm system cancels the ! Disarming the system flashing. To disarm the system, briefly press the “ ” button on the transmitter. Keys and doors 2-19

& Shock sensors (dealer op- Examples: Child safety locks tion) Vibration from a construction site The shock sensors trigger the alarm Vibration in a multistory car park system when they sense impacts applied Vibration from trains to the vehicle and when any of their . You can have the sensitivity of the electric wires are cut. The alarm system shock sensors adjusted to your pre- causes the horn to sound and the turn ference by your SUBARU dealer. signal lights to flash for a short time when the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of a strong impact or multiple impacts by sounding the horn and flashing the turn signal lights, both lasting approximately 30 seconds. If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can connect them and set them for activation or deactivation. Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents the doors from being opened NOTE even if the inside door handle is pulled. . The shock sensors are not always When the child safety lock lever is in the able to sense impacts caused by break- lock position, the door cannot be opened ing in, and cannot sense an impact that from inside regardless of the position of does not cause vibration (such as the inner door handle lock lever. The door breaking the glass using a rescue can only be opened from the outside. hammer). . The shock sensors may sense vi- WARNING bration as indicated in the following Always turn the child safety locks to examples and trigger the alarm system. “ ” Select the settings of the alarm system the LOCK position when children and shock sensors appropriately de- sit on the rear seat. Serious injury pending on where you usually park could result if a child accidentally your vehicle. opens the door and falls out. 2-20 Keys and doors

Windows ! Driver’s side switches ! Operating the driver’s window & Power windows

WARNING To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, always conform to the following instructions without exception. . When operating the power windows, be extremely careful to prevent anyone’s fingers, arms, neck or head from being caught in the window. 1) Lock switch 1) Open . Always lock the passengers’ win- 2) For driver’s window (with one-touch auto 2) Automatically open dows using the lock switch when down feature) 3) Close 3) For front passenger’s window children are riding in the vehicle. 4) For rear left window To open: . Before leaving the vehicle, al- 5) For rear right window Push the switch down lightly and hold it. ways remove the key from the The window will open as long as the ignition switch for safety and All door windows can be controlled by the switch is held. power window switch cluster at the driver never allow an unattended child This switch also has a one-touch auto side door. to remain in the vehicle. Failure down feature that allows the window to be to follow this procedure could opened fully without holding the switch. result in injury to a child operat- Push the switch down until it clicks and ing the power window. release it, and the window will fully open. To stop the window halfway, pull the The power windows operate only when switch up lightly. the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. To close: Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will close as long as the switch is Keys and doors 2-21 held. ! Locking the passengers’ windows ! Passengers’ side switches ! Operating the passengers’ windows To open: Push the switch down and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close: Pull the switch up and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. When the lock switch on the power window switch cluster, located on the driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK” position, the passengers’ windows cannot be operated with the passengers’ switches. 1) Lock To open: 2) Unlock Push the appropriate switch down and Push the lock switch. When the lock hold it until the window reaches the switch is in the “LOCK” position, the desired position. passengers’ windows cannot be opened To close: or closed. Pull the switch up and hold it until the Push the switch again to cancel the window reaches the desired position. passengers’ window locking. 2-22 Keys and doors

Rear gate . Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while holding the recessed grip. Also avoid closing the rear gate by pulling on the recessed grip from inside the cargo space. There is a danger of your hand being caught and injured.

CAUTION . Do not jam a plastic bag in or place cellophane tape on the rear To close: gate stays or scratch the stays Lower the rear gate slowly and push down while loading or unloading cargo. That could cause leakage of gas The rear gate can be locked and unlocked firmly until the latch engages. from the stays, which may result using any of the following systems. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you in their inability to hold the rear . pull it down holding the recessed grip. Power door locking switch: Refer to gate open. “Power door locking switches” F2-6. . Be careful not to hit your head or . Remote keyless entry system: Refer to WARNING face on the rear gate when open- “Remote keyless entry system” F2-7. . To prevent dangerous exhaust ing or closing the rear gate and To open: gas from entering the vehicle, when loading or unloading car- Unlock the rear gate and push the rear always keep the rear gate closed go. gate opener button to open the rear gate. while driving. NOTE If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due to a discharged vehicle battery, a malfunction in the door locking/unlocking system or other causes, you can unlock it by manually operating the rear gate lock release lever. For the Keys and doors 2-23 procedure, refer to “Rear gate – if the Moonroof (if equipped) . Never try to check the anti-en- rear gate cannot be opened” F9-17. trapment function by deliberately placing part of your body in the WARNING moonroof. Never let anyone’s hands, arms, head or any objects protrude from CAUTION the moonroof. A person could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops . Do not sit on the edge of the open suddenly or turns sharply or if the moonroof. vehicle is involved in an accident. . Do not operate the moonroof if To avoid serious personal injury falling snow or extremely cold caused by entrapment, always con- conditions have caused it to form to the following instructions freeze shut. without exception. . Before closing the moonroof, make sure that no one’s hands, arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the moonroof. . Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the moonroof. 1) Open/close switch 2) Open 3) Close

– CONTINUED – 2-24 Keys and doors

The moonroof operates only when the “CLOSE” or “OPEN” side. . If the moonroof cannot be closed ignition switch is in the “ON” position. through switch operation because of & Anti-entrapment function system failure, it can be closed manu- & To open the moonroof When the moonroof senses a substantial ally using a hex-head wrench. For the “ ” procedure, refer to “Moonroof – if the Pull the switch to the OPEN side and enough object trapped between its glass ” F quickly release it to open the moonroof. and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it moonroof cannot be closed 9-17. The sun shade will also be opened automatically moves back by 6 in (15 cm) together with the moonroof. The moonroof from that point and then stops. The anti- will stop at a position 20 in (50 cm) away entrapment function may also be activated from the fully closed position. Pull the by a strong shock on the moonroof even switch again to open the moonroof com- when there is nothing trapped. pletely. CAUTION To stop the moonroof at a desired position, momentarily push the switch to the Never attempt to test this function “CLOSE” or “OPEN” side. using fingers, hands or other parts of your body. After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away water on the roof prior to opening the moonroof to prevent drops NOTE of water from falling into the passenger . For the sake of safety, it is recom- compartment. mended that you avoid driving with the & moonroof fully opened. To close the moonroof . Driving with the moonroof fully open Push the switch to the “CLOSE” side then can cause an annoying sound to gen- quickly release it to close the moonroof. erate at high speeds. If such a condi- The moonroof will stop at a position 8 in tion has been encountered, use the (20 cm) away from the fully closed moonroof at the initial stop position of position. Push the switch again to close 20 in (50 cm) away from the fully closed the moonroof completely. position. To stop the moonroof at a desired position, momentarily push the switch to the Keys and doors 2-25

& Sun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward or backward by hand while the moonroof is closed. If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade also moves back. ————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————

———————————————————————————————————————— Instruments and controls

Ignition switch ...... 3-3 ABS warning light...... 3-16 LOCK...... 3-3 Brake system warning light...... 3-17 Acc...... 3-4 Low fuel warning light ...... 3-18 ON...... 3-4 Hill start assist warning light (MT models) ...... 3-18 START ...... 3-4 Door open warning light ...... 3-18 3 Key reminder chime ...... 3-5 All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT models) ...... 3-18 Ignition switch light...... 3-5 Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light Hazard warning flasher...... 3-5 (models with HID headlights)...... 3-18 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator Meters and gauges...... 3-5 light ...... 3-19 Combination meter illumination ...... 3-5 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light...... 3-19 movement upon turning on the ignition Security indicator light...... 3-20 switch...... 3-6 SPORT mode indicator light (AT models)...... 3-20 Speedometer...... 3-6 Selector lever and gear position indicator (AT Odometer/Trip meter...... 3-6 models) ...... 3-21 Tachometer ...... 3-8 Turn signal indicator lights...... 3-21 Fuel gauge...... 3-8 High beam indicator light ...... 3-21 Warning and indicator lights ...... 3-9 Cruise control indicator light...... 3-21 Seatbelt warning light and chime ...... 3-10 Cruise control set indicator light ...... 3-21 SRS airbag system warning light ...... 3-11 Front fog light indicator light (if equipped)...... 3-21 ’ Front passenger s frontal airbag ON and OFF Headlight indicator light ...... 3-21 indicators...... 3-12 Clock ...... 3-22 CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp ...... 3-12 Information display...... 3-22 Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant Outside temperature indicator ...... 3-23 temperature high warning light ...... 3-13 Current fuel consumption (if equipped) ...... 3-24 Charge warning light ...... 3-14 Average fuel consumption ...... 3-24 Oil pressure warning light ...... 3-14 To turn off fuel consumption indicator AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT models) ...... 3-14 display ...... 3-24 Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. Light control switch...... 3-25 models)...... 3-15 Headlights ...... 3-26 Instruments and controls

High/low beam change (dimmer)...... 3-26 Rear window wiper and washer switch ...... 3-32 Headlight flasher ...... 3-26 Mirrors ...... 3-32 Daytime running light system (if equipped) ...... 3-27 Inside mirror...... 3-32 Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with Outside mirrors ...... 3-34 HID headlights) ...... 3-27 Defogger and deicer...... 3-35 Turn signal lever ...... 3-27 Tilt steering wheel (if equipped) ...... 3-37 Illumination brightness control ...... 3-28 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel (if equipped) ..... 3-38 Front fog light switch (if equipped) ...... 3-28 Horn...... 3-38 Wiper and washer ...... 3-29 Windshield wiper and washer switches...... 3-30 Instruments and controls 3-3

Ignition switch tion to the “Acc” or “LOCK” posi- battery to go dead. tion, thereby stopping the engine. . If the ignition switch will not move Also, if the key is attached to a from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc” WARNING keyholder or to a large bunch of position, turn the steering wheel other keys, centrifugal force may act slightly to the left and right as you turn . Never turn the ignition switch to on it as the vehicle moves, resulting the ignition switch. “LOCK” while the vehicle is in unwanted turning of the ignition being driven or towed because switch. & LOCK that will lock the steering wheel, preventing steering control. And The key can only be inserted or removed when the engine is turned off, it in this position. The ignition switch will lock takes a much greater effort than the steering wheel when you remove the usual to steer. key. . Before leaving the vehicle, al- If turning the key is difficult, turn the ways remove the key from the steering wheel slightly to the right and left ignition switch for safety and as you turn the key. never allow an unattended child ! Automatic transmission models to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child or others. Children could operate the power windows, the moonroof or other controls or even The ignition switch has four positions: make the vehicle move. LOCK, Acc, ON and START. NOTE CAUTION . Keep the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position when the engine is Do not attach a large key holder or not running. key case to either key. If it banged . Using electrical accessories for a against your knees or hands while long time with the ignition switch in the you are driving, it could turn the “ON” or “Acc” position can cause the ignition switch from the “ON” posi- – CONTINUED – 3-4 Instruments and controls

while turning it. NOTE The engine may not start in the follow- & Acc ing cases: In this position the electrical accessories (radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can be used. & ON This is the normal operating position after the engine is started. & START The key can be turned from “Acc” to The engine is started in this position. The “LOCK” only when the selector lever is in starter cranks the engine to start it. When the “P” position. the key is released (after the engine has ! Manual transmission models started), the key automatically returns to . The key grip is touching another key the “ON” position. or a metallic key holder. CAUTION Do not turn the ignition switch to the “START” position while the engine is running.

If your registered key fails to start the engine, pull out the key once (the security indicator light will blink), and then insert the key in the ignition switch and turn it to the “START” position and again try to start the engine. The key can be turned from “Acc” to “LOCK” only when the key is pushed in . The key is near another key that Instruments and controls 3-5 contains an immobilizer transponder. Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges . The key is near or touching another transmitter. NOTE & Key reminder chime Liquid-crystal displays are used in some of the meters and gauges on The reminder chime sounds when the the combination meter. You will find driver’s door opens and the key is in the “ ” “ ” their indications hard to see if you wear LOCK or Acc position. The chime stops polarized glasses. when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the key is removed from & the ignition switch. Combination meter illumination & Ignition switch light When the ignition switch is turned to the “ ” For easy access to the ignition switch in ON position, the various parts of the the dark, the ignition switch light illumi- combination meter are illuminated in the The hazard warning flasher is used to following sequence: nates when the driver’s door is opened or warn other drivers when you have to park when the driver’s door is unlocked using your vehicle under emergency conditions. 1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter the remote keyless entry transmitter. The The hazard warning flasher works regard- needles, gauge needles, odometer and light remains on for several tens of less of the position of the ignition switch. trip meter back light illuminate. seconds and then gradually turns off after 2. Meter needles and gauge needles driver’s door is closed. Also, the light turns To turn on the hazard warning flasher, each show MAX position. off immediately if the key is turned to the push the hazard warning button on the 3. Meter needles and gauge needles “ON” position or if all doors and the rear instrument panel. To turn off the flasher, each show MIN position. gate are locked using the remote keyless push the button again. 4. Dials and indicators in meters and entry transmitter. NOTE gauges light up. When the hazard warning flasher is on, 5. Regular illumination (for driving) be- the turn signals do not work. gins.

– CONTINUED – 3-6 Instruments and controls

& Canceling the function for & Speedometer meter/gauge needle move- The speedometer shows the vehicle ment upon turning on the speed. ignition switch & Odometer/Trip meter

*: “ ” or “ ” cannot be displayed when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. To change the current setting, press the trip knob for at least 2 seconds. : Activated : Deactivated It is possible to activate or deactivate the movement of the meter needles and NOTE 1) Trip knob gauge needles that takes place when the . Your vehicle’s initial movement ignition switch is turned to the “ON” setting of the meter/gauge needles This meter displays the odometer and two position. has been set for activation “ ” at the trip meters when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” or time of shipment from the factory. “Acc” position. . It is not possible to cancel the initial If you press the trip knob when the ignition Press the trip knob to show “ ” or “ ” movement setting of the meter/gauge switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position, on the odometer/trip meter display. needles when the ignition switch is in the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is “ ” The display can be switched as shown in the ON position. Cancel the setting possible to switch the indications while the whentheignitionswitchisinthe odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do not the following illustration by pressing the “ ” “ ” trip knob. LOCK or Acc position. press the trip knob within 10 seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn off. Instruments and controls 3-7

The display can be switched as shown ! Odometer vehicle has been driven since you last set below by pressing the trip knob. it to zero. To set the trip meter to zero, select the A trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 seconds. CAUTION To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could *: “ ” or “ ” cannot be displayed when result. the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. The odometer shows the total distance NOTE “ ” “ ” For the or indication, refer to that the vehicle has been driven. If the connection between the combina- “Canceling the function for meter/gauge ! tion meter and battery is broken for any needle movement upon turning on the Double trip meter ” F reason such as vehicle maintenance or ignition switch 3-6. fuse replacement, the data recorded on the trip meter will be lost.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

– CONTINUED – 3-8 Instruments and controls

& Tachometer & Fuel gauge seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s The tachometer shows the engine speed door, the fuel gauge indication will turn off. in thousands of revolutions per minute. NOTE CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone. This may cause severe damage to the engine.

NOTE (non-turbo models) To protect the engine while the selector lever is in the “P” or “N” position (for 1) Low fuel warning light AT models) or the shift lever is in the neutral position (for MT models), the The fuel gauge shows the approximate engine is controlled so that the engine amount of fuel remaining in the tank. speed may not become too high even if “ ” When the ignition switch is in the LOCK You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel the accelerator pedal is depressed “ ” “ ” or Acc position, the fuel gauge shows E gauge. hard. even if the fuel tank contains fuel. This indicates that the fuel filler door The gauge may move slightly during (lid) is located on the right side of the braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel vehicle. level movement in the tank. ! Low fuel warning light If you press the trip knob while the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position, The low fuel warning light illuminates the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the when the tank is nearly empty [approxi- amount of fuel remaining in the tank. mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp If, while the fuel gauge is indicating the gal)]. It only operates when the ignition “ ” amount of fuel remaining in the tank, you switch is in the ON position. When this (a) do not press the trip knob for 10 light illuminates, fill the fuel tank immediately. Instruments and controls 3-9

NOTE Warning and indicator lights : Oil pressure warning light This light does not turn off unless the : AT OIL TEMP warning light tank is replenished up to an internal Several of the warning and indicator lights (AT models) fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US illuminate momentarily and then turn off gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal). when the ignition switch is initially turned : Low tire pressure warning light to the “ON” position. This permits check- (U.S.- spec. models) ing the operation of the bulbs. CAUTION / : ABS warning light Apply the parking brake and turn the Promptly put fuel in the tank when- ignition switch to the “ON” position. The / : Brake system warning light ever the low fuel warning light following lights illuminate: illuminates. Engine misfires as a : Low fuel warning light : Seatbelt warning light result of an empty tank could cause : Hill start assist warning light damage to the engine. (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the driver fastens the (MT models) seatbelt.) : Door open warning light : Front passenger’s seatbelt warning : AWD warning light light (AT models) (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the front seat passenger : Vehicle Dynamics Control operation fastens the seatbelt.) indicator light : SRS airbag system warning light : Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag indicator light ON indicator light : SPORT mode indicator light / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag (AT models) OFF indicator light : Cruise control indicator light : CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- function indicator lamp : Cruise control set indicator light : Coolant temperature high warning light : Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light (models with HID head- : Charge warning light – CONTINUED – 3-10 Instruments and controls

lights) the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri- corresponding system. ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer also sound simultaneously. for repair. & NOTE Seatbelt warning light . ’ and chime If the driver s and/or front passenger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt 6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning warning device at the driver’s and front device operates as follows according passenger’s seat, as required by current to the vehicle speed. safety standards. Driver’s warning light – At speeds lower than approxi- With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” mately 9 mph (15 km/h) position, this device reminds the driver The warning light(s) for unfastened and front passenger to fasten their seat- seatbelt(s) will alternate between belts by illuminating the warning lights in steady illumination and flashing at the locations indicated in the following 15-second intervals. The chime will illustration and sounding a chime. not sound. – At speeds higher than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) The warning light(s) for unfastened seatbelt(s) will alternate between flashing and steady illumination at 15-second intervals and the chime will sound while the warning light(s) Front passenger’s warning light is/are flashing. . It is possible to cancel the warning ! Operation operation that follows the 6-second If the driver and/or front passenger have/ warning after turning ON the ignition has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when switch. When the ignition switch is Instruments and controls 3-11 turned ON next time, however, the passenger’s seat does not function cor- SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt preten- complete sequence of the warning rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the sioners are operating normally. operation resumes. For further details front passenger’s seat is empty or it is about canceling the warning operation, deactivated even when the front passen- WARNING please contact your SUBARU dealer. ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take the following actions. If the warning light exhibits any of If there is no passenger on the front the following conditions, there may ’ . Ensure that no article is placed on the passenger s seat, the seatbelt warning be a malfunction in the seatbelt ’ seat other than a child restraint system device for the front passenger s seat will pretensioners and/or SRS airbag ’ and its child occupant, although we be deactivated. The front passenger s system. Immediately take your vehi- occupant detection system monitors strongly recommend that all children sit in the rear seat properly restrained. cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer whether or not there is a passenger on to have the system checked. Unless ’ . the front passenger s seat. Observe the Ensure that there is no article left in the checked and properly repaired, the following precautions. Failure to do so seatback pocket. seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS may prevent the device from functioning . Ensure that the backward-forward po- airbag will not operate properly in correctly or cause the device to fail. sition and seatback of front passenger’s the event of a collision, which may . Do not install any accessory such as a seat are locked into place securely by increase the risk of injury. table or TV onto the seatback. moving the seat back and forth. . Flashing or flickering of the warn- . Do not store a heavy load in the If still the seatbelt warning device for front ing light seatback pocket. passenger’s seat does not function cor- . No illumination of the warning . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to rectly after taking relevant corrective ac- light when the ignition switch is place his/her hands or legs on the front tions described above, immediately con- first turned to the “ON” position passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- . Continuous illumination of the pull the seatback. tion. . Do not use front seats with their back- warning light ward-forward position and seatback not & SRS airbag system . Illumination of the warning light being locked into place securely. If any of warning light while driving them are not locked securely, adjust them again. For the adjustment procedure of When the ignition switch is turned to the the manual seats, refer to “Manual seat” “ON” position, the SRS airbag system F1-3. warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds and turn off. This shows If the seatbelt warning device for the front that the SRS airbag, SRS side airbag, – CONTINUED – 3-12 Instruments and controls

& Front passenger’s frontal indicators illuminates depending on the control system checked and re- airbag ON and OFF indica- status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal paired as necessary could cause tors airbag determined by the SUBARU ad- serious damage, which may not be vanced frontal airbag system monitoring. covered by your vehicle’s warranty. If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag If this light illuminates steadily or blinks ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF while the engine is running, it may indicate indicator will remain off. that there is a problem or potential If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag problem somewhere in the emission con- is deactivated, the passenger’sfrontal trol system. airbag ON indicator will remain off while ! If the light illuminates steadily the OFF indicator will illuminate. “ ” If the light illuminates steadily while driving With the ignition switch turned to the ON or does not turn off after the engine starts, position, if both the ON and OFF indica- an emission control system malfunction tors remain illuminated or off simulta- has been detected. neously even after the system check You should have your vehicle checked by ’ period, the system is faulty. Contact your ON / : Front passenger s frontal airbag ON an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- indicator SUBARU dealer immediately for an in- / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF spection. ately. indicator & NOTE The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON CHECK ENGINE warn- This light also illuminates when the fuel and OFF indicators show you the status of ing light/Malfunction in- filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. dicator lamp If you have recently refueled your vehicle, The indicators are located next to the CAUTION the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning clock in the center portion of the dash- light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on board. If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi- could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. When the ignition switch is turned to the Remove the cap and retighten it until it “ ” nates while you are driving, have ON position, both the ON and OFF your vehicle checked/repaired by clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during your SUBARU dealer as soon as with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the which time the system is checked. Follow- possible. Continued vehicle opera- cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE ing the system check, both indicators turn tion without having the emission warning light turn off immediately. It may off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the Instruments and controls 3-13 take several driving trips. If the light does & Coolant temperature After that, have the system not turn off, take your vehicle to your low indicator light/Cool- checked by your nearest authorized SUBARU dealer immediately. SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En- ant temperature high ” F ! If the light is blinking warning light gine overheating 9-12. If the light is blinking while driving, an – Blinking in RED and BLUE engine misfire condition has been de- CAUTION alternately: The electrical system may be tected which may damage the emission . control system. After turning the ignition switch malfunctioning. Contact your to the “ON” position, if this To prevent serious damage to the emis- SUBARU dealer for an inspec- indicator light/warning light be- sion control system, you should do the tion. haves under any of the following following. conditions, the electrical system . This coolant temperature low indicator Reduce vehicle speed. may be malfunctioning. Contact light/coolant temperature high warning . Avoid hard acceleration. your SUBARU dealer immedi- light has the following three functions. . Avoid steep uphill grades. ately for an inspection. . Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi- . Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi- – It remains blinking in RED. cient warming up of the engine ble. – It remains illuminated in RED . Blinking in RED indicates that the The CHECK ENGINE warning light may for more than 2 seconds. engine is close to overheating . stop blinking and illuminate steadily after – It remains blinking in RED and Illumination in RED indicates overheat- several driving trips. You should have your BLUE alternately. ing condition of the engine vehicle checked by an authorized . While driving, if this indicator For the system check, this indicator light/ SUBARU dealer immediately. light/warning light behaves under warning light illuminates in RED for any of the following conditions, approximately 2 seconds when the igni- take the specified appropriate tion switch is turned to the “ON” position. measure listed below. After that, this indicator light/warning light – Blinking or illuminated in changes to BLUE and maintains illumina- RED: tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light Safely stop the vehicle as turns off when the engine is warmed up soon as possible, and refer sufficiently. to the emergency steps for the If the engine coolant temperature in- case of engine overheating. – CONTINUED – 3-14 Instruments and controls creases over the appropriate range, the & Charge warning light CAUTION indicator light/warning light blinks in RED. At this time, the engine is close to over- If this light illuminates when the engine is Do not operate the engine with the heating. running, it may indicate that the charging oil pressure warning light on. This system is not working properly. If the engine coolant temperature in- may cause serious engine damage. creases further, the indicator light/warning If the light illuminates while driving or does light illuminates in RED continuously. At not turn off after the engine starts, stop the & this time, the engine may be overheating. engine at the first safe opportunity and AT OIL TEMP warning check the alternator belt. If the belt is light (AT models) When the indicator light/warning light loose, broken or if the belt is in good The AT oil temperature warning light “AT blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely condition but the light remains on, contact OIL TEMP” illuminates when the ignition stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and your nearest SUBARU dealer immedi- switch is turned to the “ON” position and refer to the emergency steps for the case ately. of engine overheating. Refer to “Engine turns off after the engine has started. overheating” F9-12. After that, have the & Oil pressure warning If this light illuminates when the engine is system checked by your nearest light running, it may indicate that the automatic SUBARU dealer. transmission fluid temperature is too hot. If this light illuminates when the engine is If the light illuminates while driving, im- Also, if the indicator light/warning light running, it may indicate that the engine oil mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place often blinks in RED, the electrical system pressure is low and the lubricating system and let the engine idle until the warning may be malfunctioning. Contact your is not working properly. light turns off. SUBARU dealer for an inspection. If the light illuminates while driving or does ! NOTE not turn off after the engine starts, stop the Automatic transmission control engine at the first safe opportunity and system warning If the engine is restarted after a certain check the engine oil level. If the oil level is driving condition, this indicator light/ If the light flashes after the engine starts, it low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is may indicate that the automatic transmis- warning light may illuminate in RED. at the proper level but the light remains on, However, this is not a malfunction if the sion control system is not working prop- contact your nearest SUBARU dealer erly. Contact your nearest SUBARU deal- indicator light/warning light turns off immediately. after a short time. er for service immediately. Instruments and controls 3-15

& Low tire pressure can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also vehicle to ensure that the replacement or warning light (U.S.-spec. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS ’ models) and may affect the vehicle s handling and to continue to function properly. stopping ability. Should the warning light illuminate stea- When the ignition switch is turned to the Please note that the TPMS is not a dily after blinking for approximately one “ON” position, the low tire pressure warn- substitute for proper tire maintenance, minute, have the system inspected by ing light will illuminate for approximately 2 and it is the driver’s responsibility to your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as seconds to check that the tire pressure maintain correct tire pressure, even if possible. monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning under-inflation has not reached the level properly. If there is no problem and all tires to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire WARNING are properly inflated, the light will turn off. pressure telltale. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), Your vehicle has also been equipped with If this light does not illuminate should be checked monthly when cold a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate briefly after the ignition switch is and inflated to the inflation pressure when the system is not operating properly. turned ON or the light illuminates recommended by the vehicle manufac- The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- steadily after blinking for approxi- turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation bined with the low tire pressure telltale. mately one minute, you should have pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of When the system detects a malfunction, your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- a different size than the size indicated on the telltale will flash for approximately one tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- minute and then remain continuously soon as possible. sure label, you should determine the illuminated. This sequence will continue If this light illuminates while driving, proper inflation pressure for those tires.) upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long never brake suddenly and keep as the malfunction exists. When the driving straight ahead while gradu- As an added safety feature, your vehicle ally reducing speed. Then slowly has been equipped with a tire pressure malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal pull off the road to a safe place. monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates Otherwise an accident involving a low tire pressure telltale when one or low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of serious vehicle damage and serious more of your tires is significantly under- personal injury could occur. inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire reasons, including the installation of re- pressure telltale illuminates, you should placement or alternate tires or wheels on If this light still illuminates while stop and check your tires as soon as the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from driving after adjusting the tire pres- possible, and inflate them to the proper functioning properly. Always check the sure, a tire may have significant pressure. Driving on a significantly under- TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing damage and a fast leak that causes inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and one or more tires or wheels on your the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have – CONTINUED – 3-16 Instruments and controls

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sures, increase the vehicle speed to . The warning light illuminates as soon as possible. at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the when the ignition switch is “ ” When a spare tire is mounted or a TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- turned to the ON position, but wheel rim is replaced without the tion pressures. If the tire pressures it does not turn off even when the original pressure sensor/transmitter are now above the severe low vehicle speed exceeds approxi- being transferred, the Low tire pres- pressure threshold, the low tire mately 8 mph (12 km/h). sure warning light will illuminate pressure warning light should turn . The warning light illuminates dur- steadily after blinking for approxi- off a few minutes later. Therefore, be ing driving. mately one minute. This indicates sure to install the specified size for the front and rear tires. If any of these conditions occur, the TPMS is unable to monitor all have the ABS system repaired at four road wheels. Contact your the first available opportunity by SUBARU dealer as soon as possible & your SUBARU dealer. for tire and sensor replacement and/ ABS warning light or system resetting. If the light The ABS warning light illuminates when With a vehicle equipped with an EBD illuminates steadily after blinking the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” system, the ABS warning light illuminates for approximately one minute, position and turns off after approximately 2 together with the brake system warning promptly contact a SUBARU dealer seconds. light if the EBD system becomes faulty. to have the system inspected. This is an indication that the ABS system For further details of the EBD system fault is working properly. warning, refer to “Brake system warning light” F3-17. CAUTION CAUTION NOTE The tire pressure monitoring system If the warning light behaves as If the warning light behavior is as is NOT a substitute for manually follows, the ABS system may not described in the following, the ABS checking tire pressure. The tire work properly. system may be considered normal. pressure should be checked peri- . odically (at least monthly) using a When the warning light is on, the The warning light illuminates right tire gauge. After any change to tire ABS function shuts down; however, after the engine is started but turns off pressure(s), the tire pressure mon- the conventional brake system con- immediately, remaining off. . itoring system will not re-check tire tinues to operate normally. The warning light remains on after inflation pressures until the vehicle . The warning light does not illu- the engine has been started, but it is first driven more than 20 mph (32 minate when the ignition switch turns off when the vehicle speed km/h). After adjusting the tire pres- is turned to the “ON” position. reaches approximately 8 mph (12 Instruments and controls 3-17 km/h). ! Parking brake warning the brake system warning light and ABS . The warning light illuminates during The light illuminates with the parking warning light illuminate simultaneously driving, but it turns off immediately and brake applied while the ignition switch is during driving. remains off. in the “ON” position. It turns off when the Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- When driving with an insufficient battery parking brake is fully released. tional braking system will still function. However, the rear wheels will be more voltage such as when the engine is jump ! Brake fluid level warning started, the ABS warning light may illumi- prone to locking when the brakes are nate. This is due to the low battery voltage This light illuminates when the brake fluid applied harder than usual and the vehi- “ ” and does not indicate a malfunction. level has dropped to near the MIN level cle’s motion may therefore become some- When the battery becomes fully charged, of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition what harder to control. “ ” the light will turn off. switch in the ON position and with the If the brake system warning light and ABS parking brake fully released. warning light illuminate simultaneously, & Brake system warning If the brake system warning light should take the following steps. light illuminate while driving (with the parking 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, brake fully released and with the ignition flat place. WARNING switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an 2. Shut down the engine, apply the indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn parking brake and then restart it. . Driving with the brake system brake pads. If this occurs, immediately 3. Release the parking brake. If both warning light on is dangerous. stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place warning lights turn off, the EBD system This indicates your brake system and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid may be faulty. Drive carefully to the may not be working properly. If level is below the “MIN” mark in the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the the light remains on, have the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have system inspected. brakes inspected by a SUBARU the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately. 4. If both warning lights illuminate again dealer for repair. and stay illuminated after the engine has . If at all in doubt about whether ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution been restarted, shut down the engine the brakes are operating prop- (EBD) system warning again, apply the parking brake, and check erly, do not drive the vehicle. the brake fluid level. Have your vehicle towed to the The brake system warning light also 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the nearest SUBARU dealer for re- illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be pair. EBD system. In that event, it illuminates together with the ABS warning light. faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system This light has the following three functions. The EBD system may be malfunctioning if inspected. – CONTINUED – 3-18 Instruments and controls

6. If the brake fluid level is below the & Hill start assist warning engine has started. “MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. light (MT models) This light illuminates when All-Wheel Instead, have the vehicle towed to the Drive is disengaged and the drive me- “ ” nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. When the ignition switch is in the ON chanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive position, the Hill start assist warning light for maintenance or similar purposes. illuminates and turns off after approxi- & Low fuel warning light It flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires mately 2 seconds. While the engine is of differing diameters fitted on the wheels The low fuel warning light illuminates rotating, if there are any malfunctions, the or with an excessively low air pressure in when the tank is nearly empty approxi- light will illuminate. mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp any of the tires. gal). It only operates when the ignition WARNING switch is in the “ON” position. When this CAUTION When the Hill start assist system light illuminates, fill the fuel tank immedi- Continuing to drive with the AWD light illuminates, have the vehicle ately. warning light flashing can damage inspected at an authorized SUBARU the powertrain. If the AWD warning NOTE dealer. light starts to flash, promptly park in This light does not turn off unless the a safe place and check whether the tank is replenished up to an internal & tires have differing diameters and fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US Door open warning whether any of the tires has an gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal). light excessively low inflation pressure. The door open warning light illuminates if CAUTION any door or the rear gate is not fully closed. & Automatic headlight Promptly put fuel in the tank when- beam leveler warning ever the low fuel warning light Always make sure this light is out before light (models with HID illuminates. Engine misfires as a you start to drive. result of an empty tank could cause headlights) damage to the engine. & All-Wheel Drive warn- The automatic headlight beam leveler ing light (AT models) warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and The All-Wheel Drive warning light illumi- turns off after approximately 3 seconds. nates when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and turns off after the This light illuminates when the automatic headlight beam leveler does not operate Instruments and controls 3-19 normally. & Vehicle Dynamics . If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle If this light illuminates while driving or does Control warning light/ Dynamics Control system itself becomes not turn off approximately 3 seconds after Vehicle Dynamics Con- faulty, the warning light only illuminates. At turning the ignition switch to the “ON” trol OFF indicator light this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- position, have your vehicle inspected at tem) remains fully operational. your SUBARU dealer. This warning light has both the function of . The warning light illuminates when the indicating malfunctions in the Vehicle electronic control system of the ABS/ & Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics Control system and the function Vehicle Dynamics Control system mal- Control operation indi- of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics functions. cator light Control system has been deactivated. It illuminates in the event of a malfunction The Vehicle Dynamics Control system This light illuminates when the ignition in the system and is on when the system provides its ABS control through the switch is ON and turns off approximately 2 is not operating. electrical circuit of the ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the seconds later. This warning light illuminates when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system be- It blinks when the skid suppression func- ignition switch is turned to the “ON” comes unable to provide ABS control. As tion is activated. It illuminates when only position and turns off several seconds a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control the traction control function is operating. after the engine has started. It indicates system also becomes inoperative, caus- The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system ing the warning light to illuminate. Though probably malfunctioning under any of the is in normal operation. both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and following conditions. Have your vehicle ! checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- Vehicle Dynamics Control warning ABS systems are inoperative in this case, ately. light the ordinary functions of the brake system are still available. You will be safe while . The light does not illuminate when the The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is driving with this condition, but have your ignition switch is turned to the “ON” probably inoperative under any of the vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as position. following conditions. Have your vehicle soon as possible. . The light does not turn off even after a checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- period of approximately 2 seconds after ately. NOTE . The warning light does not illuminate the ignition switch has been turned to the If the warning light behavior is as “ ” when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. described below, the Vehicle Dynamics “ON” position. . Control system may be considered The warning light illuminates while the normal. vehicle is running. . The warning light illuminates right – CONTINUED – 3-20 Instruments and controls after the engine is started but turns off the lapse of several minutes (the engine In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g., immediately, remaining off. has warmed up) after the engine has an imitation key), the security indicator . The warning light illuminates after started. light illuminates. engine startup and turns off while the vehicle is subsequently being driven. & Security indicator light NOTE . The warning light illuminates during Even if the security indicator light driving, but it turns off immediately and flashes irregularly or its fuse blows remains off. (the light does not flash if its fuse is blown), the immobilizer system will ! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in- function normally. dicator light . It illuminates when the Vehicle Dy- & SPORT mode indicator namics Control OFF switch is pressed. light (AT models) . It also illuminates when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is deactivated. This light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and NOTE turns off after the engine has started. . The light may remain on for a while When the selector lever is moved to the after the engine has been started, manual gate, the SPORT mode is se- especially in cold weather. This does lected and the indicator light illuminates. not indicate the existence of a problem. The security indicator light deters potential Refer to “SPORT mode” F7-21. The light should turn off as soon as the thieves by indicating that the vehicle is engine has warmed up. equipped with an immobilizer system. It . The indicator light illuminates when begins flashing (approximately once every the engine has developed a problem 3 seconds) approximately 60 seconds and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ after the ignition switch is turned from the “ ” “ ” “ ” malfunction indicator lamp is on. ON position to the Acc or LOCK position or immediately after the key is The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is pulled out. probably faulty under the following condi- If the security indicator light does not flash, tion. Have your vehicle checked at a the immobilizer system may not be func- SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . tioning properly. If this occurs, contact The light does not turn off even after your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Instruments and controls 3-21

& Selector lever and gear posi- & High beam indicator & Cruise control set in- tion indicator (AT models) light dicator light This light shows that the headlights are in The cruise control set indicator light the high beam mode. illuminates when the ignition switch is This indicator light also illuminates when turned to the “ON” position and turns off the headlight flasher is operated. after approximately 3 seconds. This light illuminates when vehicle speed & Cruise control indica- has been set. tor light & Front fog light indicator The cruise control indicator light illumi- light (if equipped) nates when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and turns off after This indicator light is on while the front fog approximately 3 seconds. lights are on. This light illuminates when the “CRUISE” This indicator shows the position of the main switch is pressed. & Headlight indicator selector lever. If you press the main switch button while light When the manual mode is selected, the “ ” turning the ignition switch ON , the cruise This indicator light illuminates when the gear position indicator (which shows the control function is deactivated and the headlight switch is placed in the “ ” or current gear selection) and the upshift/ “ ” CRUISE indicator light flashes. To re- “ ” position. downshift indicator light up. Refer to activate the cruise control function, turn “Automatic transmission” F7-16. the ignition switch back to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then turn it again to & Turn signal indicator the “ON” position. lights These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal. If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-47. 3-22 Instruments and controls

Clock CAUTION Information display To ensure safety, do not attempt to set the time while driving, as an accident from inadequate attention to the road could result.

NOTE If the battery is disconnected, the time will be erased. After reconnecting the battery, set the correct time.

The clock shows the time while the 1) Outside temperature indicator ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” 2) Fuel consumption indicator position. With the ignition switch in the “ON” position, the outside temperature and fuel The time changes by 1 minute each time consumption are indicated on the display. the “+” button or “−” button is pressed. Pressing the “+” button moves the displayed time forward, while pressing the “−” button moves the displayed time back. Pressing and holding either button changes the displayed time continuously. Instruments and controls 3-23

The fuel consumption display is linked & Outside temperature indica- ! Road surface freeze warning indi- with the odometer/trip meter display ac- tor cation cording to the following chart.

Odometer/Trip meter Fuel consumption indicator A trip meter Average fuel consumption corresponding to the A trip meter Average fuel consumption B trip meter corresponding to the B trip meter Odometer U.S-spec. models: Not indicated Other models: Current fuel consumption 1) U.S.-spec. models 1) U.S.-spec. models 2) Except U.S.-spec. models 2) Except U.S.-spec. models The outside temperature indicator shows When the outside temperature drops to the outside temperature in a range from 378F(38C) or lower, the temperature −22 to 1228F(−30 to 508C). indication flashes to show that the road surface may be frozen. The indicator can give a false reading If the outside temperature drops to 378F under any of the following conditions: (38C) or lower while the display is giving . When there is too much sun. an indication other than the outside . During idling; while running at low temperature, the display switches to the speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine outside temperature indication and flashes is restarted immediately following a shut- for 5 seconds before returning to its down. original indication. . When the actual outside temperature If the display is already indicating an falls outside the specified indicator range. outside temperature of 378F(38C) or lower when the ignition switch is turned to the

– CONTINUED – 3-24 Instruments and controls

“ON” position, the indication does not & Average fuel consumption reset, the average fuel consumption flash. corresponding to that trip meter indication is not shown until the vehicle has NOTE subsequently covered a distance of 1 The outside temperature indication mile (or 1 km). may differ from the actual outside temperature. The road surface freeze & To turn off fuel consumption warning indication should be treated only as a guide. Be sure to check the indicator display condition of the road surface before The fuel consumption indicator display driving. can be turned off. To turn off this display, turn the ignition & switch to the “LOCK” position and press Current fuel consumption (if the “+” button adjacent to the information equipped) display for approximately 5 seconds. 1) U.S.-spec. models Then, the information display and the 2) Except U.S.-spec. models clock display will blink for 3 seconds to This indication shows the average rate of notify you that the fuel consumption dis- fuel consumption since the trip meter was play has been turned off. last reset. To restore the indicator, once again press “ ” When either of the trip meter indications is the + button for approximately 5 sec- reset, the corresponding average fuel onds. consumption value is also reset. NOTE NOTE . The initial display setting of the fuel . The indicated values vary in accor- consumption indicator of your vehicle dance with changes in the vehicle’s has been set to operational at the time running conditions. Also, the indicated of shipment from the factory. . 1) U.S.-spec. models values may differ slightly from the The average fuel consumption is 2) Except U.S.-spec. models actual values and should thus be calculated even while the indicator is treated only as a guide. not displayed. This indication shows the rate of fuel . consumption at the present moment. . When either trip meter indication is Even if you turn off the fuel consumption indicator, the fuel consump- Instruments and controls 3-25 tion indicator will automatically turn on Light control switch a long time with the light control when the battery voltage is discon- switch set to a position other nected and then reconnected for bat- The light control switch only operates than “OFF”, the battery may be tery replacement or fuse replacement. when the ignition key is inserted into the discharged. ignition switch. Regardless of the position of the light control switch, the illuminated lights are turned off when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch. NOTE . Even if the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch, the lights can be illuminated by operating the light control switch position from “OFF” to “ ” and/or “ ”. . If the driver’s door is opened while the lights are illuminated and the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch, the chirp sound informs the driver that the lights are illuminated.

CAUTION . Use of any lights for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause the battery to discharge. . Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the light control switch is turned to the “OFF” position. If the vehicle is left unattended for

– CONTINUED – 3-26 Instruments and controls

& Headlights & High/low beam change (dim- & Headlight flasher mer)

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on To flash the headlights, pull the lever the end of the turn signal lever. To change from low beam to high beam, toward you and then release it. The high first position push the turn signal lever forward. When beam will remain on for as long as you the headlights are on high beam, the high hold the lever. The headlight flasher works Instrument panel illumination, tail lights, beam indicator light “ ” on the combina- even though the light switch is in the front side marker lights and license plate tion meter is also on. “OFF” position. lights are on. To switch back to low beam, pull the lever When the headlights are on high beam, second position back to the detent position. the high beam indicator light “ ” on the Headlights, instrument panel illumination, combination meter also illuminates. tail lights, front side marker lights, and license plate lights are on. CAUTION Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just a few seconds. Instruments and controls 3-27

& Daytime running light system & Automatic headlight beam Turn signal lever (if equipped) leveler (models with HID headlights) WARNING The HID headlights generate more light than conventional halogen headlights. The brightness of the illumination of the high beam headlights is reduced Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle by the daytime running light system. may experience too much glare when your The light switch must always be headlight beam height adjustment is high turned to the “ ” position when it due to the vehicle carrying heavy load. is dark outside. The automatic headlight beam leveler adjusts the headlight beam height auto- The high beam headlights will automati- matically and optimally according to the cally illuminate at reduced brightness load being carried by the vehicle. when the engine has started, under the following conditions: To activate the right turn signal, push the . The selector lever is in a position other turn signal lever up. To activate the left than the “P” position (AT models). turn signal, push the turn signal lever . The parking brake is fully released. down. When the turn is finished, the lever . The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ ” will return automatically. If the lever does position. not return after cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand. NOTE To signal a lane change, push the turn When the light switch is in the “ ” signal lever up or down slightly and hold it position, the front side marker lights, during the lane change. The turn signal tail lights and license plate lights are indicator lights will flash in the direction of also illuminated. the turn or lane change. The lever will return automatically to the neutral position when you release it. 3-28 Instruments and controls

Illumination brightness con- at all. Front fog light switch (if trol equipped)

The brightness of clock display, audio, air The front fog lights operate only when the conditioner, information display and instru- low beam headlights are illuminated. ment panel illumination dims when the However, the front fog lights turn off when “ ” “ ” light switch is in the or the headlights are switched to high beam. positions. You can adjust brightness of To turn on the front fog lights, turn the front the instrument panel illumination for better fog light switch on the turn signal lever visibility. upward to the “ ” position. To turn off the To brighten, turn the control dial upward. front fog lights, turn the switch back down “ ” To darken, turn the control dial downward. to the OFF position. NOTE When the control dial is turned fully upward, the illumination brightness becomes the maximum and the automatic dimming function does not work Instruments and controls 3-29

Wiper and washer . In freezing weather, be sure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield or rear window WARNING before switching on the wipers. Attempting to operate the wiper In freezing weather, do not use the with the blades frozen to the windshield washer until the wind- window glass could cause not shield is sufficiently warmed by the only the wiper blades to be defroster. damaged but also the wiper mo- Otherwise the washer fluid can tor to burn out. If the wiper freeze on the windshield, blocking blades are frozen to the window your view. glass, be sure to operate the defroster, windshield wiper dei- The indicator light located on the combi- cer (if equipped) or rear window nation meter will illuminate when the front CAUTION defogger before turning on the fog lights are on. wiper. . Do not operate the washer con- . tinuously for more than 10 sec- If the wipers stop during opera- onds, or when the washer fluid tion because of ice or some other tank is empty. This may cause obstruction on the window, the overheating of the washer motor. wiper motor could burn out even Check the washer fluid level if the wiper switch is turned off. If frequently, such as at fuel stops. this occurs, promptly stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the . Do not operate the wipers when ignition switch to the “LOCK” the windshield or rear window is position and clean the window dry. This may scratch the glass, glass to allow proper wiper op- damage the wiper blades and eration. cause the wiper motor to burn . out. Before operating the wiper Use clean water if windshield on a dry windshield or rear washer fluid is unavailable. In window, always use the wind- areas where water freezes in shield washer. winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid or the equivalent. – CONTINUED – 3-30 Instruments and controls

Refer to “Windshield washer road film. Keep the washer button & Windshield wiper and washer fluid” F11-39. depressed at least for 1 second so that switches Also, when driving the vehicle washer solution will be sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window. The wiper operates only when the ignition when there are freezing tempera- . switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” position. tures, use non-freezing type wi- Grease, wax, insects or other mate- ! per blades. rial on the windshield or the wiper Windshield wipers blade results in jerky wiper operation . Do not clean the wiper blades and streaking on the glass. If you with gasoline or a solvent, such cannot remove those streaks after as paint thinner or benzine. This operating the washer or if the wiper will cause deterioration of the operation is jerky, clean the outer sur- wiper blades. face of the windshield or rear window and the wiper blades using a sponge or NOTE soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, . The wiper operates only when the “ ” “ ” rinse the window glass and wiper ignition switch is in the ON or Acc blades with clean water. The glass is position. . clean if no beads form on the glass The front wiper motor is protected when you rinse with water. against overloads by a circuit breaker. . If you cannot eliminate the streaking If the motor operates continuously OFF: Off even after following this procedure, : Intermittent under an unusually heavy load, the replace the wiper blades with new circuit breaker may trip to stop the LO: Low speed ones. For replacement instructions, HI: High speed motor temporarily. If this happens, park refer to “Replacement of wiper blades” your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the F11-40. To turn the wipers on, push the wiper wiper switch, and wait for approxi- control lever down. mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker To turn the wipers off, return the lever to will reset itself, and the wipers will the “OFF” position. again operate normally. . Clean your wiper blades and window glass periodically with a washer solution to prevent streaking, and to remove accumulations of road salt or Instruments and controls 3-31

! Wiper intermittent time control ! Mist (for a single wipe) ! Washer

When the wiper switch is in the “ ” For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the To wash the windshield, push the washer position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- lever toward you. The wipers operate until button at the end of the wiper control lever. ing interval of the wiper. you release the lever. The washer fluid sprays until you release The operating interval can be adjusted the washer button. The wipers operate continuously from the shortest interval to while you push the button. the longest. The operating interval can be adjusted in nine steps.

– CONTINUED – 3-32 Instruments and controls

& Rear window wiper and speed is high). Mirrors washer switch When the transmission is shifted into reverse, the rear wiper will switch to Always check that the inside and outside continuous operation. When the transmis- mirrors are properly adjusted before you sion is shifted to a position other than start driving. reverse, the rear wiper will return to intermittent operation. & Inside mirror ! Washer To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is operating, turn the knob clockwise to the “ ” position. The washer fluid sprays until you release the knob. To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in use, turn the knob counterclockwise to the “ ” position. The washer : Washer (accompanied by wiper operation) fluid sprays, and 2 seconds later the rear ON: Continuous wiper operates. Releasing the knob stops INT: Intermittent the washer fluid spray, and 3 seconds OFF: Off : Washer later the rear wiper stops.

! Rear wiper The inside mirror has a day and night position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on mirror toward you for the night position. the end of the wiper control lever upward “ ” “ ” Push it away for the day position. The to the INT or ON position. night position reduces glare from head- To turn the wiper off, return the knob on lights. the end of the lever to the “OFF” position. With the switch turned to the “INT” position, the rear wiper will operate inter- mittently at intervals corresponding to the vehicle speed (longer when the vehicle speed is low; shorter when the vehicle Instruments and controls 3-33

! Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if illuminated compass reading will appear cotton cloth or an applicator. equipped) in the lower part of the mirror. ! Compass calibration Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, 1. For optimum calibration, switch off all the mirror surface turns bright if the nonessential electrical accessories (rear transmission is shifted into reverse. This window defogger, heater/air conditioning is to ensure good rearward visibility during system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all reversing. doors are shut. ! Photosensors 2. Drive to an open, level area away from large metallic objects or structures and make certain the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. 3. Press and hold the left button for 3 seconds then release, and the compass will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and 1) Left button direction will be displayed. 2) Auto dimming indicator 4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL” 3) Photosensor disappears from the display (approxi- 4) Right button mately two or three circles). The compass The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare is now calibrated. feature which automatically reduces glare 5. Further calibration may be necessary coming from headlights of vehicles behind should outside influences cause the mirror you. It also contains a built-in compass. The mirror has a photosensor attached on to read inaccurately. You will know that . By pressing and releasing the left both the front and back sides. If the glare this has occurred if your compass begins button, the automatic dimming function is from the headlights of vehicles behind you to read in only limited directions. Should toggled on or off. When the automatic strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it you encounter this situation, return to step dimming function is on, the auto dimming and make the reflection surface of the one of the above procedure and recali- indicator light (green) located to the right mirror dimmer to help prevent you from brate the mirror. of the button will illuminate. being blinded. For this reason, use care . By pressing and releasing the right not to cover the sensors with stickers, or button, the compass display is toggled on other similar items. Periodically wipe the or off. When the compass is on, an sensors clean using a piece of dry soft – CONTINUED – 3-34 Instruments and controls

! Compass zone adjustment 4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will ! Remote control mirror switch exit the zone setting mode. & Outside mirrors

Compass calibration zones 1) Selection switch 1. The zone setting is factory preset to 2) Direction control switch Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration The remote control mirrors operate only zone” map shown above or one attached when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or to the end of this manual to verify that the “Acc” position. compass zone setting is correct for your 1. Press either end of the selection geographical location. switch, “L” for the left, “R” for the right. 2. Press and hold the right button for 3 2. Move the direction control switch in the seconds then release, and the word direction you want to move the mirror. “ ” ZONE will briefly appear and then the 3. Return the selection switch to the zone number will be displayed. neutral position to prevent unintentional 3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly operation. to cycle the display through all possible zone settings. Stop cycling when the The mirrors can also be adjusted manu- correct zone setting for your location is ally. displayed. Instruments and controls 3-35

! Power folding mirror switch (if work. This is not a malfunction. Oper- Defogger and deicer equipped) ate after waiting for a short period of time. . When you unfold the outside mirrors manually, the mirrors may become wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors by switch operation. If the outside mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors again and then unfold them by switch operation.

The power folding mirror switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” position. To fold the outside mirrors, push the power folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors, push the switch again. NOTE . When the temperature is low, the outside mirrors may stop during operation. Push the switch again. When the outside mirrors do not work by switch operation, move them several times by 1) Rear window defogger manually. This makes it possible to 2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped) operate them by switch operation. 3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) . When you operate the power folding mirror switch continuously, it may not The vehicle is equipped with a rear

– CONTINUED – 3-36 Instruments and controls window defogger. For some models, the windshield wiper blades have been deiced outside mirror defogger and/or windshield completely before that time, push the wiper deicer are/is also equipped. The control switch to turn them off. If defrost- defogger and deicer system is activated ing, defogging or deicing is not complete, only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” you have to push the control switch to turn position. them on again. For models with the automatic climate control system, it is possible to set the defogger and deicer system for the continuous operation mode as follows. . Models with genuine SUBARU navigation system: Automatic climate control system The defogger and deicer system setting To activate the defogger and deicer can be changed for continuous operation using the navigation monitor. For details, system, push the control switch that is ’ located on the climate control panel. The refer to the Owner s Manual supplement rear window defogger, outside mirror for the navigation system. defogger and windshield wiper deicer are The setting can also be changed by a Manual climate control system activated simultaneously. The indicator SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU light on the control switch illuminates while dealer for details. the defogger and deicer system is acti- . Models without genuine SUBARU vated. navigation system: The setting can be changed by a To turn them off, push the control switch SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU again. They also turn off when the ignition dealer for details. switch is turned to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position. If the battery voltage drops below the permissible level, continuous operation of The defogger and deicer system will the defogger and deicer system is can- automatically shut off after approximately celed and the system stops operating. 15 minutes. If the rear window and the outside mirrors have been cleared and the Instruments and controls 3-37

“ ” F CAUTION Tilt steering wheel (if Front seats 1-2. equipped) 2. Pull the tilt lock lever down. . To prevent the battery from being 3. Move the steering wheel to the desired discharged, do not operate the level. defogger and deicer system con- WARNING 4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering tinuously for any longer than wheel in place. . Do not adjust the steering wheel necessary. 5. Make sure that the steering wheel is tilt position while driving. This . Do not use sharp instruments or securely locked by moving it up and down. window cleaner containing abra- may cause loss of vehicle control sives to clean the inner surface and result in personal injury. of the rear window. They may . If the lever cannot be raised to damage the conductors printed the fixed position, adjust the on the window. steering wheel again. It is dangerous to drive without locking the steering wheel. This may NOTE cause loss of vehicle control . Turn on the defogger and deicer and result in personal injury. system if the wipers are frozen to the windshield. . If the windshield is covered with snow, remove the snow so that the windshield wiper deicer works effectively. . While the defogger and deicer system is in the continuous operation mode, if the vehicle speed remains at 9 mph (15 km/h) or less for 15 minutes, the windshield wiper deicer automatically stops operating, though the rear window defogger and outside mirror defogger maintain continuous operation in this condition. 1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to 3-38 Instruments and controls

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel 1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to Horn (if equipped) “Front seats” F1-2. 2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down. 3. Move the steering wheel to the desired WARNING level. . 4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering Do not adjust the steering wheel wheel in place. tilt/telescopic position while driv- 5. Make sure that the steering wheel is ing. This may cause loss of securely locked by moving it up and down, vehicle control and result in and forward and backward. personal injury. . If the lever cannot be raised to the fixed position, adjust the steering wheel again. It is dangerous to drive without locking the steering wheel. This may To sound the horn, push the horn pad. cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury. Climate control

Ventilator...... 4-2 Air conditioner button...... 4-10 Air flow selection ...... 4-2 Temperature sensors ...... 4-11 Center and side ventilators...... 4-3 Operating tips for heater and air Manual climate control system conditioner ...... 4-12 (if equipped) ...... 4-3 Cleaning ventilation grille...... 4-12 Control panel ...... 4-3 Efficient cooling after parking in direct Heater operation ...... 4-5 sunlight...... 4-12 4 Air conditioner operation...... 4-7 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant Automatic climate control system circuit...... 4-12 Checking air conditioning system before summer (if equipped) ...... 4-8 season ...... 4-12 Control panel ...... 4-8 Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and To use as full-automatic climate control low temperature weather conditions ...... 4-12 system...... 4-8 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine To use as semi-automatic climate control is heavily loaded...... 4-12 system...... 4-8 Refrigerant for your climate control system ...... 4-12 Fan speed control dial...... 4-9 Air filtration system ...... 4-13 Temperature control dial...... 4-9 Replacing an air filter...... 4-13 Air flow control dial...... 4-9 Air inlet selection button ...... 4-10 4-2 Climate control

Ventilator & Air flow selection Climate control 4-3

& Center and side ventilators ! Side ventilators Manual climate control sys- ! Center ventilators tem (if equipped) & Control panel

1) Open 2) Close Move the tab up and down or right and left 3) Thumb-wheel to adjust the flow direction. Move the tab up and down or right and left 1) Temperature control dial to adjust the flow direction. 2) Fan speed control dial To open or close the ventilator, turn the 3) Air flow control dial thumb-wheel up or down. 4) Control switch of the defogger and deicer system (Refer to “Defogger and deicer” F3-35.) 5) Air conditioner button 6) Air inlet selection button ! Temperature control dial This dial regulates the temperature of air flow from the air outlets over a range from the blue side (cool) to red side (warm).

– CONTINUED – 4-4 Climate control

! Fan speed control dial side air” mode. ! Air inlet selection button The fan operates only when the ignition In this state, you cannot select “recir- switch is turned to the “ON” position. The culation” mode by manually pressing fan speed control dial is used to select the air inlet selection button. four fan speeds. Also, you cannot stop the air conditioner compressor by pressing the air ! Air flow control dial conditioner button. This dial has the following five positions: ! Air conditioner button : Air flows through the instrument panel outlets. : Air flows through the instrument panel outlets and the foot outlets. : Air flows through the foot outlets and some through the windshield defroster ON position (Recirculation): Interior air outlets. is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the air inlet selection button to the ON posi- : Air flows through the windshield tion. The indicator light will illuminate. defroster outlets and foot outlets. Place the air inlet selection button to the : Air flows through the windshield ON position for fast cooling with the air defroster outlets. conditioner or when driving on a dusty road. NOTE The air conditioner operates only when OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is When the dial is placed in the “ ” or the engine is running. drawn into the passenger compartment. “ ” position, the air conditioner com- Push the air conditioner button while the Push the air inlet selection button again to pressor operates automatically regard- fan is in operation to turn on the air the OFF position. The indicator light will less of the position of the air condi- conditioner. The indicator light will illumi- turn off. tioner button to defog the windshield nate. quickly. However the indicator on the Place the air inlet selection button to the air conditioner button will not illumi- Push it again to turn off the air conditioner. OFF position when the interior has cooled nate. At the same time, the air inlet to a comfortable temperature and the road selection is automatically set to “out- is no longer dusty. Climate control 4-5

WARNING the way to the right. ! Heating and defrosting 3. Set the fan speed control dial to the Continued operation with the air highest speed. inletselectionbuttonintheON If your vehicle is equipped with an air position may fog up the windows. “ ” “ ” Switch to the OFF position as soon conditioner, when the or position as the outside dusty condition is selected, the air conditioner compressor clears. automatically operates regardless of the position of the air conditioner button to defog the windshield quickly. & Heater operation However, the air conditioner indicator light does not illuminate at this time. ! Defrosting or defogging the windshield NOTE Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm air To direct warm air toward the floor and the flow from these outlets, turn the corre- windshield: sponding thumb-wheel down. 1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” position. 2. Set the temperature control dial to the most comfortable level. 3. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired speed. If your vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner, when the “ ” or “ ” position is selected, the air conditioner compressor automatically operates regardless of the To direct warm air to the windshield and position of the air conditioner button to front door windows: defog the windshield quickly. “ ” 1. Set the air flow control dial to the However, the air conditioner indicator light position. does not illuminate at this time. 2. Turn the temperature control dial all

– CONTINUED – 4-6 Climate control

NOTE NOTE desired speed. Warm air also comes out from the right Warm air also comes out from the right Setting the temperature control dial fully and left air outlets. To stop warm air and left air outlets. To stop warm air turned to the red area or blue area flow from these outlets, turn the corre- flow from these outlets, turn the corre- decreases the temperature difference sponding thumb-wheel down. sponding thumb-wheel down. between the air from the instrument panel ! Heating ! Bi-level heating outlets and the air from the foot outlets. ! Ventilation

To direct warm air toward the floor: This setting allows you to direct air of 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the different temperatures from the instrument To force outside air through the instrument OFF position. panel and foot outlets. The air from the panel outlets: 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” foot outlets is slightly warmer than from 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the position. the instrument panel outlets. OFF position. 3. Set the temperature control dial to the 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” most comfortable level. OFF position. position. “ ” 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the 2. Set the air flow control dial to the 3. Set the temperature control dial all the desired speed. position. way left. 3. Set the temperature control dial to the 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the desired temperature level. desired speed. 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the Climate control 4-7

When driving on a dusty road, set the air through the instrument panel outlets: red side. inlet selection button to the “ON” position. 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 3. Set the fan speed control dial at the OFF position. highest speed. WARNING 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” The air conditioner compressor automati- position. Continued operation with the air cally operates when the air flow control inletselectionbuttonintheON 3. Set the air conditioner button to the dial set in the “ ” or “ ” position to “ ” position may fog up the windows. ON position. provide better defogging performance. Switch to the OFF position as soon 4. Set the temperature control dial to the as the outside dusty condition blue side. clears. 5. Set the fan speed control dial at the highest speed. & Air conditioner operation ! Defrosting or defogging ! Cooling or dehumidifying

To direct warm air to the windshield and 1) ON position front door windows: For cooling and dehumidification of the 1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” passenger compartment, performing the position. following steps will allow air to flow 2. Set the temperature control dial to the 4-8 Climate control

Automatic climate control sor automatically and the “A/C” indi- set the other dials and buttons as de- system (if equipped) cator light on the control panel illumi- scribed in the following. The system’s nates. functions will then switch to AUTO mode Although this climate control system can and be controlled automatically. be used as a full-automatic climate control & Control panel . Air flow control dial: AUTO position system, it can also, if desired, be used as . Fan speed control dial: AUTO position a semi-automatic climate control system. When it is used as a full-automatic climate & To use as semi-automatic control system, the outlet air temperature, climate control system fan speed, air flow distribution, air inlet Each function can be individually set to control, and air conditioner compressor AUTO mode independently of the others. operation are all automatically controlled Any function set to AUTO mode is con- to maintain a constant, comfortable tem- trolled automatically. Any function not set perature inside the vehicle. to AUTO mode can be manually adjusted NOTE as desired. The temperature can be set within a range . Operate the automatic climate con- of 65 to 858F (20 to 308C). trol system when the engine is running. . When the engine coolant is cold, the blower does not run. 1) Temperature control dial . In the “AUTO” mode, when the air 2) Fan speed control dial 3) Air flow control dial temperature in the passenger compart- 4) Control switch of the defogger and deicer ment is sufficiently cool, the air condi- system (Refer to “Defogger and deicer” tioner compressor does not operate. F3-35.) For efficient defogging or dehumidify- 5) Air inlet selection button ing in cold weather, press the “A/C” 6) Air conditioner button button to operate the air conditioner compressor. & To use as full-automatic cli- . Even when cooling is not necessary, mate control system setting the temperature much lower than the current outlet air temperature Place the temperature control dial in the turns on the air conditioner compres- position for your desired temperature, then Climate control 4-9

& Fan speed control dial NOTE the system gives maximum cooling per- With the fan speed control dial in the formance. If the dial is turned fully clock- AUTO position and the air flow control wise, the system gives maximum heating dial in the “ ”, “ ”,or“ ” position, performance. the fan does not operate during engine warm-up until the engine coolant tem- & Air flow control dial perature exceeds approximately 1228F (508C).

& Temperature control dial

The fan operates only with the ignition switch in the ON position. The fan speed control dial is used to select the AUTO (automatic control) mode or to select the desired fan speed. The dial’s positions and their functions are as follows. This dial has the following six positions. OFF: The fan does not operate. The outlets from which air is supplied in AUTO: The fan speed is adjusted auto- each position are as follows. maticallyinaccordancewiththeair AUTO: The air flow control is adjusted temperature inside and outside the pas- This dial is used to set the desired interior automatically in accordance with the air senger compartment, the intensity of sun- temperature. With the dial set to your temperature inside and outside the pas- light, and other factors. SUBARU recom- desired temperature, the system automa- senger compartment, the intensity of sun- mends using the AUTO position. tically adjusts the temperature of air light, and other factors. SUBARU recom- Other positions: The fan speed can be supplied from the outlets such that the mends using the AUTO position. adjusted in 7 steps. desired temperature is achieved and : Instrument panel outlets maintained. : Instrument panel outlets and foot If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise, outlets

– CONTINUED – 4-10 Climate control

: Foot outlets and windshield defroster when driving on a dusty road. The & Air conditioner button outlets (relatively little air from windshield indicator light will illuminate. defroster outlets) OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air : Windshield defroster outlets and foot is drawn into the passenger compartment. outlets Push the air inlet selection button to the : Windshield defroster outlets OFF position when the interior has cooled to a comfortable temperature and the road NOTE is no longer dusty. The indicator light will When the dial is placed in the “ ” or turn off. “ ” position, the air inlet selection is AUTO: Turn the fan speed control dial and automatically set to “outside air” air flow control dial to the AUTO position. mode. The air inlet control is then adjusted automatically in accordance with the air & Air inlet selection button temperature inside and outside the passenger compartment, the intensity of sun- The button positions and their functions light, and other factors. Pressing the air are as follows. inlet selection button cancels the “AUTO” ON: The air conditioner operates while the mode. To return to “AUTO” mode, turn the fan is running. fan speed control dial or air flow control dial to a position other than the AUTO Push the button to select this position. The position. Then turn to “AUTO” mode. indicator light will illuminate. SUBARU recommends using the AUTO OFF: The air conditioner does not oper- position. ate. Push the button again to select this WARNING position. The indicator light will turn off. AUTO: Turn the fan speed control dial and Continued operation in the ON posi- air flow control dial to the AUTO position. tion may fog up the windows. Switch The air conditioner compressor operation ON position (Recirculation): Interior air to the OFF position as soon as the is then adjusted automatically in accor- is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the outside dusty condition clears. dance with the air temperature inside and air inlet selection button to the ON position outside the passenger compartment, the for fast cooling with the air conditioner or intensity of sunlight, and other factors. Climate control 4-11

Pressing the button cancels the “AUTO” & Temperature sensors properly and become damaged, the sys- mode. To return to “AUTO” mode, turn the tem may not be able to control the interior fan speed control dial or air flow control temperature correctly. To avoid damaging dial to a position other than the AUTO the sensors, observe the following pre- position. Then turn to “AUTO” mode. cautions. SUBARU recommends using the AUTO – Do not subject the sensors to impact. position. – Keep water away from the sensors. NOTE – Do not cover the sensors. The air conditioner’s compressor does The sensors are located as follows. not operate with an outside tempera- – Solar sensor: beside the windshield 8 8 ture of 32 F(0C) or lower. defroster grille. – Interior air temperature sensor: near the ignition switch. – Outside temperature sensor: behind the front grille.

1) Interior air temperature sensor 2) Solar sensor The automatic climate control system employs several sensors. These sensors are delicate. If they are not treated 4-12 Climate control

Operating tips for heater and heated interior. This results in quicker system. air conditioner cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during the operation of & Air conditioner compressor & Cleaning ventilation grille the air conditioner for maximum cooling shut-off when engine is efficiency. heavily loaded & Lubrication oil circulation in To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air conditioner compressor is designed the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi- Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving on a steep the off-season to circulate its oil. upgrade. & Checking air conditioning & Refrigerant for your climate system before summer sea- control system son Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth- Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper od of adding, changing or checking the free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions operation each spring. Have the air con- refrigerant is different from the method for to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. ditioning system checked by your CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU Since the condenser is located in front of SUBARU dealer. dealer for service. Repairs needed as a the radiator, this area should be kept clean result of using the wrong refrigerant are because cooling performance is impaired & Cooling and dehumidifying in not covered under warranty. by any accumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser. high humidity and low temperature weather conditions & Efficient cooling after parking Under certain weather conditions (high in direct sunlight relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission After parking in direct sunlight, drive with from the air outlets may be noticed. This the windows open for a few minutes to condition is normal and does not indicate allow outside air to circulate into the any problem with the air conditioning Climate control 4-13

Air filtration system mance if not properly maintained. Replace the filter element according to the & Replacing an air filter replacement schedule as follows. This schedule should be followed to maintain 1. Remove the glove box. the filter’s dust collection ability. Under (1) Open the glove box. extremely dusty conditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently. It is recommended that you have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

Replacement schedule: (3) Pull out the glove box. Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km) whichever comes first

CAUTION (2) Remove the damper shaft from the Contact your SUBARU dealer if the glove box. following occurs, even if it is not yet time to change the filter: – Reduction of the air flow through the vents. – Windshield gets easily fogged or misted. 2. Remove the air filter. NOTE The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster perfor- – CONTINUED – 4-14 Climate control

3. Replace the air filter element with a 4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect 1) Service label new one. the damper shaft. (2) Attach the service label to the 5. Close the glove box. driver’s side door pillar. CAUTION 6. LABEL installation The arrow mark on the filter must (1) Fill out the information on the point UP. service label (small).

1) Caution label (3) Attach the caution label next to the Climate control 4-15 air filter as shown in the illustration. ————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————

———————————————————————————————————————— Audio

Antenna system ...... 5-2 Band selection...... 5-14 Roof antenna ...... 5-2 Channel and category selection ...... 5-14 FM reception...... 5-2 Channel preset ...... 5-16 XMTM satellite radio reception (if equipped)...... 5-2 Display selection ...... 5-16 Installation of accessories...... 5-4 CD player operation ...... 5-17 Audio set ...... 5-5 How to insert a CD (type A)...... 5-17 Type A audio set (if equipped) ...... 5-5 How to insert a CD(s) (type B)...... 5-17 Type B audio set (if equipped) ...... 5-6 How to play back a CD ...... 5-19 Power and sound controls ...... 5-7 To select a track from its beginning...... 5-19 5 Power switch and volume control ...... 5-7 Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing ...... 5-20 Sound control ...... 5-7 Repeating...... 5-21 Adjustable level of each mode ...... 5-9 Random playback ...... 5-21 FM/AM radio operation ...... 5-10 Scan ...... 5-22 Display selection ...... 5-22 FM/AM selection...... 5-10 Folder selection...... 5-23 Tuning ...... 5-10 How to eject a CD from the player (type A) ...... 5-23 Displaying radio PS (Program Service Name) and RT (Radio Text) ...... 5-12 How to eject CDs from the player (type B) ...... 5-24 Station preset ...... 5-12 When the following messages are displayed...... 5-25 Satellite radio operation (if equipped) ...... 5-13 AUX unit operation ...... 5-25 XMTM satellite radio ...... 5-13 Audio control buttons (if equipped) ...... 5-26 Sirius satellite radio ...... 5-13 MODE button...... 5-26 Satellite radio reception...... 5-13 Precautions to observe when handling a Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner ...... 5-13 compact disc...... 5-28 5-2 Audio

Antenna system XMTM satellite radio reception (if equipped) & Roof antenna XMTM is a continental U.S. based satellite CAUTION radio service, including music, news, sports, talk and children’s programming. . Be sure to lower the antenna rod XMTM provides digital quality audio and before entering garages, parking text information, including song title and towers and other locations with artist name. A service fee is required to low ceilings. receive the XMTM service. For more . Remove the antenna rod before information, contact XMTM at washing your car at a car wash. If www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM- the antenna rod is left attached, it RADIO (1-800-967-2346) for U.S., may scratch the roof. 1) Unscrew www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-GET-XMSR (1- 2) Remove . When reinstalling the removed 877-438-9677) for Canada. The roof antenna is installed in the center antenna rod, be sure to fully The XMTM satellite radio receiver that is at the rear part of the roof. tighten it. fitted to your vehicle receives the neces- It is possible to remove the antenna rod by sary signals from two specially designated unscrewing it from its base. satellites that are in a geostationary orbit over the equator. One satellite covers the & FM reception east coast and the other covers the west coast. Both of them direct their signals Although FM is normally static free, north. These signals are then relayed reception can be affected by the surround- throughout the USA by a network of ing area, atmospheric conditions, station ground repeater stations. The satellite strength and transmitter distance. Build- radio signals are transmitted as “line of ings or other obstructions may cause sight” signals. Line of sight signals can be momentary static, flutter or station inter- blocked by objects such as buildings, but ference. If reception continues to be the network of repeater stations allows unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station. signal coverage within urban areas such as cities. Audio 5-3

You may experience problems in receiving XMTM satellite radio signals in the following situations. . If you are driving northward in a coastal area You will notice that the XMTM satellite radio antenna is fixed to the upper right hand corner of your windshield.

. If you are driving in a tunnel or a . If you are driving in an area with tall covered parking area trees that block the signal (33 ft (10 m) or . If you are driving beneath the top level more), for example on a road that goes of a multi-level freeway through a dense forest . If you drive under a bridge . The signal can become weak in some . If you are driving next to a tall vehicle areas that are not covered by the repeater (such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the station network. signal Please note that these may be other . The signal comes from the south and may If you are driving in a valley where the unforeseen circumstances when there not be able to reach the antenna in some surrounding hills or peaks block the signal are problems with the reception of XMTM circumstances when you are driving north. from the south satellite radio signals. . If you are driving on a mountain road where the southern direction is blocked by mountains 5-4 Audio

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing a citizen band radio or other transmitting device in your vehicle. Such devices may cause the electronic control system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle. Audio 5-5

Audio set The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the following audio sets. See the pages position. indicated in this section for operating details. . Power and sound controls: refer to page 5-7 & Type A audio set (if equipped) . Radio operation: refer to page 5-10 . Satellite radio operation (if equipped): refer to page 5-13 . CD (compact disc) player operation: refer to page 5-17 . AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-25

– CONTINUED – 5-6 Audio

& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” position. . Power and sound controls: refer to page 5-7 . Radio operation: refer to page 5-10 . Satellite radio operation (if equipped): refer to page 5-13 . CD (compact disc) player operation: refer to page 5-17 . AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-25 Audio 5-7

Power and sound controls & Sound control ! Other sound setting controls & Power switch and volume ! Tone and balance control control

Each brief press of the “MENU” button changes the control modes in the follow- Each brief press of the sound control dial ing sequence. changes the control modes in the follow- The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF) Type A audio: and volume control. The radio is turned ing sequence. ON and OFF by pushing the dial, and the volume is controlled by turning the dial.

Choose the desired level for each mode Type B audio: by turning the sound control dial. The control function returns to the tune/ track/channel control mode after approximately 5 seconds. Choose the desired settings for each mode by turning the sound control dial. The control function returns to the tune/ track/channel control mode after approxi- – CONTINUED – 5-8 Audio mately 5 seconds. (built in SRS FOCUS effect). ! 2) Ultra rich bass sound can be ob- SVC setting tained from standard door mount SVC (Speed Volume Control) is a function speakers (built in SRS TruBass effect). that automatically adjusts the volume 3) Surround sound can be obtained according to the vehicle speed. As the from 2-channel stereo sources such as vehicle speed increases, the audio vo- CD, MP3 and FM (built in SRS Circle lume automatically increases to match the Surround II effect). vehicle speed, in order to create a 4) SRS CS Auto can position the pleasant listening environment even as center channel image in the center of the driving noise increases. The amount of the vehicle’s windshield. This elimi- this automatic volume change can be set nates the need for a center speaker in the range from OFF to 2. The initial (built in SRS Circle Surround II phan- setting is OFF. tom center and SRS FOCUS effects). ! BEEP setting CS Auto, TruBass, FOCUS, Circle Sur- A beep sound (operation sound) that round-II, SRS and “ ” symbol are occurs when the audio system is operated trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. can be set ON/OFF. The initial setting is CS Auto technology is incorporated ON. under license from SRS Labs, inc. ! SRS CS Auto setting (type B audio) SRS CS Auto can be set ON/OFF. When this setting is ON, “ ” is displayed on the screen. NOTE SRS CS Auto creates a 5.1ch equivalent surround field using 10 speakers that are installed in the vehicle. SRS CS Auto features: 1) Sound originating from door mount speakers can be heard at ear level Audio 5-9

& Adjustable level of each mode

Mode Range of levels Initial setting Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise (displayed) Volume Volume control 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume AUX volume control* 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume Tone and balance Bass control −8 to +8 0 For less bass sound For more bass sound Midrange control −8 to +8 0 For less midrange sound For more midrange sound Treble control −8 to +8 0 For less treble sound For more treble sound Balance L9 to R9 0 Right channel attenuated Left channel attenuated Fader R9 to F9 0 Front attenuated Rear attenuated Other settings SPEED VOLUME OFF to 2 OFF For less auto volume change For more auto volume change BEEP OFF to ON ON OFF ON CS Auto (type B audio) OFF to ON OFF OFF ON

*: Only when an AUX audio product is connected. 5-10 Audio

FM/AM radio operation & Tuning ! Seek tuning (SEEK) & FM/AM selection ! Manual tuning

If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK button briefly, the radio will auto- Push the “FM AM” button when the radio Turn the TUNE dial clockwise to increase matically search for a receivable station “ ” is off to turn on the radio. the tuning frequency and turn the TUNE and stop at the first one it finds. This Push the “FM AM” button when the radio dial counterclockwise to decrease it. function may not be available, however, is on to select FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM Each time the dial is turned, the frequency when radio signals are weak. In such a reception. interval can be changed between 10 kHz situation, perform manual tuning to select Each brief press of the “FM AM” button in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM the desired station. changes the radio in the following se- mode. quence starting from the last radio band ! Stereo indicator with you selected. The stereo indicator “ST” will illuminate when an FM stereo broadcast is received. Audio 5-11

! Scan tuning (SCAN) ! PTY (Program type) group tuning ! PTY (Program type) group selection (only FM reception)

If you press the “SCAN” button, the radio In the PTY selection mode, press the will switch to the scan mode. In this mode, Press the “PTY/CAT” button to change to “PTY” button “ ” or “ ” to change the the radio scans through the radio band the PTY selection mode. At this time, the PTY group by one step at a time. until a station is found. The radio will stop PTY group that you are currently listening Pressing “ ” changes the PTY group up at the station for 5 seconds while display- to will be displayed for 10 seconds. In the by one step. Pressing “ ” changes the ing the frequency, after which scanning PTY selection mode, “PTY” is displayed PTY group down by one step. will continue until the entire band has been on the screen. This operation only changes the display. It scanned. “ ” does not change the station that is Press the SCAN button again to cancel currently being received. the SCAN mode and to stop at any displayed channel. Automatic tuning may not function properly if the station reception is weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and hills.

– CONTINUED – 5-12 Audio

! Seek in PTY (Program type) group & Displaying radio PS (Pro- & Station preset gram Service Name) and RT ! (Radio Text) How to preset stations 1. Press the “FM AM” button to select FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM reception. 2. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the SEEK button or tune the radio manually until the desired station frequency is displayed. 3. Press one of the preset buttons for more than 1.5 seconds to store the frequency. If the button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection will remain in memory. In the PTY selection mode, when the desired PTY group has been selected, NOTE pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” or “ ” If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or . If the connection between the radio seeks within that PTY group. RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing “ ” “ ” and battery is broken for any reason Pressing seeks up. Pressing the “TEXT” button changes the display such as vehicle maintenance or radio seeks down. among PS, RT and frequency. The initial removal, all stations stored in the The control function returns to the normal setting is “PS”. preset buttons are cleared. If this mode after approximately 10 seconds. occurs, it is necessary to reset the NOTE preset buttons. . The maximum number of characters . If a cell phone is placed near the that can be displayed for PS is 8. radio, it may cause the radio to emit . The maximum number of characters noise when it receives calls. This noise that can be displayed for RT is 64. does not indicate a radio fault. . If RT is 13 characters or longer, press and hold the “TEXT” button for 0.5 second or longer in order to change the page. Audio 5-13

! Selecting preset stations Satellite radio operation (if dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at equipped) www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474) for more information. Sirius, the To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos install the SUBARU genuine satellite are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio receiver (optional equipment) and to enter Inc. into a contract. For details, please contact & your SUBARU dealer. Satellite radio reception Satellite radio signals are best received in & XMTM satellite radio areas with a clear view of the open sky. In XMTM is a continental U.S. based satellite areas where there are tall buildings, trees, radio service, including music, news, tunnels or other structures that may sports, talk and children’s programming. obstruct the signal of the satellites, there XMTM provides digital quality audio and may be signal interruptions. Other circum- Presetting a station with a preset button text information, including song title and stances that may result in signal loss allows you to select that station in a single artist name. A service fee is required to include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill operation. Up to six AM, FM1, FM2 and receive the XMTM service. For more or driving on the lower level of a multi- FM3 stations each may be preset. information, contact XMTM at tiered road or inside of a parking garage. www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM- To help reduce this condition, satellite RADIO (1-800-967-2346) for U.S., radio providers have installed ground- www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-GET-XMSR (1- based repeaters in heavily populated 877-438-9677) for Canada. areas. However, you may still experience reception problems in some areas. & Sirius satellite radio & Displaying satellite radio ID Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation that allows the listener to experience of tuner digital sound quality and to have a greater When you activate satellite radio, you variety of channels. should have your satellite radio tuner ID Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a ready because each tuner is identified by tuner, antenna and a service contract. For its unique satellite radio tuner ID. details, please contact your SUBARU The satellite radio ID will be needed when

– CONTINUED – 5-14 Audio you activate satellite radio and receive tion. ! Channel selection (type B) satellite radio customer support. The satellite radio ID can be found on the & Channel and category selec- audio display by tuning the channel to “0”. tion “ ” Turn the CH dial to select the satellite ! radio channel. Channel selection (type A) NOTE For Sirius, change the display to an indication mode other than the channel number after performing the above operation.

& Band selection When in the SAT mode, briefly press the “SEEK” button “ ” or “ ” to select the channel.

Turn the “CH” dial clockwise to select the next channel and turn the “CH” dial counterclockwise to select the previous channel.

Push the “SAT” button when the radio is off to turn on the radio. Push the “SAT” button when the radio is on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep- Audio 5-15

! Skip channel selection ! Category selection ! Channel scan

When in the SAT mode, press the “SEEK” When in the SAT mode, press the “CAT” Press the “SCAN” button to change the button “ ” or “ ” continuously to button “ ” or “ ” to change to the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, change to the channel selection mode. category search mode. under the selected category, the radio “ ” “ ” Pressing the SEEK button changes When in the category search mode, scans through the channel until a station the channel up by 10 steps each time. pressing the “CAT” button “ ” changes is found. The radio will stop at the station “ ” Pressing changes the channel down the category up by one step. Pressing “ ” for 5 seconds while displaying the channel by 10 steps each time. changes the category down by one step. number, after which scanning will continue When a category is selected, turning the until the entire channel has been scanned “CH” dial selects channels only within the from the low end to the high end. selected category. Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel The control function returns to the normal the SCAN mode and to stop on any mode after approximately 10 seconds. displayed channel.

– CONTINUED – 5-16 Audio

& Channel preset ! Selecting preset channels & Display selection ! How to preset channels 1. Press the “SAT” button to select SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 reception. 2. Select the desired channel. 3. Press one of the preset buttons for more than 1.5 seconds to store the channel. If the button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection will remain in memory.

NOTE If the connection between the radio and “ ” battery is broken for any reason such Presetting a channel with a preset button Press the TEXT button while receiving as vehicle maintenance or radio re- allows you to select that channel in a the satellite radio to change the display as moval, all channels stored in the preset single operation. Up to six SAT1, SAT2 follows. buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is and SAT3 channels each may be preset. necessary to reset the preset buttons. Audio 5-17

CD player operation & How to insert a CD (type A) no idle position in the magazine. “ ” Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole 2. When the LOAD indicator illumi- NOTE while gripping the edge of the disc, then nates, insert the disc. Once you have “ ” . Make sure to always insert a disc insert it in to the slot (with the label side inserted the disc, the LOAD indicator will with the label side up. If a disc is up) and the player will automatically pull turn off. The disc will then be automatically inserted with the label side down, the the disc into position. drawn in, and the player will begin to play player displays “CHECK DISC”. Refer back the first track of the disc. NOTE to “When the following messages are . To insert more discs in succession, displayed” F5-25. DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will . If a disc is inserted during a radio DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME. be loaded with discs in the ascending broadcast, the disc will interrupt the order of position number. broadcast. & How to insert a CD(s) (type B) . If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds After the last song finishes, the disc after you have pressed the “LOAD” button, will automatically return to track 1 (the the player will begin to play back the first first track on the disc) and will auto- track of the last disc you have inserted. matically play back. . The disc indicator steadily lights up if a . The player is designed to be able to disc is already inserted in the correspond- play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs, ing position of the magazine. but it may not be able to play certain . ones. While the player is in the loading mode, “ ” “ ” “ ” . CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not if you press FM/AM , SAT or AUX supported, and if inserted, they will be button, the player will enter the standby “ ” immediately ejected. mode. Press the CD button to start . The file (track) that has protected by playback. copyright of WMA cannot be played, and the player will skip to the next file (track). 1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the magazine in the player has an idle position where you can insert a disc, the disc number indicator associated with the idle position will blink. If no indicator blinks, it means that there is – CONTINUED – 5-18 Audio

! Inserting a disc in a desired posi- Press the “CD” button to start playback. tion ! Loading all the magazine (full disc loading mode)

2. Press the disc select button at the position where you want to insert a disc. 1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the 3. When the “LOAD” indicator illuminates, insert the disc. Once you have magazine in the player has an idle 1. If you continue to press the “LOAD” position where you can insert a disc, the inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will turn off. The disc will then be automatically button for more than 1.5 seconds, the disc number indicator associated with the player will produce beep sound and will idle position will blink. drawn in, and the player will begin to play the first track on the disc. enter the full disc loading mode. The positions in the magazine the indica- 2. When the disc number indicator tor of which steadily lights up are already . If you wish to insert another disc, flashes and “ALL LOAD” indicator illumi- loaded with discs. repeat the procedure beginning with step nates, insert a disc within 15 seconds. If a 1. disc is successfully loaded during this If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds period, the disc number indicator will stop after you have pressed the “LOAD” button, blinking and will steadily light. the player will begin to play back the first 3. When the loading of a disc is com- track of the last disc you have inserted. plete, the next disc number indicator will . While the player is in the loading mode, blink. Then repeat Step 2. if you press “FM/AM”, “SAT” or “AUX” 4. When the magazine is filled with discs button, the player will enter standby mode. by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will Audio 5-19

! start playback of the discs, beginning with When there are CDs loaded (type B) & To select a track from its the one inserted first. beginning If you fail to insert any disc during each 15 ! Forward direction seconds interval, the full disc loading mode will be canceled, and the player will start playback of the disc inserted first. & How to play back a CD ! When there is no CD inserted Properly insert a CD. Refer to “How to insert a CD (type A)” F5-17 / “How to insert a CD(s) (type B)” F5-17. When a CD is loaded, the player will start playback of the CD, beginning with the Press a desired one of the disc select first track. buttons the disc number indicator of which steadily lights up. The player will then start ! When CD is in the player (type A) playback of the selected CD, beginning Turn the “TRACK” dial clockwise to skip to with the first track. the beginning of the next track/file (track). If a disc that the player cannot read has Each time the dial is turned, the indicated been loaded, the player will display the track/file (track) number will increase. message “CHECK DISC”. NOTE In an MP3 or WMA folder, skipping past the last track/file (track) will take you back to the first track/file (track) in the folder.

When the “CD” button is pressed, the player will start playback. – CONTINUED – 5-20 Audio

! Backward direction & Fast-forwarding and fast-re- ! Fast-reversing versing ! Fast-forwarding

Turn the “TRACK” dial counterclockwise Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” button to skip to the beginning of the current continuously to fast-reverse the disc/ track/file (track). Each time the dial is folder. “ ” “ ” turned, the indicated track/file (track) Press the side of the SEEK button Release the button to stop fast-reversing. number will decrease. continuously to fast-forward the disc/ folder. NOTE NOTE Release the button to stop fast-forwarding. If you fast-reverse to the beginning of In an MP3 or WMA folder, skipping past the first track/file (track), fast-reversing the first track/file (track) will take you to NOTE will stop and the player will start play- the last track/file (track) in the folder. If you fast-forward to the end of the last back. track/file (track), fast-forwarding will stop and the player will start playback beginning with the first track/file (track). Audio 5-21

& Repeating NOTE & Random playback . The “RPT” indication refers to the repeat playback of a single track. It repeats the track that is playing. . The “F-RPT” indication refers to the repeat playback of a folder. It repeats the all of the tracks in the folder. It is possible to select the function when the MP3/WMA format track is playing. . The “D-RPT” indication refers to the repeat playback of a disc. It repeats the tracks on the CD. It is only possible to select this function for type B audio. To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press mode, briefly press the “RPT” button To playback a track/file(s) at random, the “RPT” button while the track/file (track) twice. The “RPT” indication will turn off, press the “RPT” button for 0.5 second or is playing. and the normal playback mode will be longer while the track/file is playing. Each time you briefly press the button, the resumed. Each time you press the button, the mode mode changes in the following se- changes in the following sequences. quences. NOTE Type A audio: The repeat-play mode will be cancelled if you perform any of the following steps. . Press the “RPT” button and select CANCEL . “ ” Type B audio: Press the button . Press the disc select button NOTE . Press the “SCAN” button . The “RDM” indication refers to the . Press the “LOAD” button when random playback of the tracks. It there is free space in the CD magazine randomly repeats the tracks on the CD. It is possible to select the function when formats other than the MP3/WMA

– CONTINUED – 5-22 Audio format CD is playing. & Scan . Press the disc select button . The “F-RDM” indication refers to the . Select the radio or AUX mode random playback in the folder. It ran- . Press the “LOAD” button when domly repeats the tracks in the folder. It there is free space in the CD magazine is possible to select the function when . Turn off the power of the audio an MP3/WMA format track is playing. equipment . The “D-RDM” indication refers to the . Turntheignitionswitchtothe random playback of a disc. It randomly “LOCK” position repeats the tracks in the CD. It is possible to select the function when & Display selection an MP3/WMA format track is playing. To cancel the random playback mode, press the “RPT” button again and select CANCEL. The “RDM” indication will turn off, and the The scan mode lets you listen to the first normal playback mode will be resumed. 10 seconds of each track/file in succession. Press the “SCAN” button to start NOTE scanning upward beginning with the track/ Random playback will be cancelled if file(s) following the currently selected one. you perform any of the following steps. After all track/file(s) in the disk/folder have . Press the “RPT” button and select been scanned, normal playback will be CANCEL resumed. To cancel the scan mode, press . Press the “ ” button the “SCAN” button again. . Press the disc select button If you press the “TEXT” button during . Press the “SCAN” button NOTE . “ ” playback, the indication will change to the Press the LOAD button when The scan mode will be cancelled if you next one in the following sequence. there is free space in the CD magazine perform any of the following steps. . Press the “RPT” button . Turn the “TRACK” dial . Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the “FOLDER” button . Press the “ ” button Audio 5-23

For CD-DA: & Folder selection & How to eject a CD from the player (type A)

For MP3/WMA:

! Page (track/folder title) scroll

Press the “ ” side of the “FOLDER” button briefly to select the next folder. When a disc is being played back or when Press the “ ” side of the button briefly to a disc is in the player, press the eject go back to the previous folder. The folder button “ ”. The disc will be ejected. title will be shown each time you press one of the buttons. NOTE . Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD NOTE sticking out, because vibration might . Selecting folders in this way is make it fall out. possible only within a single disc. . If the disc is left ejected for more If you press the “TEXT” button again for at . Only MP3/WMA folders are recog- than approximately 15 seconds after least 0.5 second, the title will be scrolled nized when an attempt to select the the ignition switch is turned to the so you can see all of it. next or previous folder is made. If no “OFF” position, a disc protection func- appropriate folder exists on the disc, tion will operate, automatically reload- NOTE pressing the “ ” or “ ” side of the ing the disc. In this case, the disc is not The display is designed to show titles “FOLDER” button starts playback be- played. for up to 24 characters. ginning with the first track/file (track).

– CONTINUED – 5-24 Audio

& How to eject CDs from the ! Ejecting all discs from the player player (type B) (all disc ejection mode) ! Ejecting a CD from the player Of the discs loaded, you can select and remove only one disc.

2. Briefly press the “ ” button. The selected disc will be ejected. The disc number indicator will flash at this time. 1. If you continue to press the “ ” When you remove the ejected disc, the button, the player will produce beep sound disc number indicator will turn off. and will enter the all disc ejection mode. At To remove more discs in succession, this time, the disc number indicator and 1. Use the disc select button to select the repeat steps 1 and 2. “ALL EJECT” indicator will flash. disc to be ejected. 2. Remove the disc that has been ejected. The other discs loaded will then be ejected one after another. If you do not remove the disc that has been ejected, the “All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.

NOTE . Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD sticking out, because vibration might make it fall out. . If you press the “ ” button while Audio 5-25 the player is in all disc ejection mode, ! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed AUX unit operation the mode will be cancelled following Press the eject button to unload the discs. ejection of the disc that is currently Check that the disc is not damaged or being ejected. scratched, and also check that the disc is . If you press the “CD” button or “ ” inserted correctly. This message may LOAD button while the player is in appear when using some CD-RW discs. all disc ejection mode, the player will Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch draw in the discs that have been CDs are not supported) and data format ejected and play them. are correct. This player can only play MP3 & When the following mes- and WMA data formats. If the disc cannot be unloaded or this message remains sages are displayed displayed, please contact your SUBARU If one of the following messages is dealer. displayed while operating the CD player, determine the cause based on the following information. If you cannot clear those Models without genuine SUBARU naviga- messages, please contact your SUBARU tion system dealer. By connecting a commercial audio pro- ! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed duct to the vehicle, such as a portable audio player, you can hear its sound via Press the eject button to unload the disc. the vehicle’s speaker. Check the disc for damage or deforma- For the audio input jack, a stereo mini pin tion, and also check that the correct disc is plug (3.5ø) can be connected. The con- inserted. Do not try to unload the disc nection cable is available at electrical forcibly. Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) appliance or similar stores. are not supported, and if inserted, they will be immediately ejected and this message To use the AUX unit: will be displayed. If the disc cannot be 1. Connect a portable audio player to the unloaded or this message remains dis- AUX jack. played, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED – 5-26 Audio

volume of the audio set, the volume Audio control buttons (if becomes louder. However, when you equipped) change from one portable audio player to another one, the volume levels via ’ These buttons are located on the steering the vehicle s speakers may be signifi- wheel. They allow the driver to control cantly loud compared to the prior audio functions without taking his/her device. To avoid a large volume differ- hands off the steering wheel. ence, turn down the volume when you change between portable audio & MODE button players. . In some cases, when the sound volume of the portable audio player is low, the sound becomes bad when you 2. Press the AUX input selection button turn up the volume of the vehicle audio “CD/AUX” on the audio control panel to system. In this case, adjust the sound turn on the auxiliary audio input. volume of the portable audio player. . 3. Play back the portable audio player. In some cases, noise occurs be- Refer to the Owner’s Manual of the cause of a bad connection between the portable audio player. portable player of the vehicle audio system or for the player. NOTE . The AUX jacks of the models with the genuine SUBARU navigation sys- This button is used to select the desired tem are the RCA type. For detailed audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the information, refer to the Owner’s Man- mode changes to the next one in the ual supplement for the navigation sys- following sequence: tem. . The output sound of the portable audio player is not loud, and the sound via the vehicle’s speakers that are connected to the vehicle audio set *1: The frequency last received in the selected may be very low. If you turn up the Audio 5-27 waveband will be displayed. on the audio display. ! MUTE button *2: Only when a CD is in the player. ! With SAT mode selected *3: Only when with an auxiliary audio product is Press the “ ” button to skip forward in the connected. channel order. Press the “ ” button to ! “ ” and “ ” buttons skip backward in the channel order. The channel will be shown on the audio display. ! Volume control buttons

Press this button if you wish to immediately cut the volume to zero. The audio display will show “MUTE”. If you press the button again, the original sound volume will return and “MUTE” ! With radio mode selected turns off. Press the “ ” button or “ ” button for a short time to skip to a preset channel, and Press the “+” button to increase the press it for a long time to seek the next “−” receivable station. volume. Press the button to reduce the volume. ! With CD mode selected A number indicating the volume will be Press the “ ” button to skip forward in the shown on the audio display. track/file (track) order. Press the “ ” button to skip backward in the track/file (track) order. The track/file (track) number will be shown 5-28 Audio

Precautions to observe when handling a compact disc

Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the following. Also, some compact discs cannot be played.

. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD player. If you insert a DualDisc into the player, the disc may not come out again, possibly causing the player to malfunction. . In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can form inside the CD player, preventing normal operation. If this happens, eject the CD and wait for the player to dry out. . Skipping may occur when the CD player is subjected to severe vibration (for example, when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface). . To remove a disc from the case, press the center of the case and hold both edges of the disc. If the disc surface is touched directly, contamination could cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the disc surface. . Use a clean disc whenever possible. If Audio 5-29 there are deposits, wipe the disc surface from the center outward with a dry, soft cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth, thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc. . Do not use any disc that is scratched, deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use any disc that has a non-standard shape (for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions or problems might result. . A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never keep it either in places exposed to direct sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles parked in the sun or on hot days. ————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————

———————————————————————————————————————— Interior equipment

Interior lights ...... 6-2 Bottle holders ...... 6-9 Dome light ...... 6-2 Accessory power outlets ...... 6-9 Cargo area light ...... 6-3 Use with a cigarette lighter (dealer option)...... 6-11 Map light...... 6-3 Ashtray (if equipped)...... 6-11 Sun visors ...... 6-4 Floor mat ...... 6-12 Vanity mirror ...... 6-5 Shopping bag hook ...... 6-12 Storage compartment ...... 6-5 Coat hook...... 6-13 Glove box ...... 6-5 Cargo area cover (dealer option)...... 6-13 Center console...... 6-5 Using the cover ...... 6-13 Overhead console ...... 6-7 To remove the cover ...... 6-14 Rear seat center table (if equipped) ...... 6-7 To install the cover housing ...... 6-14 6 Coin tray...... 6-7 Cargo tie-down hooks ...... 6-15 Cup holders ...... 6-8 Under-floor storage compartment Front passenger cup holder...... 6-8 (if equipped) ...... 6-16 Rear passenger cup holder (if equipped)...... 6-8 6-2 Interior equipment

Interior lights The automatically illuminated dome light remains on for several seconds and then When leaving your vehicle, make sure the gradually turns off after all doors and the light is turned off to avoid battery dis- rear gate are closed. While the light is charge. illuminated, if any of the following operations are performed, the dome light turns & Dome light off immediately. . The ignition switch is turned from the “LOCK” position to “Acc” or “ON” position. . All doors and the rear gate are locked using the remote keyless entry transmitter. The setting of the period for which the light Type B remains on (OFF delay timer) can be 1) ON changed as follows. 2) DOOR . Models with genuine SUBARU navi- 3) OFF gation system: The dome light switch has the following The setting can be changed using the three positions. navigation monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement ON: The light remains on continuously. Type A for the navigation system. Also, the setting OFF: The light remains off. can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto- Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. matically in the following cases. . Models without genuine SUBARU . Any of the doors or the rear gate is navigation system: opened. The setting can be changed by a . The doors or the rear gate are un- SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU locked using the remote keyless entry dealer for details. transmitter. . The ignition switch is turned from the “Acc” position to the “LOCK” position. Interior equipment 6-3

& Cargo area light & Map light ! Door interlock switch

1) DOOR 1) Map light switch (lens) 1) Door interlock switch 2) OFF 3) ON To turn on the map light, push the lens. Although the map light switches (lenses) To turn it off, push the lens again. are in the OFF position (manually off), the The cargo area light switch has the map lights can be set to illuminate auto- following three positions. When leaving the vehicle, make sure the matically in conjunction with the opening light is turned off to avoid battery dis- of the doors by use of the door interlock DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear charge. gate is opened. The light remains illumi- switch. The door interlock switch has the nated for several seconds and turns off following two positions. after the rear gate is closed. OFF: The map lights do not illuminate OFF: The light remains off. automatically in conjunction with the open- ON: The light remains on continuously. ing of the doors. But, the lights can be turned on manually by pushing the map light switches (lenses). DOOR: The map lights illuminate automatically in the following cases. . Any of the doors other than the rear gate is opened. (The map lights do not – CONTINUED – 6-4 Interior equipment illuminate when only the rear gate is . Models without genuine SUBARU Sun visors opened.) navigation system: . The doors are unlocked using the The setting can be changed by a remote keyless entry transmitter. SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU . The ignition switch is turned from the dealer for details. “Acc” position to the “LOCK” position. The automatically illuminated map lights remain on for several seconds and then gradually turn off after all doors are closed. While the lights are on, if any of the following operations are performed, the map lights turn off immediately. . The ignition switch is turned from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON” position. To block out glare, swing down the visors. . All doors and the rear gate are locked To use the sun visor at a side window, using the remote keyless entry transmitter. swing it down and move it sideways. The setting of the period for which the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be changed as follows. . Models with genuine SUBARU navigation system: The setting can be changed using the navigation monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the navigation system. Also, the setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. Interior equipment 6-5

& Vanity mirror Storage compartment & Glove box CAUTION CAUTION Keep the vanity mirror cover closed while the car is being driven to avoid . Always keep the storage com- being temporarily blinded by the partment closed while driving to glare of bright light. reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. . Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compartment. 1) Lock 2) Unlock To open the glove box, pull the handle. To close it, push the lid firmly upward. To lock the glove box, insert the key and turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box, insert the key and turn it counterclockwise. To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. & Center console The center console box provides a storage space. In addition, the top of the console can be used as an armrest.

– CONTINUED – 6-6 Interior equipment

To use as an armrest: driving position. Make sure the armrest is securely retained. To return the console top to the vertical position, raise the console top.

CAUTION Do not step or sit on the armrest, and do not place heavy objects on it. The armrest could break, and you could get hurt.

To use as storage space: 1) Pocket console 1. Tip the console top forward from its The pocket console can be used to store vertical position. small items. CAUTION Be careful not to trap your hands between the console top and console box when raising and tipping the console top.

Raise the console top to the vertical position.

2. Push the armrest part of the console top forward to the desired position. Adjust the position of the armrest to suit your Interior equipment 6-7

& Overhead console & Rear seat center table (if cup holders. equipped) CAUTION . Do not step or sit on the rear seat center table, and do not place heavy objects on it. The rear seat center table could break, and you could get hurt. . When pulling out or returning the rear seat center table, make sure not to pinch fingers or other body parts.

To open the console, push on the console & Coin tray lid lightly and the lid will automatically To use the rear seat center table, pull the open. strap up. CAUTION When your vehicle is in the sun or on a warm day, the inside of the overhead console heats up. Avoid storing plastic or other heat-vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter in the overhead console.

A coin tray is built in the center console. The rear seat center table can be used as a storage space and as rear passenger’s 6-8 Interior equipment

Cup holders & Rear passenger cup holder (if equipped) CAUTION Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot, might burn you or your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage upholstery, carpets or audio equipment.

& Front passenger cup holder A dual cup holder is built in the center CAUTION console, beside the parking brake lever. Do not pick up a cup from the cup A dual cup holder is located on the rear holder or put a cup in the holder seat center table. while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident.

The cup holder rear partition can be removed and placed on the front partition. This space can be used to store small items. Interior equipment 6-9

Bottle holders trim can be used to hold beverage bottles Accessory power outlets and other items.

CAUTION . Do not pick up a bottle from the bottle holder or put a bottle in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident. . When placing a beverage in a door pocket, make sure it is capped. Otherwise, the beverage could spill when opening/closing the door or while driving and, if the beverage is hot, it could scald Power outlet below the climate controls you.

Power outlet in the center console The door pocket equipped on each door

– CONTINUED – 6-10 Interior equipment

ances connected to two outlets simultaneously, the total power con- neously, the total power consumed by sumed by them must not ex- them must not exceed 120W.) ceed 120W.) Overloading the accessory CAUTION power outlet can cause a short . Do not attempt to use a cigarette circuit. Do not use dual adapters lighter in the accessory power or more than one electrical appli- outlets. ance. . . Do not place any foreign objects, If the plug on your electric appli- especially metal ones such as ance is either too loose or too coins or aluminum foil, into the tight for the accessory power accessory power outlet. That outlet, this can result in a poor Power outlet in the cargo area could cause a short circuit. Al- contact or cause the plug to get ways put the cap on the acces- stuck. Only use plugs that fit Accessory power outlets are provided properly. below the climate controls, in the center sory power outlet when it is not . console and in the cargo area. Electrical in use. Use of an electric appliance in the power (12V DC) from the battery is . Use only electrical appliances accessory power outlet for a long available at any of the outlets when the which are designed for 12V DC. period of time while the engine is ignition switch is in either the “Acc” or “ON” not running can cause battery The maximum power rating of an discharge. position. appliance that can be connected . Youcanuseanin-vehicleelectrical varies among outlets as shown in Before driving your vehicle, make appliance by connecting it to an outlet. the following list. Do not use an sure that the plug and the cord The maximum power rating of an appli- appliance which exceeds the in- on your electrical appliance will ance that can be connected varies among dicated wattage for each outlet. not interfere with your shifting gears and operating the accel- outlets as shown in the following list. Do – Outlet below the climate con- not use an appliance which exceeds the erator and brake pedals. If they trols: 80W or less do, do not use the electrical indicated wattage for each outlet. – . Outlets in the center console appliance while driving. Outlet below the climate controls: 80W and cargo area: 120W or less or less (When using appliances con- . Outlets in the center console and cargo nected to two outlets simulta- area: 120W or less (When using appli- Interior equipment 6-11

& Use with a cigarette lighter circuit and overheating, resulting Ashtray (if equipped) (dealer option) in a fire. To use the accessory power outlet as a . If the socket is ever used for a cigarette lighter socket, purchase the plug-in accessory such as a cell CAUTION phone, that may damage the cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional Do not use ashtrays as waste re- portion of the socket’s internal accessory. ceptacles or leave a lighted cigarette mechanism that causes a cigar- A cigarette lighter plug is available from in an ashtray. This could cause a ette lighter plug to “pop out” your SUBARU dealer. fire. after its lighter element is heated. The cigarette lighter operates only when Therefore, do not place a cigar- the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” ette lighter plug in a socket that position. has been used, even once, to To use the cigarette lighter, push in the power a plug-in accessory. Doing knob and wait a few moments. It will so may cause the plug to stick automatically spring up when ready for and overheat, creating a potential use. fire hazard. WARNING To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter by the end with the heating element. Doing so could result in injury and could also damage the heating element. A portable ashtray is available from your SUBARU dealer. CAUTION When using the ashtray, open the ashtray lid. Fully close the lid after using it to help . Do not hold the lighter pushed in, reduce residual smoke. because it will overheat. NOTE . Do not use a non-genuine cigarette lighter plug in the socket. Particles of ash and tobacco will accu- Doing so may cause a short- mulate around the hinges of the ash-

– CONTINUED – 6-12 Interior equipment tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a Floor mat Shopping bag hook toothbrush or another narrow-ended implement. A retaining pin is located on the driver’s side floor. CAUTION The floor mat is secured using the built-in Do not hang items on the shopping grommets, by placing the grommets over bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or the pins and pushing them downward. more.

CAUTION A shopping bag hook is attached to each Make sure the driver’s floor mat is side of the cargo area. placed back in its proper location and correctly secured on its retaining pins. Also, do not use more than one floor mat. If the floor mat slips forward and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it could cause an accident. Interior equipment 6-13

Coat hook Cargo area cover (dealer option)

The cargo area cover is provided for covering the cargo area and to protect its contents from direct sunlight. This cover is detachable to make room for additional cargo. & Using the cover

Install the front cover behind the rear seatback. A coat hook is attached to each side of the cargo area. WARNING CAUTION Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive Never hang anything on the coat weight on the extended cover can hook that might obstruct the driver’s break it and an object on the cover view or that could cause injury in could tumble forward in the event of sudden stops or in a collision. Do no a sudden stop or collision. This hang items on the coat hook that To extend the cover, pull the end of the could cause serious injury. weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or more. cover out of the housing, then insert its hooks into the catches as shown. To rewind it, unhook it from the catches and CAUTION it will rewind automatically. You should . Be careful not to scratch the rear hold on to the cover and guide it back into gate stays while extending and the cover housing while it is rewinding. rewinding the cover. Scratches on the stays could cause leakage

– CONTINUED – 6-14 Interior equipment

of gas from the stays, which may & To remove the cover & To install the cover housing result in their inability to hold the 1. Rewind the cover. rear gate open. . If the vehicle is equipped with a reclining rear seatback feature, when reclining the rear seatback, move the front cover backward so that the cover is not damaged.

1. Remove the cover of the retainers by 2. Push the switch that is next to the right pryingontheedgewithaflat-head end of the cover housing. screwdriver. 3. Take it off the retainer.

2. Insert the projections located on the Interior equipment 6-15 both ends of the sleeve into the recesses Cargo tie-down hooks CAUTION of the retainers. The cargo tie-down hooks are designed only for securing light cargo. Never try to secure cargo that exceeds the capacity of the hooks. The maximum load capacity is 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.

The cargo area is equipped with four tie- down hooks so that cargo can be secured with a cargo net or ropes. When using the tie-down hooks, turn them down out of the storing recesses. When not in use, put the hooks up into the storing recesses. 6-16 Interior equipment

Under-floor storage compart- . Do not store spray cans, contain- ment (if equipped) ers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compartment.

The storage compartment is located under the floor of the cargo area, and it can be used to store small items. To open the lid, pull the tab up. CAUTION . Always keep the lids closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an accident. Starting and operating

Fuel ...... 7-3 Maximum speeds...... 7-20 Fuel requirements ...... 7-3 Driving tips...... 7-21 Fuel filler lid and cap...... 7-4 SPORT mode...... 7-21 State emission testing (U.S. only)...... 7-7 Shift lock release ...... 7-22 Preparing to drive ...... 7-8 Power steering...... 7-23 Starting the engine...... 7-8 Braking ...... 7-23 Manual transmission model ...... 7-8 Braking tips...... 7-23 Automatic transmission model ...... 7-9 Brake system ...... 7-23 Stopping the engine...... 7-10 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ...... 7-24 Remote engine start system ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)...... 7-24 (dealer option) ...... 7-11 ABS system self-check ...... 7-25 Starting your vehicle ...... 7-11 ABS warning light...... 7-25 Remote start safety features...... 7-11 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) 7 Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote system ...... 7-26 start...... 7-12 Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions ...... 7-26 Entering the vehicle following remote engine start Vehicle Dynamics Control system...... 7-27 shutdown...... 7-12 Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor...... 7-29 Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ...... 7-31 vehicle...... 7-12 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Service mode ...... 7-12 (U.S.-spec. models)...... 7-32 Remote transmitter programming and programmable feature option...... 7-12 Parking your vehicle ...... 7-33 System maintenance ...... 7-13 Parking brake ...... 7-33 Manual transmission...... 7-15 Parking tips ...... 7-33 Hill start assist system (MT vehicles) ...... 7-35 Shifting speeds ...... 7-15 Driving tips ...... 7-16 Hill start assist warning light...... 7-36 Automatic transmission...... 7-16 Cruise control ...... 7-36 Selector lever...... 7-17 To set cruise control ...... 7-36 Selector lever reverse inhibiting function ...... 7-18 To temporarily cancel the cruise control...... 7-37 Selection of manual mode ...... 7-19 To turn off the cruise control...... 7-38 To change the cruising speed ...... 7-38 Starting and operating

Cruise control indicator light ...... 7-39 Cruise control set indicator light ...... 7-39 Starting and operating 7-3

Fuel than 91 AKI) is used, knocking, re- emission performance with gasoline that duced output and poor accelerator meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali- response will result. fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in any other state than California, your CAUTION ! Fuel octane rating vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting Use of a fuel which is low in quality This octane rating is the average of the Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out- or use of an inappropriate fuel Research Octane and Motor Octane side California is permitted to have higher additive may cause engine damage. numbers and is commonly referred to as sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor- the Anti Knock Index (AKI). mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter & Using a gasoline with a lower octane and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or Fuel requirements rating can cause persistent and heavy smell. SUBARU recommends that you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline ! Non-turbo models knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle having lower sulfur to determine if the The 2.5-liter non-turbo engine is designed sometimes knocks lightly when you drive problem is fuel related before returning to operate using unleaded gasoline with up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact your vehicle to an authorized dealer for an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher. your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with service. ! Turbo models the specified octane rating and your ! MMT vehicle knocks heavily or persistently. The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to Some gasoline contains an octane-en- operate using premium unleaded gaso- ! Unleaded gasoline hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- line with an octane rating of 91 AKI or The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler you use such fuels, your emission control not available, regular unleaded gasoline nozzle. Under no circumstances should system performance may deteriorate and with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher leaded gasoline be used because it will the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- may be temporarily used. For optimum damage the emission control system and function indicator lamp may turn on. If this engine performance and driveability, it is may impair driveability and fuel economy. happens, return to your authorized required that you use premium grade SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is ! Gasoline for California-certified unleaded gasoline. determined that the condition is caused LEV NOTE by the type of fuel used, repairs may not If your vehicle was certified to California’s be covered by your warranty. Be sure to use premium unleaded low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as gasoline of 91 AKI or higher for turbo indicated on the underhood tune-up label, engine models. If other gasoline (lower it is designed to optimize engine and

– CONTINUED – 7-4 Starting and operating

! Gasoline for cleaner air been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- fuel may damage the paint, be sure Your use of gasoline with detergent sions. to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel additives will help prevent deposits from As additional guidance, only use fuels is not covered under the SUBARU forming in your engine and fuel system. suited for your vehicle as explained in the Limited Warranty. This helps keep your engine in tune and following description. your emission control system working . Fuel should be unleaded and have an properly, and is a way of doing your part octane rating no lower than that specified & Fuel filler lid and cap for cleaner air. If you continuously use a in this manual. high quality fuel with the proper detergent . Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is ! Refueling and other additives, you should never sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. need to add any fuel system cleaning Only one person should be involved in Methanol can be used in your vehicle agents to your fuel tank. refueling. Do not allow others to approach ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler Many gasolines are now blended with mixture AND if it is accompanied by pipe while refueling is in progress. materials called oxygenates. Use of these sufficient quantities of the proper cosol- Be sure to observe any other precautions fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. vents and corrosion inhibitors required to that are posted at the service station. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not (Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in under these conditions. your vehicle, but should contain no more . If undesirable driveability problems are than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the experienced and you suspect they may be proper operation of your SUBARU. fuel related, try a different brand of gasoline before seeking service at your In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer. now producing reformulated gasolines, . which are designed to reduce vehicle Fuel system damage or driveability emissions. SUBARU approves the use of problems which result from the use of reformulated gasoline. improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty. If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service station CAUTION operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because Starting and operating 7-5

. When opening the cap, grasp it firmly and turn it slowly to the left. Do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck, especially in hot weather. If you hear a hissing sound while you are removing the cap, wait for the sound to stop and then slowly open the cap to prevent fuel from spraying out and creating a fire hazard.

1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid 1) Open release lever up. The lever is on the floor 2) Close ’ at the left of the driver s seat. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it slowly counterclockwise. WARNING Before opening the fuel filler cap, WARNING first touch the vehicle body or a . Gasoline vapor is highly flam- metal portion of the fuel pump or mable. Before refueling, always similar object to discharge any first stop the engine and close all static electricity that may be present vehicle doors and windows. on your body. If your body is carry- Make sure that there are no ing an electrostatic charge, there is lighted cigarettes, open flames a possibility that an electric spark or electrical sparks in the adja- 3. Hook the cord that is attached to the could ignite the fuel, which could cent area. Only handle fuel out- fuel filler cap onto the hook inside the fuel burn you. To avoid acquiring a new doors. Quickly wipe up any filler lid. static electric charge, do not get spilled fuel. back into the vehicle while refueling is in progress.

– CONTINUED – 7-6 Starting and operating

WARNING NOTE spilled fuel is not covered under . You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel the SUBARU Limited Warranty. . When refueling, insert the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler . Always use a genuine SUBARU nozzle securely into the fuel filler door (lid) is located on the right side of fuel filler cap. If you use the pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not the vehicle. wrong cap, it may not fit or have fully inserted, its automatic stop- . If the fuel filler cap is not tightened proper venting and your fuel tank ping mechanism may not func- until it clicks or if the tether is caught and emission control system tion, causing fuel to overflow the under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE may be damaged. It could also tank and creating a fire hazard. warning light/malfunction indicator lead to fuel spillage and a fire. lamp may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK . Stop refueling when the auto- . Immediately put fuel in the tank ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in- matic stop mechanism on the whenever the low fuel warning dicator lamp” F3-12. fuel nozzle activates. If you con- light illuminates. Engine misfires tinue to add fuel, temperature as a result of an empty tank changes or other conditions CAUTION could cause damage to the en- may cause fuel to overflow from . gine. the tank and create a fire hazard. Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler cleaning agent may cause da- pump automatically stops. Do not add any mage to the fuel system. more fuel. . After refueling, turn the cap to the 5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise right until it clicks to ensure that until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain it is fully tightened. If the cap is not to catch the tether under the cap while not securely tightened, fuel may tightening. leak out while the vehicle is being 6. Close the fuel filler lid completely. driven or fuel spillage could occur in the event of an accident, If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, creating a fire hazard. rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the painted surface could be damaged. . Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by Starting and operating 7-7

State emission testing (U.S. test. CAUTION only) The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel Resultant vehicle damage due to At state inspection time, remember to dynamometers in their emission testing improper testing is not covered tell your inspection or service station in programs have EXEMPTED SUBARU under the SUBARU Limited War- advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the ranty and is the responsibility of AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam- testing program that involves a two-wheel the state inspection program or its ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis- dynamometer. contractors or licensees. sion damage will result. There are some states that use four-wheel The EPA has issued regulations for Some states have started using dynam- dynamometers in their testing programs. inspecting the On-Board Diagnostic ometers in their state inspection programs When properly used, that equipment will (OBD) system as part of the state emis- in order to meet their obligation under not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle. sions inspection. The OBD system is federal law to implement stricter vehicle designed to detect engine and transmis- emission standards to reduce air pollution Under no circumstances should the rear sion problems that might cause vehicle from vehicles. A dynamometer is a tread- wheels be jacked off the ground, nor emissions to exceed allowable limits. mill or roller-like testing device that allows should the driveshaft be disconnected for These inspections apply to all 1996 model your vehicle’s wheels to turn while the state emission testing. year and newer passenger cars and light vehicle remains in one place. Depending trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of on the severity of a state’s air pollution WARNING Columbia have implemented the OBD problems, the states must adopt either a Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle system inspection. “basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission must NEVER be performed on a . The inspection of the OBD system inspection test. Normally, a portion of the single two-wheel dynamometer. At- consists of a visual operational check of basic emission test consists of an emis- tempting to do so will result in the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal- sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe uncontrolled vehicle movement and function indicator lamp (MIL) and an into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle may cause an accident or injuries to examination of the OBD system with an for a short period of time. States with more persons nearby. electronic scan tool while the engine is severe air pollution problems are required running. to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission . Avehiclepasses the OBD system test. This test simulates actual driving inspection if proper illumination of the conditions on a dynamometer and permits “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is more accurate measurement of tailpipe observed, there are no stored diagnostic emitted pollution than the basic emission – CONTINUED – 7-8 Starting and operating trouble codes, and the OBD system Preparing to drive Starting the engine readiness monitors are complete. . A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the You should perform the following checks “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is and adjustments every day before you CAUTION not properly operating or there are one or start driving. Do not operate the starter motor more diagnostic trouble codes stored in 1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and continuously for more than 10 sec- the vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK lights are clean and unobstructed. ” onds. If the engine fails to start after ENGINE warning light/MIL illuminated. 2. Check the appearance and condition . A state emission inspection may reject operating the starter for 5 to 10 of the tires. Also check tires for proper seconds, wait for 10 seconds or (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of inflation. “ more before trying again. OBD system readiness monitors Not 3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of ” Ready is greater than one. Under this leaks. condition, the vehicle operator should be 4. Check that the hood and rear gate are & Manual transmission model instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few fully closed. days to set the monitors and return for an 1. Apply the parking brake. 5. Check the adjustment of the seat. emission re-inspection. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- . Owners of rejected or failing vehicles 6. Check the adjustment of the inside cessories. and outside mirrors. should contact their SUBARU Dealer for 3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and service. 7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the passengers have fastened their seatbelts. clutch pedal to the floor while starting the 8. Check the operation of the warning engine. and indicator lights when the ignition The starter motor will only operate when “ ” switch is turned to the ON position. the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the 9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn- floor. ing lights after starting the engine. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and check the operation of the NOTE warning and indicator lights. Refer to Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, “Warning and indicator lights” F3-9. washer fluid and other fluid levels 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” should be checked daily, weekly or at position without depressing the accelera- fuel stops. tor pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started. Starting and operating 7-9

If the engine does not start, try the engine warms up. position and check the operation of the following. warning and indicator lights. Refer to (1) Turn the ignition switch to the NOTE “Warning and indicator lights” F3-9. “OFF” position and wait for at least “ ” . The engine may be difficult to start 5. Turn the ignition switch to the START 10 seconds. After checking that the when the battery has been discon- position without depressing the accelera- parking brake is firmly set, turn the nected and reconnected (for mainte- tor pedal. Release the key immediately ignition switch to the “START” position nance or other purposes). This diffi- after the engine has started. while depressing the accelerator pedal culty is caused by the electronically slightly (approximately a quarter of the If the engine does not start, try the controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis full stroke). Release the accelerator following. function. To overcome it, keep the pedal as soon as the engine starts. (1) Turn the ignition switch to the ignition switch in the “ON” position “OFF” position and wait for at least (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn for approximately 10 seconds before the ignition switch back to the “OFF” 10 seconds. After checking that the starting the engine. parking brake is firmly set, turn the position and wait for at least 10 . For non-turbo models, to protect the “ ” seconds. Then fully depress the accel- ignition switch to the START position engine while the shift lever is in the while depressing the accelerator pedal erator pedal and turn the ignition neutral position, the engine is con- switch to the “START” position. If the slightly (approximately a quarter of the trolled so that the engine speed may full stroke). Release the accelerator engine starts, quickly release the not become too high even if the accel- accelerator pedal. pedal as soon as the engine starts. erator pedal is depressed hard. (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn “ ” the ignition switch again to the “OFF” & the ignition switch back to the OFF Automatic transmission position and wait for at least 10 position. After waiting for 10 seconds model or longer, turn the ignition switch to the seconds. Then fully depress the accel- “ ” 1. Apply the parking brake. erator pedal and turn the ignition START position without depressing “ ” the accelerator pedal. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- switch to the START position. If the (4) If the engine still refuses to start, cessories. engine starts, quickly release the contact your nearest SUBARU dealer 3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N” accelerator pedal. for assistance. position (preferably “P” position). (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the “OFF” 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator The starter motor will only operate when position. After waiting for 10 seconds lights have gone off after the engine has the selector lever is at the “P” or “N” or longer, turn the ignition switch to the started. The fuel injection system auto- position. “START” position without depressing matically lowers the idle speed as the “ ” 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON the accelerator pedal. – CONTINUED – 7-10 Starting and operating

(4) If the engine still refuses to start, for approximately 10 seconds before Stopping the engine contact your nearest SUBARU dealer starting the engine. for assistance. . For non-turbo models, to protect the The ignition switch should be turned off 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator engine while the selector lever is in the only when the vehicle is stopped and the lights have gone out after the engine has “P” or “N” position, the engine is engine is idling. started. The fuel injection system auto- controlled so that the engine speed matically lowers the idle speed as the may not become too high even if the WARNING engine warms up. accelerator pedal is depressed hard. Do not stop the engine when the While the engine is warming up, make vehicle is moving. This will cause sure that the selector lever is at the “P” or loss of power to the power steering “N” position and that the parking brake is and the brake booster, making steer- applied. ing and braking more difficult. It could also result in accidental acti- CAUTION vation of the “LOCK” position on the ignition switch, causing the steering If you restart the engine while the wheel to lock. vehicle is moving, shift the selector lever into the “N” position. Do not attempt to place the selector lever of a moving vehicle into the “P” position.

NOTE . The engine may be difficult to start when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This diffi- culty is caused by the electronically controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the “ON” position Starting and operating 7-11

Remote engine start system an additional four times. If the vehicle fails (dealer option) to start after the additional attempts, the remote engine start system will abort and return to a non-activated state. WARNING & Remote start safety features . Do not remote start a vehicle in For safety and security reasons, the an enclosed environment (e.g., in system will fail to start and beep the horn a closed garage). Prolonged op- twice or shut down the engine during eration of a motor vehicle in an remote start operation if any of the enclosed environment can cause following conditions occur. a harmful build-up of Carbon . The brake pedal is pressed before the Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is vehicle ignition switch is turned “on”. harmful to your health. Exposure . to high levels of Carbon Monox- & Starting your vehicle The key was already in the ignition ide can cause headaches, dizzi- switch. The remote control start system is acti- . ness or in extreme cases uncon- “ ” The engine hood is opened. vated by pressing the button twice . ’ sciousness and/or death. within 3 seconds on your remote control The vehicle s engine idle speed has . Before performing any servicing transmitter. The system will check certain reached a level over 3,000 rpm. . of the vehicle, temporarily place pre-conditions before starting, and if all The alarm is triggered by opening a the remote engine start system in safety parameters are correct, the engine door or the rear gate. service mode to prevent the will start within 5 seconds. While the NOTE system from unexpectedly start- vehicle is operating via remote engine . ing the engine. start, the vehicle’s power window features The security indicator light on the will be disabled. Also, the system has a dashboard will stop flashing while timer and will shut down after 15 minutes if under remote engine start operation, you do not operate the vehicle. Press and but the vehicle is still protected. . hold the “ ” button for 2 seconds again to If the vehicle is entered during turn the vehicle off. If the vehicle’s starter remote engine start operation, the cranks but does not start or starts and system will not record entry in the stalls, the remote engine start system will alarm history. power off then attempt to start the vehicle

– CONTINUED – 7-12 Starting and operating

& Entering the vehicle while it transmitter within a few seconds immedi- start. is running via remote start ately following remote engine start shut- ! To disengage the service mode down. 1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the Turntheignitionswitchtothe“ON” keyless entry system. If the vehicle’s & Pre-heating or pre-cooling position, depress and hold the brake doors are unlocked manually using the pedal, then press and release the “ ” key, the vehicle’s alarm system will trigger the interior of the vehicle button on the remote control transmitter and the remote engine start system will Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- three times. The system will pause for 1 turn off. Inserting the key into the ignition perature controls to the desired setting second and flash the turn signal lights 1 switch and turning it to the “ON” position or and operation. After the system starts the time indicating that the system has exited pressing the unlock button “ ” on the vehicle, the heater or air-conditioning will service mode. remote keyless entry transmitter will dis- activate and heat or cool the interior to arm the alarm system. Refer to “Alarm your setting. NOTE system” F2-14. When taking your vehicle in for service, 2. Enter the vehicle. Do not depress the & Service mode it is recommended that you inform the brake pedal. In service mode, the remote start function service personnel that your vehicle is 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch is temporarily disabled to prevent the equipped with a remote control start and turn to the “ON” position. If the ignition system from unexpectedly starting the system. switch is accidentally turned to the engine while being serviced. “ ” ’ “ & START position, the system s starter ! To engage the service mode Remote transmitter program- anti-grind” feature will prevent the starter “ ” ming and programmable fea- from re-cranking. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, depress and hold the brake ture option 4. Depress the brake pedal. The remote “ ” New transmitters can be programmed to starter disengages, the vehicle’s power pedal, then press and release the button on the remote control transmitter the engine starter system in the event that window features are re-enabled and the remote transmitters are lost, stolen or vehicle will operate normally. three times. The system will pause for 1 second and then flash the turn signal damaged. The remote engine start system & lights and honk the horn three times also has one programmable feature that Entering the vehicle follow- indicating that the system is in service can be adjusted for user preference. ing remote engine start shut- mode. When attempting to activate the The remote engine starter system can be down remote start system while in service programmed to either make an audible An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is mode, the turn signal lights will flash and horn chirp upon remote start activation or opened by the remote keyless entry the horn will honk two times and will not not. Remote transmitter programming and Starting and operating 7-13 feature programming can be adjusted Pressing the brake pedal repeatedly will tery. using the following procedure. toggle the feature ON or OFF each time. . Batteries should not be exposed 1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s 7. To exit the remote transmitter and to excessive heat such as sun- door must remain opened throughout the feature programming mode, turn the igni- shine, fire or the like. entire process). tion switch to the “LOCK” position, remove 2. Insert the key into the vehicle’s ignition the key from the ignition switch and test The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model switch and turn to the “ON” position. operation of the remote transmitter(s) and CR-1220) supplied in your remote control 3. Locate the small black programming horn confirmation feature. should last approximately 3 years, de- button behind the fuse box cover, on the pending on usage. When the batteries driver’s side left under the dashboard & System maintenance begin to weaken, you will notice a panel. ! decrease in range (distance from the Changing the remote control bat- vehicle that your remote control operates). 4. Press and hold the black programming teries button for 10 to 15 seconds. The horn will Follow the instructions below to change honk and the turn signal lights will flash the remote control batteries. three times to indicate that the system has CAUTION entered programming mode. At this point . Do not let dust, oil or water get on you can proceed to either step 5 or step 6. or in the remote engine start 5. To program a remote transmitter: transmitter when replacing the press and release the “ ” button on each battery. transmitter. The horn will honk and the . Be careful not to damage the turn signal lights will flash one time to printed circuit board in the re- indicate a successful transmitter learn “ ” mote engine start transmitter each time the button is pressed. You when replacing the battery. can program up to eight transmitters. . 6. To toggle the Horn Confirmation chirps Be careful not to allow children to ON/OFF: press and release the brake to touch the battery and any re- toggle the feature. The horn will chirp and moved parts; children could the turn signal lights will flash one time to swallow them. indicate Confirmation Horn Chirps are . There is a danger of explosion if “OFF”. The horn will honk and the turn an incorrect replacement battery signal lights will flash 2 times to indicate is used. Replace only with the Confirmation Horn Chirps are “ON”. same or equivalent type of bat- – CONTINUED – 7-14 Starting and operating

device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party respon- sible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

1. Carefully pry the remote control halves 2. Remove the circuit board from the apart using a small flat-head screwdriver. bottom half of the case and slide the white plastic battery holder out from under the battery tab releasing the batteries. Re- move the old batteries and replace with new ones. Be sure to observe the (+) sign on the old batteries before removing them to ensure that the new batteries are inserted properly (battery “+” should be pointed away from the transmitter circuit board on both batteries). 3. Carefully snap the case halves back together, then test the remote control.

NOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This Starting and operating 7-15

Manual transmission WARNING & Shifting speeds ! Do not drive the vehicle with the Recommended shifting speeds clutch disengaged (i.e., when the The best compromise between fuel econ- clutch pedal is depressed) or with omy and vehicle performance during the shift lever in the neutral position. normal driving is ensured by shifting up Engine braking has no effect in at the speeds listed in the following table. either of these conditions and the risk of an accident is consequently Shift up mph (km/h) increased. 1st to 2nd 15 (24) 2nd to 3rd 25 (40) CAUTION 3rd to 4th 40 (64) 4th to 5th 45 (72) Shift into reverse ONLY when the The manual transmission is a fully syn- vehicle has completely stopped. It ! may cause damage to the transmis- Maximum allowable speeds chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re- The following tables show the maximum verse-speed transmission. sion to try shifting into reverse when the vehicle is moving. speeds that are possible with each differ- The shift pattern is shown on the shift ent gear. lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to reverse gear, first return the shift lever to Never exceed the speed limit listed in the the neutral position then shift into reverse following table for each gear position gear. except for brief acceleration in an emergency. The tachometer’s needle will enter To change gears, fully depress the clutch the red area if these speeds are ex- pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually ceeded. Failure to observe this precaution let up on the clutch pedal. can lead to excessive engine wear and If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the poor fuel economy. transmission in neutral, release the clutch mph (km/h) pedal momentarily, and then try again. 1st 30 (49) 2nd 52 (83) 3rd 73 (118) – CONTINUED – 7-16 Starting and operating

Never exceed the posted speed limit. speed due to slow traffic, turning corners, Automatic transmission or driving up steep hills, downshift to a WARNING lower gear before the engine starts to The automatic transmission is electroni- labor. cally controlled and provides 4 forward When shifting down a gear, ensure speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a that the vehicle is not travelling at a On steep downgrades, downshift the manual mode and a SPORT mode. speed exceeding the Maximum Al- transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as lowable Speed for the gear which is necessary; this helps to maintain a safe WARNING about to be selected. Failure to speed and to extend brake pad life. observe this precaution can lead to In this way, the engine provides a braking Do not shift from the “P” or “N” engine over-revving and this in turn effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use) position into the “D” or “R” position can result in engine damage. the brakes while descending a hill, they while depressing the accelerator In addition, sudden application of may overheat and not work properly. pedal. This may cause the vehicle engine brakes when the vehicle is The engine may, on rare occasions, knock to jump forward or backward. travelling on a slippery surface can when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or lead to wheel locking; as a conse- rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This CAUTION quence, control of the vehicle may phenomenon is not an indication of a be lost and the risk of an accident problem in your vehicle. . “ ” “ ” increased. Shift into the P or R position only after the vehicle is completely stopped. Shifting while the & vehicle is moving may cause Driving tips damage to the transmission. Do not drive with your foot resting on the . Do not race the engine for more clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to than 5 seconds in any position hold your vehicle at a standstill on an except the “N” or “P” position upgrade. Either of those actions may when the brake is set or when cause clutch damage. chocks are used in the wheels. Do not drive with your hand resting on the This may cause the automatic shift lever. This may cause wear on the transmission fluid to overheat. transmission components. . Avoid shifting from one of the When it is necessary to reduce vehicle forward driving positions into the Starting and operating 7-17

“R” position or vice versa until allow the transmission to shift at the chanically locked to prevent the vehicle the vehicle has completely most appropriate times for the current from rolling freely. stopped. Such shifting may condition of your vehicle. Optimized When you park the vehicle, first set the cause damage to the transmis- shifting will be restored as the vehicle parking brake fully, then shift into the “P” sion. continues to be driven for a while. position. Do not hold the vehicle with only . When parking the vehicle, first the transmission. securely apply the parking brake & Selector lever and then place the selector lever To shift the selector lever from the “P” to in the “P” position. Avoid parking any other position, you should depress the for a long time with the selector brake pedal fully then move the selector lever in any other position as lever. This prevents the vehicle from doing so could result in a dead lurching when it is started. battery. ! R (Reverse) This position is for backing the vehicle. NOTE To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop . When the engine coolant tempera- the vehicle completely then move the ture is still low, the automatic transmis- lever to the “R” position. sion will upshift to higher engine When the ignition switch has been turned speeds than when the coolant tempera- to the “LOCK” position, movement of the ture is sufficiently high in order to : Shift possible with brake pedal de- selector lever from the “N” position to the shorten the warm-up time and improve pressed “R” position is possible for a limited time driveability. The gearshift timing will : Shift possible with brake pedal not period by depressing the brake pedal, and automatically shift to the normal timing depressed then it becomes impossible. For details, after the engine has warmed up. “ The selector lever has four positions, “P”, refer to Selector lever reverse inhibiting . Immediately after ATF (automatic ” F “R”, “N”, “D” and also has manual gate for function 7-18. transmission fluid) is replaced, you using “SPORT” mode or manual mode. ! may feel that the automatic transmis- N (Neutral) sion operation is somewhat unusual. ! P (Park) This position is for restarting a stalled This results from invalidation of data This position is for parking the vehicle and engine. which the on-board computer has starting the engine. In this position the wheels and transmis- collected and stored in memory to In this position, the transmission is me- sion are not locked. In this position, the – CONTINUED – 7-18 Starting and operating transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll you require. ! While going down a hill freely, even on the slightest incline unless When you are descending a hill or any the parking brake or foot brake is on. When more acceleration is required in this position, depress the accelerator pedal other slope while braking with the Avoid coasting with the transmission in fully to the floor and hold that position. The “SPORT” mode selected, the transmission neutral. transmission will automatically downshift may downshift to 3rd or 2nd gear depend- During coasting, there is no engine brak- to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release ing on how hard you depress the brake ing effect. the pedal, the transmission will return to pedal, causing engine braking to work. NOTE the original gear position. Reacceleration for a short time will cause To use the “SPORT” mode, move the lever the transmission to upshift normally. If the selector lever is in the “N” from this position into the manual gate. To position when you stop the engine for NOTE use the manual mode, move the lever parking, you may not subsequently be . from this position into the manual gate A 4th-to-3rd automatic downshift able to move it to the “R” and “P” then move it toward the “+” and “−” ends. will not occur at speeds above 50 positions. If this happens, turn the mph (80 km/h) and a 3rd-to-2nd auto- ignition switch to the “ON” position. ! While climbing a grade matic downshift will not occur at Youwillthenbeabletomovethe speeds above 24 mph (38 km/h). “ ” When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to selector lever to the P position. 4th gear is prevented from taking place . Automatic downshifts to 3rd or 2nd when the accelerator is released. This may occur even when driving on a level WARNING minimizes the chance of subsequent road depending on conditions, such as downshifting to a lower gear when accel- how hard you depress the brake pedal. Do not drive the vehicle with the erating again. This prevents repeated “ ” selector lever in the N (neutral) upshifting and downshifting resulting in a & Selector lever reverse inhi- position. Engine braking has no smoother operation of the vehicle. effect in this condition and the risk biting function of an accident is consequently in- NOTE This function prevents accidental move- creased. The transmission may downshift to 2nd ment of the selector lever to the “R” or 1st gear, depending on the way the position while the vehicle is moving. ! D (Drive) accelerator pedal is pressed to accel- The function becomes operational when This position is for normal driving. erate the vehicle again. the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once opera- The transmission automatically shifts into tional, it prevents the selector lever from a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to being moved from the “N” position to the the vehicle speed and the acceleration Starting and operating 7-19

“R” position. When the vehicle speed ! Selector lever release button & Selection of manual mode drops below 5 mph (8 km/h), the function is canceled. The selector lever can then be moved to the “R” and “P” positions. When the ignition switch has been turned to the “LOCK” position, movement of the selector lever from the “N” position to the “R” position is possible for a limited time period by depressing the brake pedal and then becomes impossible. Also, the selector lever cannot be moved to the “R” position after it has been placed in the “P” position and then placed again in the “N” position. When the movement of the selector lever If you inadvertently have turned the igni- With the vehicle either moving or station- from the “N” position to the “R” position tion switch to the “LOCK” position with the ary, move the selector lever from the “D” has become impossible, turn the ignition selector lever in the “N” position, proceed position to the manual gate then move it to switch back to the “ON” position then as follows. By referring to “Shift lock the “+” end or “−” end of the manual gate move the selector lever to the “P” position. release” F7-22, remove the shift lock to select manual mode. Pressing the selector lever release button release cover. Then, with a screwdriver also makes it possible to move the inserted into the hole, move the selector selector lever to the “P” position at this lever to the “P” position. If the selector time. lever reverse inhibiting function fails, have the vehicle inspected by the nearest SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED – 7-20 Starting and operating

Gear shifts can be performed by using the shift is not possible. selector lever. . If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low, the transmission will not respond. . You can perform a skip-shift (for example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating the selector lever twice in rapid succession. . The transmission automatically selects 1st gear when the vehicle stops moving. . If the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid becomes too high, 1) Upshift indicator the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light will 2) Downshift indicator illuminate and upshifts to 4th gear will 3) Gear position indicator Using the selector lever not be possible. Immediately stop the When manual mode is selected, the gear Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly vehicle in a safe place and let the position indicator and upshift indicator pushing the selector lever toward the “+” engine idle until the warning light turns and/or downshift indicator on the combi- end of the manual gate. off. nation meter illuminate. The gear position Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly indicator shows the currently selected pulling the selector lever toward the “−” & Maximum speeds gear in the 1st-to-4th-gear range. The end of the manual gate. upshift and downshift indicators show WARNING when a gear shift is possible. When the NOTE upshift indicator “ ” is illuminated, up- Please read the following points care- When down shifting, ensure that the shifting is possible. When the downshift fully and bear them in mind when using vehicle is not travelling at a speed indicator “ ” is illuminated, downshifting the manual mode. exceeding the Maximum Allowable is possible. When both indicators are . If you attempt to shift down when Speed for the gear which is about to illuminated, upshifting and downshifting the engine speed is too high, i.e., when be selected. Failure to observe this are both possible. When the vehicle stops a downshift would push the tachometer precaution can lead to engine over- (for example, at traffic signals), the down- needle beyond the red zone, beeps will revving and this in turn can result in shift indicator turns off. be emitted to warn you that the down- engine damage. Starting and operating 7-21

In addition, sudden application of Turbo models position on an uphill grade by using the engine braking caused by down mph (km/h) “D” position. Use the brake instead. shifting when the vehicle is travel- Gear position Manual mode . The engine may, on rare occasions, ling on a slippery surface can lead 1 36 (58) knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler- to wheel locking; as a consequence, ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. control of the vehicle may be lost 2 66 (106) This phenomenon does not indicate a and the risk of an accident in- 3 107 (172) problem. creased. NOTE & SPORT mode The following tables show the maximum In order to prevent over-revving during speeds that are possible with each differ- deceleration of the vehicle, the trans- ent gear. mission will remain in the current gear if the speed of the vehicle is in excess When down shifting, it is important to of the Maximum Allowable Speed for confirm that the current vehicle speed is the gear to which the selector lever has not in excess of the Maximum Allowable been moved. Speed of the gear which is about to be selected. & Driving tips Non-turbo models . mph (km/h) On a road surface where there is a risk of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or Gear position Manual mode gravel-covered road), you can pull away 1 30 (48) from a standstill (safely and easily) by first 2 63 (101) selecting the 2nd gear of the manual SPORT mode is used when power is mode. needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill 3 99 (160) . Always apply the foot or parking brake driving. To select this mode, move the when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or selector lever from the “D” position to the “R” position. manual gate. . Always set the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmission. . Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

– CONTINUED – 7-22 Starting and operating

& Shift lock release If the selector lever does not move from the “P” position with the brake pedal depressed and the ignition switch in the “ON” position, perform the following steps. To override the shift lock: 1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine. 2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.

When selected, the SPORT mode indica- 4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole. tor light on the combination meter will turn 5. Push down on the screwdriver and on. move the selector lever from the “P” to the To deselect SPORT mode, move the “N” position. “ ” selector lever to the D position or select 6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole. manual mode. Depress the brake pedal and start the To subsequently reselect SPORT mode, engine. move the selector lever to the “D” position and from there to the manual gate. Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU In this mode, the transmission shifts up at dealer immediately to have the system higher vehicle speeds and shifts down repaired. more responsively than in normal mode. 3. Remove the cover by prying on the edge with a flat-head screwdriver. Starting and operating 7-23

Power steering Braking a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually The power steering system operates only & Braking tips reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the when the engine is running. road to a safe place. If you lose power steering assist because WARNING the engine stops or the system fails to & Brake system Never rest your foot on the brake function, you can steer but it will take ! Two separate circuits much more effort. pedal while driving. This can cause dangerous overheating of the Your vehicle has two separate circuit CAUTION brakes and needless wear on the brake systems. Each circuit works diag- brake pads and linings. onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of Do not hold the steering wheel at the the brake system should fail, the other half fully locked position left or right for ! When the brakes get wet of the system still works. If one circuit fails, more than 5 seconds. This may the brake pedal will go down much closer damage the power steering pump. When driving in rain or after washing the to the floor than usual and you will need to vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a press it down much harder. And a much result, brake stopping distance will be longer distance will be needed to stop the NOTE longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle vehicle. Right after the engine has been started at a safe speed while lightly depressing ! Brake booster and before it has warmed up, you may the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. hear a noise coming from areas adja- ! Use of engine braking The brake booster uses engine manifold cent to the power steering pump which vacuum to assist braking force. Do not Remember to make use of engine braking turn off the engine while driving because is located at the right-front area of the in addition to foot braking. When descend- engine compartment. This noise is that will turn off the brake booster, resulting a grade, if only the foot brake is used, ing in poor braking power. normal. It does not indicate power the brakes may start working improperly steering system trouble. The brakes will continue to work even because of brake fluid overheating, when the brake booster completely stops caused by overheated brake pads. To functioning. If this happens, however, you help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to will have to push the pedal much harder get stronger engine braking. than normal and the braking distance will ! Braking when a tire is punctured increase. Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire is punctured. This could cause – CONTINUED – 7-24 Starting and operating

! Brake assist system cate any malfunctions, and the brake ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- assist system is operating properly. tem) WARNING . You might feel that the brake pedal is applied by lighter force and gener- The ABS system prevents the lock-up of Do not be overconfident about the ates a greater braking force. wheels which may occur during sudden brake assist. It is not a system that . You might hear clicking (knocking) braking or braking on slippery road sur- brings more braking ability to the sounds around brake pedal. faces. This helps prevent the loss of vehicle beyond its braking capabil- steering control and directional stability ity. Always use the utmost care & caused by wheel lock-up. when driving regarding vehicle Disc brake pad wear warning speed and safe distance. indicators When the ABS system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal CAUTION when the ABS operates. When you need to brake suddenly, The ABS system will not operate when the continue depressing the brake pedal vehicle speed is below approximately 6 strongly to bring the effect of the mph (10 km/h). brake assist. WARNING Brake assist is a driver assistance system. Always use the utmost care in It assists the brake power when the driver – cannot depress the brake pedal strongly driving overconfidence because and the brake power is insufficient. you are driving with an ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead Brake assist generates the brake power The disc brake pad wear warning indica- to a serious accident. according to the speed at which the driver tors on the disc brakes give a warning depresses the brake pedal. noise when the brake pads are worn. NOTE If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard CAUTION from the disc brakes while braking, im- When you depress the brake pedal . The ABS system does not always mediately have your vehicle checked by strongly or suddenly, the following decrease stopping distance. You your SUBARU dealer. phenomena occur. However, even should always maintain a safe though these occur, they do not indi- following distance from other Starting and operating 7-25

vehicles. & ABS warning light CAUTION . When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or If the warning light behaves as over deep newly fallen snow, described below, the ABS system stopping distances may be long- may not be working properly. er for a vehicle with the ABS When the warning light is on, the system than one without. When ABS function shuts down; however, driving under these conditions, the conventional brake system con- therefore, reduce your speed and tinues to operate normally. leave ample distance from other . The warning light does not illu- vehicles. minate when the ignition switch . When you feel the ABS system is turned to the “ON” position. operating, you should maintain . The warning light illuminates constant brake pedal pressure. when the ignition switch is Do not pump the brake pedal The ABS warning light illuminates when turned to the “ON” position, but “ ” since doing so may defeat the the ignition switch is turned to the ON it does not turn off even when the operation of the ABS system. position and turns off after approximately 2 vehicle speed exceeds approxi- seconds. mately 8 mph (12 km/h). This is an indication that the ABS system . The warning light illuminates dur- & ABS system self-check is working properly. ing driving. Just after the vehicle is started, you may When driving with an insufficient battery feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar voltage such as when the engine is jump If these occur, have the ABS system to when the ABS operates, and you may started, the ABS warning light may illumi- repaired at the first available oppor- also hear the sound of the ABS working nate. This is due to the low battery voltage tunity by your SUBARU dealer. from the engine compartment. This is and does not indicate a malfunction. caused by an automatic functional test of When the battery becomes fully charged, the ABS system being carried out and the light will turn off. does not indicate any abnormal condition.

– CONTINUED – 7-26 Starting and operating

NOTE Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system If the warning light behavior is as tribution (EBD) system malfunctions described below, the ABS system may be considered normal. The EBD system maximizes the effective- . The warning light illuminates right ness of the brakes by allowing the rear after the engine is started but turns off brakes to supply a greater proportion of immediately, remaining off. the braking force. It functions by adjusting . The warning light remains on after the distribution of braking force to the rear the engine has been started, but it wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s turns off when the vehicle speed loading condition and speed. reaches approximately 8 mph (12 km/h). The EBD system is an integral part of the . The warning light illuminates during ABS system and uses some of the ABS ’ driving, but it turns off immediately and system s components to perform its func- remains off. tion of optimizing the distribution of braking force. If any of the ABS components used by the EBD system malfunction, the If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, EBD system also stops working. the system stops working and the brake system warning light and ABS warning When the EBD system is operating, you light illuminate simultaneously. may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal The EBD system may be malfunctioning if and does not indicate a malfunction. the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminate simultaneously during driving. Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the conventional braking system will still function. However, the rear wheels will be more prone to locking when the brakes are applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s motion may therefore become somewhat harder to control. If the brake system warning light and ABS Starting and operating 7-27 warning light illuminate simultaneously, gerous. This indicates your brake Vehicle Dynamics Control take the following steps. system may not be working system 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, properly. If the light remains on, flat location. have the brakes inspected by a 2. Shut down the engine, apply the SUBARU dealer immediately. WARNING parking brake, and then restart it. . If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating prop- Always use the utmost care in 3. Release the parking brake. If both – warning lights turn off, the EBD system erly, do not drive the vehicle. driving overconfidence because may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to Have your vehicle towed to the you are driving with a Vehicle Dy- the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the nearest SUBARU dealer for re- namics Control system equipped system inspected. pair. vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident. 4. If both warning lights illuminate again and stay illuminated after the engine has been restarted, shut down the engine CAUTION again, apply the parking brake, and check the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid” . Even if your vehicle is equipped F11-25. with Vehicle Dynamics Control 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the system, winter tires should be “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be used when driving on snow-cov- malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the ered or icy roads; in addition, nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle speed should be reduced system inspected. considerably. Simply having a 6. If the brake fluid level is below the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- “MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. tem does not guarantee that the Instead, have the vehicle towed to the vehicle will be able to avoid nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. accidents in any situation. . Activation of the Vehicle Dy- WARNING namics Control system is an indication that the road being . Driving with the brake system travelled on has a slippery sur- warning light illuminated is dan- face; since having Vehicle Dy- namics Control is no guarantee – CONTINUED – 7-28 Starting and operating

that full vehicle control will be spare tire, the effectiveness of NOTE maintained at all times and under the Vehicle Dynamics Control . Slight twitching of the brake pedal all conditions, its activation system is reduced and this may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics should be seen as a sign that should be taken into account Control system operates; a small de- the speed of the vehicle should when driving the vehicle in gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak- be reduced considerably. such a condition. ing may also be noticed in this situa- . Whenever suspension compo- tion. These are normal characteristics nents, steering components, or In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation an axle are removed from a on a slippery road surface and/or during and are no cause for alarm. vehicle equipped with Vehicle cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, . When driving off immediately after Dynamics Control system, have the Vehicle Dynamics Control system starting the engine, a short-lived opera- ’ an inspection of that system adjusts the engine s output and the tion noise may be noticed coming from ’ performedbyanauthorized wheels respective braking forces to help the engine compartment. This noise is SUBARU dealer. maintain traction and directional control. generated as a result of a check being . performed on the Vehicle Dynamics . The following precautions should Traction Control Function Control system and is normal. be observed in order to ensure The traction control function is designed to . Depending on the timing of activa- that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- prevent spinning of the driving wheels on tion of the brakes, the brake pedal may trol system is operating properly: slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to seem to jolt when you drive off after – maintain traction and directional control. All four wheels should be Activation of this function is shown by starting the engine. This is a conse- fitted with tires of the same steady illumination of the Vehicle Dy- quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con- size, type, and brand. Further- namics Control operation indicator light. trol operational check and is normal. more, the amount of wear . In the circumstances listed in the should be the same for all . Skid Suppression Function following, the vehicle may be more four tires. The skid suppression function is designed unstable than it feels to the driver. – Keep the tire pressure at the to help maintain directional stability by The Vehicle Dynamics Control System proper level as shown on the suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide may therefore operate. Such operation vehicle placard attached to sideways during steering operations. Acti- does not indicate a system fault. the driver’s side door pillar. vation of this function is shown by flashing – on gravel-covered or rutted – Use only the specified tem- of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation roads porary spare tire to replace a indicator light. – on unfinished roads flat tire. With a temporary – when the vehicle is fitted with Starting and operating 7-29

snow tires or winter tires & Vehicle Dynamics Control when the ignition switch is turned to the . Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics system monitor ON position. Control system will cause operation of . The indicator light does not turn off the steering wheel to feel slightly ! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- approximately 2 seconds after the ignition different compared to that for normal tion indicator light switch has been turned to the ON position. conditions. ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning . Even if the vehicle is equipped with light/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it indicator light is important that winter tires be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads. (All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size and brand.) . It is always important to reduce speed when approaching a corner, even if the vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control. . All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand; furthermore, the amount of wear The indicator light illuminates when the should be the same for all four tires. If ignition switch is turned to the ON position; these precautions are not observed it turns off approximately 2 seconds later. and non-matching tires are used, it is This indicator light flashes during activa- quite possible that the Vehicle Dy- tion of the skid suppression function and is This single light has the function of namics Control system will be unable illuminated steadily during activation of the indicating malfunctions in the Vehicle to operate correctly as intended. traction control function. Dynamics Control system and the function of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics . The following two situations could indicate Always turn off the engine before Control system is not operating. It illumi- a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics replacing a tire as failure to do so may nates in the event of a malfunction in the Control system; if either should occur, render the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and is illuminated whenever the have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry system unable to operate correctly. system is not operating. out an inspection of that system at the first available opportunity. . The indicator light does not illuminate – CONTINUED – 7-30 Starting and operating

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning ABS, whenever the ABS stops operating ! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in- light due to a malfunction in that electrical dicator light system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will The warning light illuminates when the This light illuminates to indicate that the also become unable to control all four ignition switch is turned to the “ON” Vehicle Dynamics Control system is in brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control position and turns off several seconds non-operation mode. This does not con- system operation halts and the warning after engine startup. This lighting pattern stitute failure of the Vehicle Dynamics light turns on. Although both the Vehicle indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- Control system. Dynamics Control system and the ABS trol system is operating normally. will be inoperable in this situation, it will NOTE The following situations could indicate a still be possible to stop the vehicle using . The indicator light may remain on malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics for a while after the engine has been Control system; if any should occur, have Control system and the ABS do not started, especially in cold weather. This an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out adversely affect operation of the vehicle occurs because the engine has not yet an inspection of the system at the first in any way when they are inoperable; warmed up and is completely normal. available opportunity. however should such a situation occur, The light will turn off when the engine . The warning light does not turn on drive with care and have an authorized has reached a suitable operating tem- when the ignition switch is turned to the SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of perature. ON position. those systems at the first available oppor- . When an engine problem occurs . The warning light turns on while the tunity. and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ vehicle is being driven. NOTE malfunction indicator lamp turns on, . When a malfunction has occurred in the indicator light will also illuminate. When the warning light turns on and off the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical in the following way, it indicates that The following two situations could indicate system, only the warning light will turn on. the Vehicle Dynamics Control system malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics In such an event, the ABS will still be is operating normally. Control system; if either should occur, operating normally. . Although turning on after the engine have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry . The warning light will also turn on when has been started, the warning light out an inspection of that system at the first a problem occurs with the ABS or Vehicle quickly turns off and stays off. available opportunity. Dynamics Control electronic control sys- . The warning light turns on when the . The indicator light does not turn on tems. vehicle is being driven; it then turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control and stays off. ON position. . system controls each brake through the The indicator light fails to turn off after the engine is started, even when several Starting and operating 7-31 minutes have passed to allow the engine like a model not equipped with the Vehicle trol system, the vehicle’s running per- to heat up sufficiently. Dynamics Control system. When the formance is comparable with that of a switch is pressed again to reactivate the vehicle that does not have a Vehicle & Vehicle Dynamics Control Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the “ ” Dynamics Control system. Do not de- OFF switch indicator light turns off. activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system system except when absolutely neces- deactivated, traction and stability en- sary. hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics Control system is unavailable. Therefore you should not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except under above-mentioned situations. NOTE . When the switch has been pressed to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system automatically reacti- vates itself the next time the ignition Pressingtheswitchtodeactivatethe switch is turned to the “LOCK” position Vehicle Dynamics Control system can and the engine is restarted. facilitate the following operations: . If the switch is held down for 10 . a standing start on a steeply sloping seconds or longer, the indicator light road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control otherwise slippery surface system is activated, and the system . extrication of the vehicle when its ignores any further pressing of the wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow switch. To make the switch usable again, turn the ignition switch to the When the switch is pressed during engine “LOCK” position and restart the en- operation, the “ ” indicator light on the gine. combination meter illuminates. The Vehi- . When the switch is pressed to cle Dynamics Control system will be deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- deactivated and the vehicle will behave 7-32 Starting and operating

Tire pressure monitoring WARNING low pressure threshold, the low tire system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. pressure warning light should turn models) If the low tire pressure warning light off a few minutes later. illuminates while driving, never If this light still illuminates while brake suddenly and keep driving driving after adjusting the tire pres- straight ahead while gradually redu- sure, a tire may have significant cing speed. Then slowly pull off the damage and a fast leak that causes road to a safe place. Otherwise an the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have accident involving serious vehicle a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire damage and serious personal injury as soon as possible. could occur. When a spare tire is mounted or a Check the pressure for all four tires wheel rim is replaced without the and adjust the pressure to the COLD original pressure sensor/transmitter tire pressure shown on the tire being transferred, the low tire pres- placard on the door pillar on the sure warning light will illuminate driver’s side. steadily after blinking for approxi- Even when the vehicle is driven a mately 1 minute. This indicates the The tire pressure monitoring system pro- very short distance, the tires get TPMS is unable to monitor all four vides the driver with a warning message warm and their pressures increase road wheels. Contact your SUBARU by sending a signal from a sensor that is accordingly. Be sure to let the tires dealer as soon as possible for tire installed in each wheel when tire pressure cool thoroughly before adjusting and sensor replacement and/or sys- is severely low. their pressures to the standard tem resetting. The tire pressure monitoring system will values shown on the tire placard. Do not inject any tire liquid or activate only when the vehicle is driven at Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-31. aerosol tire sealant into the tires, speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, The tire pressure monitoring system as this may cause a malfunction of this system may not react immediately to a does not function when the vehicle the tire pressure sensors. If the light sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, is stationary. After adjusting the tire illuminates steadily after blinking for a blow-out caused by running over a pressures, increase the vehicle approximately 1 minute, promptly sharp object). speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) contact a SUBARU dealer to have to start the TPMS re-checking of the the system inspected. tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe Starting and operating 7-33

CAUTION Parking your vehicle CAUTION Do not place metal film or any metal & Parking brake Never drive while the parking brake parts in the cargo room/trunk. This To set the parking brake, depress the is set because this will cause un- may cause poor reception of the brake pedal firmly and hold it down until necessary wear on the brake lin- signals from the tire pressure sen- the parking brake lever is fully pulled up. ings. Before starting to drive, always sors, and the tire pressure monitor- make sure that the parking brake ing system will not function prop- has been fully released. erly. & Parking tips NOTE When parking your vehicle, always set the This device complies with Part 15 of parking brake firmly and put the shift lever the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of in the “1” (1st) for an upgrade or “R” Industry Canada. Operation is subject (Reverse) for a downgrade for manual to the following two conditions: (1) This transmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park) device may not cause harmful inter- position for automatic transmission vehi- ference, and (2) this device must cles. Always set the parking brake firmly accept any interference received, in- when parking your vehicle. Never rely on cluding interference that may cause the transmission alone to hold the vehicle. undesired operation. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the release button, then Changes or modifications not ex- lower the lever while keeping the button pressly approved by the party respon- pressed. sible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equip- When the parking brake is set while the ment. engine is running, the parking brake warning light illuminates. After starting the vehicle, be sure that the warning light has gone out before the vehicle is driven. Refer to “Brake system warning light” F3- 17.

– CONTINUED – 7-34 Starting and operating

WARNING CAUTION . Never leave unattended children If your vehicle has a front under- or pets in the vehicle. They could spoiler and rear underspoiler (both accidentally injure themselves or optional), pay attention to blocks others through inadvertent op- and other obstructions on the eration of the vehicle. Also, on ground when parking. The under- hot or sunny days, the tempera- spoilers could be damaged by con- ture in a closed vehicle could tact with them. quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people. . Do not park the vehicle over When parking on a hill, always turn the flammable materials such as dry steering wheel. When the vehicle is grass, waste paper or rags, as headed up the hill, the front wheels should they may burn easily if they come be turned away from the curb. near hot engine or exhaust system parts. . Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.

When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the curb. Starting and operating 7-35

Hill start assist system (MT vehicles)

CAUTION The Hill start assist system is a device only for helping the driver to START the vehicle on an uphill grade. To prevent accidents when the vehicle is parked on a slope, be sure to firmly set the parking brake. When setting the parking brake, make sure that the vehicle remains On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedal The Hill start assist system does not stationary when the clutch pedal is is depressed while the brake pedal is also operate when the vehicle is facing down- released. depressed, braking power is maintained hill. And the Hill start assist system may temporarily by the Hill start assist system not operate on slight grades. The Hill start assist system is a device to when the brake pedal is released. The make starting on an uphill grade easier. driver is therefore able to start the vehicle When starting in reverse and using the Hill the same way as on a level grade, just start assist system, a braking effect may using the clutch and accelerator pedal. be felt even after the brake pedal has been released. However, this braking effect should disappear once the clutch pedal is released. A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle begins to move forward after being reversed. If the braking power of the Hill start assist system is insufficient after the brake pedal is released, apply more braking power by pressing the brake pedal again.

– CONTINUED – 7-36 Starting and operating

& Hill start assist warning light Cruise control & To set cruise control

Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant vehicle speed without holding your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is operative when the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the main switch is turned “OFF” when the cruise control is not in use to avoid unintentionally setting the cruise control. NOTE If you press the main switch button while turning the ignition switch “ON”, the cruise control function is deacti- When the ignition switch is turned to the 1. Push the “CRUISE” main switch but- “ ” vated and the “CRUISE” indicator light ON position, the Hill start assist warning ton. light illuminates and turns off after approxi- flashes. To reactivate the cruise control mately 2 seconds. While the engine is function, turn the ignition switch back to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and rotating, if any malfunction is detected in “ ” the Hill start assist system control, the then turn it again to the ON position. warning light will illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, have the vehicle in- WARNING spected by your SUBARU dealer. Do not use the cruise control under any of the following conditions. This may cause loss of vehicle control: . driving up or down a steep grade . driving on slippery or winding roads . driving in heavy traffic The “ ” indicator light on the combination meter will illuminate. Starting and operating 7-37

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the combination meter will illuminate. only). vehicle reaches the desired speed. The vehicle will maintain the desired . Shift the selector lever into the “N” speed. position (AT models only). . Shift the shift lever into neutral position Vehicle speed can be temporarily in- (MT models only). creased while driving with the cruise “ ” control activated. Simply depress the The indicator light on the combina- accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- tion meter turns off when the cruise control cle. When the accelerator pedal is re- is canceled. leased, the vehicle will return to and maintain the previous cruising speed. & To temporarily cancel the cruise control The cruise control can be temporarily canceled in the following ways: 3. Push the “SET/COAST” button and release it. Then release the accelerator pedal.

To resume the cruise control after it has been temporarily canceled and with vehicle speed of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h) or more, push the “RES/ACC” button to return to the original cruising speed automatically. The “ ” indicator light on the combina- . Push the “CANCEL” button. tion meter will automatically illuminate at . Depress the brake pedal. this time. At this time, the “ ” indicator light on the . Depress the clutch pedal (MT models – CONTINUED – 7-38 Starting and operating

& To turn off the cruise control When the difference between the actual ! To decrease the speed (by button) There are two ways to turn off the cruise vehicle speed and the set speed is less control: than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can . “ ” be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time Push the CRUISE main switch button by pressing the “RES/ACC” button quickly. again. ! . Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or To increase the speed (by accel- “LOCK” position (but only when the erator pedal) vehicle is completely stopped). 1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle to the desired & To change the cruising speed speed. “ ” ! 2. Push the SET/COAST button once. To increase the speed (by button) Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal. Push the “SET/COAST” button and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired NOTE speed. Then, release the button. The If the difference between the actual vehicle speed at that moment will be vehiclespeedwhenthebuttonis memorized and treated as the new set pushed and the speed last time you speed. set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph When the difference between the actual (1.6 km/h). This occurs because the vehicle speed and the set speed is less cruise control system unit regards this than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can operation as that intended to decrease be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “SET/COAST” button quickly. Push the “RES/ACC” button and hold it the vehicle speed. until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then, release the button. The vehicle speed at that moment will be memorized and treated as the new set speed. Starting and operating 7-39

! To decrease the speed (by brake NOTE & Cruise control set indicator pedal) . If you press the “CRUISE” main light switch button while turning the ignition 1. Depress the brake pedal to release “ ” cruise control temporarily. switch ON , the cruise control function is deactivated and the cruise 2. When the speed decreases to the “ ” control indicator light flashes. To re- desired speed, press the SET/COAST activate the cruise control function, button once. Now the desired speed is set turn the ignition switch back to the and the vehicle will keep running at that “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then speed without depressing the accelerator turn it again to the “ON” position. pedal. . If this indicator light and the CHECK & ENGINE warning light/malfunction in- Cruise control indicator light dicator lamp flash simultaneously during driving, have the vehicle checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer. The cruise control set indicator light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and turns off after approximately 3 seconds. The light illuminates when vehicle speed has been set.

The cruise control indicator light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position and turns off after approximately 3 seconds. The light illuminates when the “CRUISE” main switch is pressed. ————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————

———————————————————————————————————————— Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving – the first Loading your vehicle...... 8-11 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ...... 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight...... 8-12 Fuel economy hints ...... 8-2 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)...... 8-2 and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ...... 8-13 Catalytic converter ...... 8-3 Roof rail (if equipped) ...... 8-13 Periodic inspections ...... 8-4 Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped)...... 8-14 Trailer hitch (dealer option)...... 8-15 Driving in foreign countries ...... 8-4 Connecting a trailer ...... 8-16 Driving tips for AWD models...... 8-5 When you do not tow a trailer ...... 8-17 On-pavement and off-road driving...... 8-6 Trailer towing ...... 8-17 Winter driving...... 8-8 Warranties and maintenance ...... 8-17 Operation during cold weather...... 8-8 Maximum load limits...... 8-18 Driving on snowy and icy roads ...... 8-9 Trailer hitches...... 8-21 Corrosion protection ...... 8-10 Connecting a trailer ...... 8-21 Snow tires ...... 8-10 Trailer towing tips ...... 8-23 Tire chains...... 8-11 8 Rocking the vehicle...... 8-11 8-2 Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 monoxide) The following suggestions will help to save km) fuel. . The performance and long life of your Select the proper gear position for the WARNING vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas. and care for your vehicle while it is new. . Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- Engine exhaust gas contains Follow these instructions during the first tion. Always accelerate gently until you carbon monoxide, a colorless 1,000 miles (1,600 km): reach the desired speed. Then try to and odorless gas which is dan- . Do not race the engine. And do not maintain that speed for as long as possible. gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm . except in an emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent . Do not drive at one constant engine or racing the engine. engine exhaust gas from enter- vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or . Avoid unnecessary engine idling. ing the vehicle. slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned. . . Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct Never run the engine in a closed acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive . Avoid hard braking, except in an is located under the door latch on the the vehicle in or out of it. emergency. driver’s side. Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption. . Avoid remaining in a parked The same break-in procedures should be . Use the air conditioner only when vehicle for a lengthy time while applied to an overhauled engine, newly necessary. the engine is running. If that is mounted engine or when brake pads or . Keep the front and rear wheels in unavoidable, then use the venti- brake linings are replaced with new ones. proper alignment. lation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle. . Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo. . Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly. . If at any time you suspect that Driving tips 8-3

exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust vehicle, have the problem gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust. checked and corrected as soon To avoid damage to the catalytic conver- as possible. If you must drive ter: under these conditions, drive . only with all windows fully open. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small amount of leaded fuel will damage the . Keep the rear gate closed while catalytic converter. driving to prevent exhaust gas . Never start the engine by pushing or from entering the vehicle. pulling the vehicle. . Avoid racing the engine. NOTE . Never turn off the ignition switch while Due to the expansion and contraction the vehicle is moving. of the metals used in the manufacture . Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel of the exhaust system, you may hear a the engine running rough (misfiring, back- crackling sound coming from the ex- Turbo models firing or incomplete combustion), have haust system for a short time after the your vehicle checked and repaired by an engine has been shut off. This sound is authorized SUBARU dealer. normal. . Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treatment to the heat shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust system. . Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level. WARNING . Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere Non-turbo models near flammable materials (e.g., grass, paper, rags or leaves), The catalytic converter is installed in the because the catalytic converter exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to – CONTINUED – 8-4 Driving tips

operates at very high tempera- Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries tures. . Keep everyone and flammable To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in materials away from the exhaust at all times, always have the recom- another country: pipe while the engine is running. mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct The exhaust gas is very hot. the maintenance schedule in the “War- fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3. ” ranty and Maintenance Booklet per- . Comply with all regulations and re- formed at the specified time or mileage quirements of each country. intervals. Driving tips 8-5

Driving tips for AWD models . An AWD model is better able to climb . There are some precautions that you steeper roads under snowy or slippery must observe when towing your vehicle. conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. For detail information, refer to “Towing” There is little difference in handling, F9-12. however, during extremely sharp turns or sudden braking. Therefore, when driving WARNING down a slope or turning corners, be sure . to reduce your speed and maintain an Always maintain a safe driving ample distance from other vehicles. speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to . When replacing a tire, make sure you avoid having an accident on a use only the same size, construction, sharp turn, during sudden brak- brand, and load range as the original tires ing or under other similar condi- listed on the tire placard. Using other tions. sizes, circumference or construction may result in severe mechanical damage to the . Always use the utmost care in – All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine drive train of your vehicle and may affect driving overconfidence be- power to all four wheels. AWD models ride, handling, braking, speedometer/od- cause you are driving an All- provide better traction when driving on ometer calibration, and clearance be- Wheel Drive model could easily slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and tween the body and tires. It also may be lead to a serious accident. when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle By shifting power between the front and control. rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also . If you use a temporary spare tire to provide added traction during acceleration replace a flat tire, be sure to use the and added engine braking force during original temporary spare tire stored in the deceleration. vehicle. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive Therefore, your SUBARU AWD model train of your vehicle. may handle differently than an ordinary . two wheel drive vehicle and it contains Always check the cold tire pressure some features unique to AWD. For safety before starting to drive. The recom- purposes as well as to avoid damaging mended tire pressure is provided on the tire placard, which is located under the the AWD system, you should keep the ’ following tips in mind: door latch on the driver s side. 8-6 Driving tips

On-pavement and off-road with its higher profile and center SUBARU off-road, certain common sense driving of gravity, is more likely to be precautions such as those in the following affected by crosswinds than or- list should be taken. dinary passenger cars. . Make certain that you and all of your WARNING . Always use the utmost care in passengers are wearing seatbelts. driving – overconfidence be- . Carry some emergency equipment, . In a rollover crash, an unbelted cause you are driving an All- such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, person is significantly more Wheel Drive model could easily wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or likely to die than a person wear- lead to a serious accident. citizens band radio. ing a seat belt. You the driver and . Drive carefully. Do not take unneces- all your passengers should fas- Your vehicle is classified as a utility sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or ten the seatbelts before starting vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher over rough terrain. to drive in order to minimize the ground clearance which enables them to . Slow down and employ extra caution at chance of serious injury or death. be used for wide applications including off- all times. When driving off-road, you will . Do not make sharp turns and road driving. But please keep in mind that not have the benefit of marked traffic quick maneuvers unless abso- your vehicle is neither a conventional off- lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and lutely unavoidable. Such actions road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A the like. are dangerous as you may lose higher center of gravity in relation to the . Do not drive across steep slopes. control, possibly resulting in a tread width as compared with ordinary Instead, drive either straight up or straight rollover which could cause death passenger cars makes vehicles of this down the slopes. A vehicle can much or serious injury. type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility more easily tip over sideways than it can . Always maintain a safe driving vehicles have a significantly higher roll- end over end. Avoid driving straight up or speed according to the road and over rate than other types of vehicles. The down slopes that are too steep. high ground clearance of this vehicle is a weather conditions in order to . Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe- real advantage, giving you a better view of avoid having an accident on a cially at higher speeds. the road and allowing you to anticipate sharp turn, during sudden brak- . Do not grip the inside or spokes of the ing or under other similar condi- problems earlier. However, remember that your utility vehicle is not designed for high- steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the tions. wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive . speed cornering comparable to ordinary Whenever strong crosswinds are passenger cars and that your vehicle with your fingers and thumbs on the present, slow down sufficiently could roll over if you make a sharp turn outside of the rim. to maintain control of your vehi- at high speed. If you do take your . If driving through water, such as when cle. Remember that your vehicle, Driving tips 8-7 crossing shallow streams, first check the underbody. Clear off any such matter from under hard-driving conditions such as depth of the water and the bottom of the the underbody. If the vehicle is used with rough roads or off roads will necessitate stream bed for firmness and ensure that these materials trapped or adhering to the more frequent replacement of engine oil, the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly underbody, a mechanical breakdown or brake fluid and transmission oil than that and completely through the stream. The fire could occur. specified in the maintenance schedule water should be shallow enough that it . Secure all cargo carried inside the described in the “Warranty and Mainte- does not reach the vehicle’s undercar- vehicle and make certain that it is not nance Booklet”. riage. Water entering the engine air intake piled higher than the seatbacks. During or the exhaust pipe or water splashing sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo Remember that damage done to your onto electrical parts may damage your could be thrown around in the vehicle and SUBARU while operating it off-road and vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on not using common sense precautions attempt to drive through rushing water; the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s such as those listed above is not eligible regardless of its depth, it can wash away center of gravity and make it more prone for warranty coverage. the ground from under your tires, resulting to tip over. in possible loss of traction and even . If you must rock the vehicle to free it vehicle rollover. from sand or mud, depress the accelerator . Always check your brakes for effec- pedal slightly and move the selector lever tiveness immediately after driving in sand, back and forth between “D” and “R” mud or water. Do this by driving slowly repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat the best possible traction, avoid spinning that process several times to dry out the the wheels when trying to free the vehicle. brake discs and brake pads. . When the road surface is extremely . Do not drive or park over or near slippery, you can obtain better traction by flammable materials such as dry grass or starting the vehicle with the transmission fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The in 2nd than 1st. exhaust system is very hot while the . Never equip your vehicle with tires engine is running and right after engine larger than those specified in this manual. stops. This could create a fire hazard. . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off- . After driving through tall grass, mud, road driving. Suspension components are rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, need to be washed thoroughly. sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the . Frequent driving of an AWD model 8-8 Driving tips

Winter driving Forcing a frozen door open may damage washer nozzles by operating the washer or separate the rubber weather strips for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if around the door. If the door is frozen, the concentration of the fluid remaining in use hot water to melt the ice, and after- the piping is too low for the outside wards thoroughly wipe the water away. temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles. Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do not use CAUTION engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may damage the paint of Adjust the washer fluid concentra- the vehicle. tion appropriately for the outside SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- temperature. If the concentration is tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- may freeze on the windshield and perature varies according to how much it obstruct your view, and the fluid & is diluted, as indicated in the following may freeze in the reservoir tank. Operation during cold table. weather ! Before driving your vehicle Carry some emergency equipment, such Washer Fluid Con- Freezing Temperature as a window scraper, a bag of sand, centration Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes because that flares, a small shovel and jumper cables. 30% 10.48F(−128C) could make the pedals slippery and Check the battery and cables. Cold 50% −48F(−208C) dangerous. temperatures reduce battery capacity. 100% −498F(−458C) The battery must be in good condition to While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelerator pedal, provide enough power for cold winter In order to prevent freezing of washer starts. brake pedal, and all other controls operate fluid, check the freezing temperatures in smoothly. Use an engine oil of proper grade and the table above when adjusting the fluid viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer concentration to the outside temperature. Clear away ice and snow that has oil will cause harder starting. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with accumulated under the fenders to avoid a different concentration from the one making steering difficult. During severe Keep the door locks from freezing by winter driving, stop when and where it is squirting them with deicer or glycerin. used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the reservoir tank and safe to do so and check under the fenders Driving tips 8-9 periodically. snow clear of the exhaust pipe and when necessary.) ! Parking in cold weather from around your vehicle if you park Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha- the vehicle in snow with the engine vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly Do not use the parking brake when running. leading to loss of vehicle control. parking for long periods in cold weather since it could freeze in that position. An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en- ! Instead, observe the following. Refueling in cold weather hances your vehicle’s braking perfor- 1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for To help prevent moisture from forming in manceonsnowyandicyroads.For manual transmission models, and in “P” the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, information on braking on slippery sur- for automatic transmission models. use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake 2. Use tire stops under the tires to tank is recommended during cold weather. System)” F7-24 and “Vehicle Dynamics prevent the vehicle from moving. Use only additives that are specifically Control system” F7-27. designed for this purpose. When an When the vehicle is parked in snow or antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts WARNING when it snows, raise the wiper blades off longer if the tank is refilled whenever the the glass to prevent damage to them. fuel level reaches half empty. Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or icy When the vehicle has been left parked If your SUBARU is not going to be used roads. This may cause loss of after use on roads heavily covered with for an extended period, it is best to have vehicle control. snow, or has been left parked during a the fuel tank filled to capacity. snowstorm, icing may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor & Driving on snowy and icy braking action. Check for snow or ice roads buildup on the suspension, disc brakes To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high- If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, speed driving, and sharp turning when being careful not to damage the disc driving on snowy or icy roads. brakes and brake hoses and ABS har- Always maintain ample distance between ness. your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking. WARNING To supplement the foot brake, use the Snow can trap dangerous exhaust engine brake effectively to control the gases under your vehicle. Keep vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear – CONTINUED – 8-10 Driving tips

CAUTION Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the & Snow tires wiper from working effectively. If snow is Avoid prolonged continuous driving stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to WARNING in snowstorms. Snow will enter the a safe place, then remove it. If you stop engine’s intake system and may the vehicle at road side, use the hazard . When replacing original tires with hinder the air flow, which could warning flasher to alert other drivers. winter (snow) tires, make sure you use only the same size, result in engine shutdown or even We recommend use of non-freezing type construction and load range as breakdown. wiper blades (winter blades) during the the original tires listed on the tire seasons you could have snow and freez- placard. Using other sizes and ! Wiper operation when snowing ing temperatures. Blades of this type give construction may affect speed- superior wiping performance in snowy Before driving in cold weather, make sure ometer/odometer calibration and conditions. Be sure to use blades that the wiper blades are not frozen to the clearance between the body and are suitable for your vehicle. windshield or rear window. If the wiper tires. It also may be dangerous blades are frozen to the windshield or rear CAUTION and lead to loss of vehicle con- window, use the defroster with the airflow trol. control dial in the “ ” position and the During high-speed driving, non- . temperature control dial set for maximum You must install four winter tires freezing type wiper blades may not warmth until the wiper blades are com- that are of the same size, con- perform as well as standard wiper pletely thawed out. If your vehicle is struction, brand, and load range. blades. If this happens, reduce the equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful Mixing other sizes or construc- vehicle speed. to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To tions may result in severe me- thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear chanical damage to the drive window defogger. train of your vehicle and may NOTE affect ride, handling, braking and When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts When the season requiring non-freez- speedometer/odometer calibra- to stick on the surface of the windshield ing type wiper blades is over, replace tion. It also may be dangerous despite wiper operation, use the defroster them with standard wiper blades. and lead to loss of vehicle con- with the airflow control dial in “ ” and the trol. temperature control dial set for maximum & Corrosion protection . Do not use a combination of warmth. After the windshield gets warmed Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4. radial, belted bias or bias tires enough to melt the frozen snow on it, since it may cause dangerous wash it away using the windshield washer. handling characteristics and lead Driving tips 8-11

to an accident. & Tire chains Loading your vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with “all season CAUTION tires” as original equipment, which are WARNING designed to provide an adequate measure Tire chains cannot be used on your of traction, handling and braking perfor- vehicle because of the lack of . Never allow passengers to ride mance in year-round driving. In winter, it clearance between the tires and on a folded rear seatback or in may be possible to enhance performance vehicle body. the cargo area. Doing so may through use of tires designed specifically result in serious injury. for winter driving conditions. . Never stack luggage or other When you choose to install winter tires on & Rocking the vehicle cargo higher than the top of the your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire If you must rock the vehicle to free it from seatback because it could tumble size and type. You must install four winter snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel- forward and injure passengers in tires that are of the same size, construc- erator pedal slightly and move the selector the event of a sudden stop or tion, brand and load range and you should lever back and forth between “D” and “R” accident. Keep luggage or cargo never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For low, as close to the floor as since this may result in dangerous hand- the best possible traction, avoid spinning possible. ling characteristics. When you choose a the wheels when trying to free the vehicle. tire, make sure that there is enough When the road surface is extremely clearance between the tire and vehicle slippery, you can obtain better traction by body. starting the vehicle with the transmission Remember to drive with care at all times in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT). regardless of the type of tires on your If your vehicle is an AT model, for vehicle. information about holding the transmission in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of manual mode” F7-19 and “Driving tips” F7-21.

– CONTINUED – 8-12 Driving tips

WARNING CAUTION . When you carry something inside Do not carry spray cans, containers the vehicle, secure it whenever with flammable or corrosive liquids you can to prevent it from being or any other dangerous items inside thrown around inside the vehicle the vehicle. during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident. NOTE . Do not pile heavy loads on the For better fuel economy, do not carry roof. These loads raise the vehi- unneeded cargo. cle’s center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over. & Vehicle capacity weight . Secure lengthy items properly to The load capacity of your vehicle is prevent them from shooting for- determined by weight, not by available ward and causing serious injury cargo space. The maximum load you can during a sudden stop. carry in your vehicle is shown on the . Never exceed the maximum load vehicle placard attached to the driver’s limit. If you do, some parts on side door pillar. It includes the total weight your vehicle can break, or it can of the driver and all passengers and their change the way your vehicle belongings, any optional equipment such handles. This could result in loss as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, of control and cause personal etc. injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. . Do not place anything on the extended cargo area cover. Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a collision. This could cause serious injury. Driving tips 8-13

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross In addition, the total weight applied to & Roof rail (if equipped) Vehicle Weight Rating and each axle (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating) GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage inside the vehicle. Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution of the luggage. When possible, the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle. If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should confirm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and 1) Roof rack GAWR by putting your vehicle on a Luggage can be carried on the roof after The certification label attached to the vehicle scale, found at a commercial securing the roof rack to the roof rail. driver’s side doorjamb shows GVWR weighing station. When installing the roof rack on the roof ’ (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR Do not use replacement tires with a lower rail, follow the manufacturer s instructions. (Gross Axle Weight Rating). load range than the originals because they The roof rail is designed to carry loads The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita- (luggage and roof rack) of not more than never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the tions. Replacement tires with a higher load 150 lbs (68 kg). combined total of weight of the vehicle, range than the originals do not increase fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage and the GVWR and GAWR limitations. CAUTION any optional equipment. Therefore, the . When using the roof rack, make GVW changes depending on the situation. sure that the total carrying load The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual of the roof rack and luggage does weight of your vehicle – including standard not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Over- equipment, fluids, emergency tools and loading may cause damage to spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle the vehicle. capacity weight. . For cargo carrying purposes, the – CONTINUED – 8-14 Driving tips

roof rail must be used together & Roof molding and crossbar the vehicle and create a safety with the roof rack and any appro- (if equipped) hazard. priate carrying attachment that may be needed. The roof rail Cargo can be carried after securing the must never be used alone to roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and carry cargo. Otherwise, damage installing the appropriate carrying attach- to the roof or paint or a danger- ment. When installing the roof crossbar ous road hazard due to loss of kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions. cargo could result. When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof crossbar kit and a carrying NOTE attachment, never exceed the maximum Remember that the vehicle’s center of load limit as explained below. You should gravity is altered with the weight of the also be careful that your vehicle does not load on the roof, thus affecting driving exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating characteristics. (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). For information Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard CAUTION about loading cargo into or onto your cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind vehicle, refer to “Loading your vehicle” effects will be increased. . For cargo carrying purposes, the F8-11. The maximum load limit of the roof molding must be used to- cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment gether with a roof crossbar kit must not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place and the appropriate carrying at- the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest tachment. Otherwise, damage to the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. the roof or paint or a dangerous Always properly secure all cargo. road hazard due to loss of cargo could result. . When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure that the total weight of the crossbars, carrying attachment and cargo does not exceed the maximum load limit. Over- loading may cause damage to Driving tips 8-15

! Installing carrying attachments on ! Removal and installation of the Trailer hitch (dealer option) the crossbars crossbars When installing any carrying attachment such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak WARNING carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross- . Never exceed the maximum bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc- weight specified for the trailer tions and make sure that the attachment is hitch. Exceeding the maximum securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only weight could cause an accident attachments designed specifically for the resulting in serious personal in- crossbars. A set of the crossbars is juries. Permissible trailer weight designed to carry loads (cargo and attach- changes depending on the situa- ment) of not more than 165 lbs (75 kg). tion. For possible recommenda- Before operating the vehicle, make sure tions and limitations, refer to that the cargo is properly secured on the “Trailer towing” F8-17. attachment. . Trailer brakes are required when Each of the two roof moldings has two NOTE the towing load exceeds 1,000 mounting points for crossbars. Each ’ lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer Remember that the vehicle s center of mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use has safety chains and that each gravity is altered with the weight of the a screwdriver to remove the covers. When chain will hold the trailer’s max- load on the roof, thus affecting the installing the crossbars on the roof mold- imum gross weight. Towing trai- driving characteristics. ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard lers without safety chains could cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind create a traffic safety hazard if effects will be increased. the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage. . Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a trailer. If the ball mount comes off the hitch receiver, the trailer could get loose and create a

– CONTINUED – 8-16 Driving tips

traffic safety hazard. does not come off the hitch receiver. . Use only the ball mount supplied with this hitch. Use the hitch only as a weight carrying hitch. Do not use with any type of weight distributing hitch. . The standard bumper beam must be installed after you remove the trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU dealer for purchase of a standard bumper beam if you do not have the original. . Safety performance is decreased 2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the and there is increased risk of hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes 1) Hitch ball installation point injury to passengers in the case through the ball mount. 2) Hooks for safety chains of an accident if the trailer hitch or a standard bumper beam is 5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate not installed. One of them must for the ball mount and your trailer. The always be installed on the vehi- hitch ball must be securely installed on the cle. ball mount. . If a trailer hitch is installed, it is 6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball. not possible to install the rear 7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with towing hook. safety chains that will hold the trailer’s maximum gross weight. The chains When you tow a trailer, refer to “Trailer should cross under the trailer tongue to towing” F8-17. prevent the tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it should disconnect from & Connecting a trailer the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight-turn situations into 1. Remove the receiver cover from the 3. Insert the safety pin securely into the account; however, be careful not to let hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball hitch pin. them drag on the ground. mount into the hitch receiver tube. 4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it Driving tips 8-17

WARNING watercraft. Trailer towing & Do not connect safety chains to part When you do not tow a trailer Your vehicle is designed and intended to of the vehicle other than the safety . Remove the ball mount from the hitch be used primarily as a passenger-carrying chain hooks. receiver tube and insert the receiver cover vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional onto the hitch receiver tube. loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, . Place the dust cap over the four-pin brakes, tires and suspension and has an connector of the hitch wire harness to adverse effect on fuel economy. protect against possible damage. If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety . Occasionally lubricate terminals of the and satisfaction depend upon proper use four-pin connector using terminal grease. of correct equipment and cautious operation of your vehicle. Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchasing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment appropriate for your vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions on correct installation and use provided by the trailer and other towing equipment manufacturers. Hitch harness connector SUBARU assumes no responsibility for 8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black injuries or vehicle damage that result from four-pin wire connector to the towing trailer towing equipment, or from any trailer’s wire harness errors or omissions in the instructions 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch accompanying such equipment or for your wire harness by individually activating the failure to follow the proper instructions. brake, stop, and turn signal lights on the trailer. & Warranties and maintenance SUBARU warranties do not apply to NOTE vehicle damage or malfunction caused Always disconnect the trailer wire har- by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to ness before launching or retrieving a tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load. – CONTINUED – 8-18 Driving tips

(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under ble. Model Conditions severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty Maximum ” total trailer and Maintenance Booklet .) ! Total trailer weight weight Under no circumstances should a trailer MT models When towing a 1,000 lbs be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle trailer without (453 kg) with any new powertrain component (en- brakes. gine, transmission, differential, wheel When towing a 2,400 lbs bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles trailer with brakes. (1,087 kg) (1,600 km) of driving. AT models When towing a 1,000 lbs trailer without (453 kg) & Maximum load limits brakes. When towing a 2,400 lbs WARNING trailer with brakes. (1,087 kg) When towing a 1,000 lbs Never exceed the maximum load trailer on a long (453 kg) limits explained in the following. uphill grade con- Exceeding the maximum load limits tinuously for over Total trailer weight 5 miles (8 km) with could cause personal injury and/or an outside tem- vehicle damage. The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus perature of 1048F its cargo load) must never exceed the (408C) or above. maximum weight shown in the following CAUTION table. . Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight. . Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load. Make sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle and trailer are accepta- Driving tips 8-19

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and ! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) (GVWR)

Certification label GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver’s side door jamb. Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight The total weight applied to each axle The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear Rating (GVWR). GAWs can be adjusted by relocating Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the passengers and luggage inside the vehi- combined total of the weight of the vehicle, cle. The front and rear GAWR are also driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, shown on the certification label. trailer tongue load and any other optional To check both GVWR and GAWR and to equipment installed on your vehicle. confirm that the total weight and weight Therefore, the GVW changes depending distribution are within safe driving limits, on the situation. Determine the GVW each you should have your vehicle and trailer time before going on a trip by putting your weighed at a commercial weighing station. vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

– CONTINUED – 8-20 Driving tips

! Tongue load

1) Jack F: Front of vehicle Tongue load 2) Bathroom scale The tongue load can be adjusted by Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from The tongue load can be weighed with a proper distribution of the load in the trailer. 8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight bathroom scale as shown in the illustration Never load the trailer with more weight in and does not exceed the maximum value above. When weighing the tongue load, the back than in the front; approximately of 200 lbs (90 kg). be sure to position the towing coupler at 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the height at which it would be during the front and approximately 40 percent in actual towing, using a jack as shown. the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as possible on both the left and right sides. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving. WARNING If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of trailer’s axle than in the front, the load is taken off Driving tips 8-21

the rear axle of the towing vehicle. hitch or other trailer towing & Connecting a trailer This may cause the rear wheels to equipment. ! Trailer brakes skid, especially during braking or . Do not use axle-mounted hitches when vehicle speed is reduced dur- as they can cause damage to the ing cornering, resulting in over- axle housing, wheel bearings, WARNING steer, spin out and/or jackknifing. wheels or tires. . Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and & Trailer hitches cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) trailer. total weight. The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer . Do not directly connect your WARNING hitch is recommended. A genuine trailer’s hydraulic brake system SUBARU hitch is available from your to the hydraulic brake system in Never drill the frame or under-body SUBARU dealer. of your vehicle to install a commer- your vehicle. Direct connection cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger- If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid- would cause the vehicle’s brake ous exhaust gas, water or mud may able, be sure the hitch is suited to your performance to deteriorate and enter the passenger compartment vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes- could lead to an accident. through the drilled hole. Exhaust sional hitch supplier to assist you in gas contains carbon monoxide, a choosing an appropriate hitch for your If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs colorless and odorless gas which is ’ dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. manufacturer s instructions for installation (453 kg), the trailer is required to be Also, drilling the frame or under- and use. equipped with its own brake system. body of your vehicle could cause Never use a hitch that mounts only to the Electric brakes or surge brakes are deterioration of strength of your rear bumper. The bumper is not designed recommended, and must be installed vehicle and cause corrosion around to handle that type of load. properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes the drilled hole. For all types of hitches, regularly check conform with Federal, state/province and/ that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are or other applicable regulations. Your tight. SUBARU’s brake system is not designed CAUTION to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU . Do not modify the vehicle ex- dealer and professional trailer supplier for haust system, brake system, or more information about the trailer’s brake other systems when installing a system. – CONTINUED – 8-22 Driving tips

! Trailer safety chains ! Side mirrors Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s electrical system requires modifica- WARNING tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its capacity and accommodate Always use safety chains between wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights your vehicle and the trailer. Towing a are connected properly, please consult trailer without safety chains could your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper create a traffic safety hazard if the operation of the brake lights and turn trailer separates from the hitch due signal lights each time you hitch up. to coupling damage or hitch ball damage. ! Tires

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch WARNING ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and Never tow a trailer when the tem- create a traffic safety hazard. After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, porary spare tire is used. The tem- For safety, always connect the towing check that the standard side mirrors porary spare tire is not designed to vehicle and trailer with trailer safety provide a good rearward field of view sustain the towing load. Use of the chains. Pass the chains crossing each without significant blind spots. If significant temporary spare tire when towing other under the trailer tongue to prevent blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan- can result in failure of the spare tire the trailer from dropping onto the ground dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that and/or less stability of the vehicle. in case the trailer tongue should discon- conform with Federal, state/province and/ nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient or other applicable regulations. Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated. slack in the chains taking tight-turn situa- ! Trailer lights tions into account; however, be careful not The recommended cold tire pressure to let them drag on the ground. CAUTION under trailer towing conditions is shown For more information about the safety in “Tires” F12-5 and in “GAS STATION chain connection, refer to the instructions Direct splicing or other improper REFERENCE” at the end of this manual. for your hitch and trailer. connection of trailer lights may Adjust the rear tire pressure to the damage your vehicle’s electrical recommended pressure when the tires system and cause a malfunction of are cold. Normal pressure should be your vehicle’s lighting system. maintained in the front tires. Driving tips 8-23

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and ! Before starting out on a trip nificant blind spot. . proper inflation pressure should be in . Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to- Sufficient time should be taken to learn ’ “ ” accordance with the trailer manufacturer s hitch mounting are in good condition. If the feel of the vehicle/trailer combination specifications. any problems are apparent, do not tow the before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping and In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire trailer. backing up. when towing a trailer, ask a commercial . Check that the vehicle sits horizontally road service to repair the flat tire. with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is ! Driving with a trailer tipped sharply up at the front and down at . You should allow for considerably more If you carry a regular size spare tire in your the rear, check the total trailer weight, stopping distance when towing a trailer. vehicle or trailer as a precaution against GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then Avoid sudden braking because it may getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare confirm that the load and its distribution result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of tire is firmly secured. are acceptable. control. . . & Trailer towing tips Check that the tire pressures are Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel- correct. erations. If your vehicle has a manual . Check that the vehicle and trailer are transmission, always start out in first gear WARNING connected properly. Confirm that and release the clutch at moderate engine – . Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) the trailer tongue is connected revolution. when towing a trailer in hilly properly to the hitch ball. . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and country on hot days. – the trailer lights connector is con- rapid lane changes. nected properly and trailer’sbrake . . When towing a trailer, steering, Slow down before turning. Make a lights illuminate when the vehicle’s stability, stopping distance and longer than normal turning radius because brake pedal is pressed, and that the braking performance will be dif- the trailer wheels will be closer than the trailer’s turn signal lights flash when ferent from normal operation. For vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper- safety’s sake, you should employ a tight turn, the trailer could hit your ated. vehicle. extra caution when towing a – trailer and you should never the safety chains are connected . Crosswinds will adversely affect the speed. You should also keep the properly. handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus- – following tips in mind: all cargo in the trailer is secured ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to safety in position. weather conditions or the passing of large – the side mirrors provide a good trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly rearward field of view without a sig- grip the steering wheel and slow down

– CONTINUED – 8-24 Driving tips

! immediately but gradually. Driving on grades mission, avoid using the accelerator pedal . . When passing other vehicles, consid- Before going down a steep hill, slow to stay stationary on an uphill slope erable distance is required because of the down and shift into lower gear (if neces- instead of using the parking brake or foot added weight and length caused by sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the brake. That may cause the transmission attaching the trailer to your vehicle. engine braking effect and prevent over- fluid to overheat. heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not . If your vehicle has an automatic trans- make sudden downshifts. mission, place the selector lever as . When driving uphill in hot weather, the follows. air conditioner may turn off automatically Uphill slopes: “D” position to protect the engine from overheating. Downhill slopes: A low-speed gear posi- . When driving uphill in hot weather, pay tion to use engine braking attention to the coolant temperature high ! warning light (for all models) and AT OIL Parking on a grade TEMP warning light (for AT models) Always block the wheels under both because the engine and transmission are vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply relatively prone to overheating under the parking brake firmly. You should not these conditions. If the coolant tempera- park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a ture high warning light or the AT OIL TEMP hill or slope cannot be avoided, you 1) Left turn warning light illuminates, immediately turn should take the following steps. 2) Right turn off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal in the nearest safe location. For further down. . Backing up with a trailer is difficult and instructions and additional information, takes practice. When backing up with a 2. Have someone place wheel blocks refer to the following sections. under both the vehicle and trailer wheels. trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly. –“ When turning back, grip the bottom of the If you park your vehicle in case of 3. When the wheel blocks are in place, an emergency” F9-2 release the regular brakes slowly until the steering wheel with one hand and turn it to –“ ” F the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right Engine overheating 9-12 blocks absorb the load. –“ for a right turn. Coolant temperature low indicator 4. Apply the regular brakes and then . light/Coolant temperature high warn- apply the parking brake; slowly release If the ABS warning light illuminates ” F while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing ing light 3-13 the regular brakes. –“ the trailer and have repairs performed AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual ” F immediately by the nearest SUBARU models) 3-14 transmission) or “P” (automatic transmis- . dealer. If your vehicle has an automatic trans- sion) and shut off the engine. In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle in case of an Engine overheating ...... 9-12 emergency ...... 9-2 If steam is coming from the engine Temporary spare tire (if equipped) ...... 9-2 compartment ...... 9-12 Precautions for AWD models with automatic If no steam is coming from the engine transmission ...... 9-3 compartment ...... 9-12 Maintenance tools ...... 9-4 Towing ...... 9-12 Tool bag...... 9-4 Towing and tie-down hooks...... 9-13 Under the cargo area...... 9-5 Using a flat-bed truck...... 9-15 Flat tires...... 9-6 Towing with all wheels on the ground...... 9-16 Changing a flat tire...... 9-6 Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) opened...... 9-17 (U.S.-spec. models) ...... 9-9 Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be Jump starting ...... 9-10 closed ...... 9-17 How to jump start...... 9-10

9 9-2 In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle in NOTE Temporary spare tire (if case of an emergency When the hazard warning flasher is on, equipped) the turn signals do not work.

WARNING When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU The hazard warning flasher should be dealer as soon as possible for tire used in day or night to warn other drivers and sensor replacement and/or sys- when you have to park your vehicle under tem resetting. emergency conditions. Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to CAUTION safely pull off the road if a problem occurs. Never use any temporary spare tire The hazard warning flasher can be acti- other than the original. Using other vated regardless of the ignition switch sizes may result in severe mechan- position. ical damage to the drive train of your Turn on the hazard warning by pushing vehicle. the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again. The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a conventional tire and is designed for emergency use only. Re- move the temporary spare tire and re- In case of emergency 9-3 install the conventional tire as soon as & Precautions for AWD models possible because the spare tire is de- with automatic transmission signed only for temporary use. Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD Check the inflation pressure of the tem- (All-Wheel Drive) system. In addition, if porary spare tire periodically to keep the your vehicle is an AT model, before driving tire ready for use. The correct pressure is your vehicle with the temporary spare tire, 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm2). deactivate the AWD capability of the vehicle as follows. When using the temporary spare tire, note 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” the following. position. . Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). . Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly. 1) Tread wear indicator bar 2) Indicator location mark . Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time. . When the wear indicator appears on . Do not drive over obstacles. This tire the tread, replace the tire. has a smaller diameter, so road clearance . The temporary spare tire must be used is reduced. only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire gets punctured, replace the wheel with a rear wheel and install the temporary spare tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

2. Pull any one spare fuse out of the spare fuse holder in the engine compartment. Spare fuses are attached on the back side of the fuse holder cover. You may pick up any one fuse in the spare fuse holder.

– CONTINUED – 9-4 In case of emergency

Maintenance tools & Tool bag

Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools: . Jack . Jack handle . Screwdriver . Towing hook (eye bolt) . Wheel nut wrench . Hex-head wrench (only vehicles with moonroof) . 1) Spare fuse Wheel cover remover (only vehicles 2) FWD connector with wheel covers) 1) Screwdriver 3. Put a spare fuse inside the FWD 2) Wheel nut wrench connector located in the cabin and confirm 3) Tool bag that the All-Wheel Drive warning light 4) Wheel cover remover (only vehicles with “ ” illuminates. The All-Wheel-Drive wheel covers) 5) Hex-head wrench (only vehicles with capability of the vehicle has now been moonroof) deactivated. The screwdriver and wheel nut wrench are NOTE stored in the tool bag. After reinstalling the conventional tire, remove the spare fuse from the FWD connector in order to reactivate All- Wheel Drive. Make sure to restore the removed spare fuse in the spare fuse holder located in the engine compartment. In case of emergency 9-5

& Under the cargo area floor. The jack and towing hook are stored in the tool bucket that is located in the recess of the spare tire wheel. Also, the tools in the tool bag can be stored in the tool bucket as illustrated. For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires” F9-6.

1) Wheel nut wrench 2) Hex-head wrench (only vehicles with 1) Under-floor storage compartment (if moonroof) “ equipped) (Refer to Under-floor storage 3) Screwdriver compartment” F6-16) 4) Jack 2) Jack handle 5) Towing hook (eye bolt) 3) Tool bucket 4) Spare tire The jack handle is stored under the cargo 9-6 In case of emergency

Flat tires . Always turn off the engine before 5. Take out the jack, jack handle and raising the flat tire off the ground wheel nut wrench. If you have a flat tire while driving, never using the jack. Never swing or The tools and the spare tire are stored brake suddenly; keep driving straight push the vehicle supported with under the floor of the cargo area. Refer to ahead while gradually reducing speed. the jack. The jack can come out “Maintenance tools” F9-4. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe of the jacking point due to a jolt place. and this can result in a severe NOTE accident. Make sure that the jack is well lubri- & Changing a flat tire cated before using it. 1. Park on a hard, level surface, when- WARNING ever possible, then stop the engine. 2. Set the parking brake securely and . Do not jack up the vehicle on an shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models) incline or a loose road surface. or the selector lever in the “P” (Park) The jack can come out of the position (AT models). jacking point or sink into the 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher ground and this can result in a and have everyone get out of the vehicle. severe accident. . Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never get under the vehicle while support- 6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the ing the vehicle with this jack. attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take the spare tire out. NOTE If the spare tire provided in your vehicle is a temporary spare tire, carefully read “Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and 4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear strictly follow the instructions. of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire. In case of emergency 9-7

8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

1) Notch 10. Insert the jack handle into the jack- 2) Valve hole screw, and turn the handle until the tire 7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert 9. Place the jack under the side sill at the clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle a wheel cover remover into the notch on front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat higher than necessary. the opposite side of the valve hole and pry tire. 11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat the wheel cover to remove it. Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack tire. head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

– CONTINUED – 9-8 In case of emergency

12. Before putting the spare tire on, clean 15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely 16. Store the flat tire in the spare tire the mounting surface of the wheel and hub tighten the wheel nuts to the specified compartment. Put in the spacer and tight- with a cloth. torque, following the tightening order in the en the attaching bolt firmly. 13. Put on the spare tire. Replace the illustration. Also store the jack, jack handle and wheel wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand. The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to nut wrench in their storage locations. 72 lbf·ft (80 to 100 N·m, 8 to 10 kgf·m). WARNING This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) WARNING Do not use oil or grease on the at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never Never place a tire or tire changing wheel studs or nuts when the spare use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a tire is installed. This could cause the tools in the passenger compartment pipe extension on the wrench because after changing wheels. In a sudden nuts to become loose and lead to an you may exceed the specified torque. accident. stop or collision, loose equipment Have the wheel nut torque checked at could strike occupants and cause the nearest automotive service facility. injury. Store the tire and all tools in 14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise the proper place. to lower the vehicle. In case of emergency 9-9

& Tire pressure monitoring brake suddenly and keep driving aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. straight ahead while gradually redu- this may cause a malfunction of the models) cing speed. Then slowly pull off the tire pressure sensors. road to a safe place. Otherwise an If the light illuminates steadily after accident involving serious vehicle blinking for approximately one min- damage and serious personal injury ute, promptly contact a SUBARU could occur. dealer to have the system inspected. Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the vehicle placard on the door pillar on the driver’s side. If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air The tire pressure monitoring system pro- rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace vides the driver with the warning message it with a spare tire as soon as indicated by sending a signal from a possible. sensor that is installed in each wheel When a spare tire is mounted or a when tire pressure is severely low. wheel rim is replaced without the The tire pressure monitoring system will original pressure sensor/transmitter activate only when the vehicle is driven. being transferred, the low tire pres- Also, this system may not react immedi- sure warning light will illuminate ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for steadily after blinking for approxi- example, a blow-out caused running over mately one minute. This indicates a sharp object). the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your WARNING SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/ If the low tire pressure warning light or system resetting. illuminates while driving, never Do not inject any tire liquid or 9-10 In case of emergency

Jump starting eye protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start objects such as rings, bands or 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 other metal jewelry. WARNING volts and the negative terminal is . Be sure the jumper cables and grounded. clamps on them do not have . Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. 2. If the booster battery is in another loose or missing insulation. Do not let it come in contact with vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch. the eyes, skin, clothing or the Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and vehicle. in suitable condition are avail- accessories. able. If battery fluid gets on you, 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in thoroughly flush the exposed . A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated. area with water immediately. Get ous. Keep your fingers, hands, medical help if the fluid has clothing, hair and tools away entered your eyes. from the cooling fan, belts and any other moving engine parts. If battery fluid is accidentally Removing rings, watches and swallowed, immediately drink a ties is advisable. large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical . Jump starting is dangerous if it help. done incorrectly. If you are un- sure about the proper procedure Keep everyone including chil- for jump starting, consult a com- dren away from the battery. petent mechanic. . The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is When your vehicle does not start due to a brought near it. Do not smoke or run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle light a match while jump starting. may be jump started by connecting your . Never attempt jump starting if the battery to another battery (called the discharged battery is frozen. It booster battery) with jumper cables. could cause the battery to burst or explode. . Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suitable In case of emergency 9-11

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the discharged battery. (2) Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery. (3) Connect one end of the other cable to the negative (−) terminal of the booster battery. (4) Connect the other end of the cable to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at moderate speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle that has the discharged battery. 6. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order. 9-12 In case of emergency

Engine overheating the engine and contact your authorized Towing dealer for repair. 3. After the engine coolant temperature If towing is necessary, it is best done by WARNING has dropped, turn off the engine. your SUBARU dealer or a commercial If the coolant temperature high warning towing service. Observe the following Never attempt to remove the radia- light illuminates, turn off the engine. procedures for safety. tor cap until the engine has been shut off and has fully cooled down. 4. After the engine has fully cooled down, When the engine is hot, the coolant check the coolant level in the reserve is under pressure. Removing the tank. “ ” cap while the engine is still hot If the coolant level is below the LOW “ ” could release a spray of boiling hot mark, add coolant up to the FULL mark. coolant, which could burn you very 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve seriously. tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the If the engine overheats, safely pull off the radiator with coolant. road and stop the vehicle in a safe place. If you remove the radiator cap from a hot & radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the If steam is coming from the radiator cap, then turn the cap counter- engine compartment clockwise slowly without pressing down Turn off the engine and get everyone until it stops. Release the pressure from WARNING away from the vehicle until it cools down. the radiator. After the pressure has been fully released, remove the cap by pressing Never tow AWD models (both AT and & If no steam is coming from down and turning it. MT) with the front wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are the engine compartment on the ground, or with the rear 1. Keep the engine running at idling wheels raised off the ground while speed. the front wheels are on the ground. 2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine This will cause the vehicle to spin compartment. away due to the operation or dete- Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If rioration of the center differential. the fan is not turning, immediately turn off In case of emergency 9-13

& Towing and tie-down hooks The towing hooks should be used only in an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle from mud, sand or snow). CAUTION . Use only the specified towing hook and tie-down hook. Never use suspension parts or other parts of the body for towing or tie-down purposes. . To prevent deformation to the front bumper and the towing 2. Pry off the cover on the front bumper 4. Tighten the towing hook securely hook, do not apply excessive using a screwdriver, and you will find a using a wheel nut wrench. lateral load to the towing hook. threaded hole for attaching the towing hook. After towing, remove the towing hook from the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. Front towing hook: Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper. 1. Take the towing hook out of the tool bucket and take the screwdriver out of the WARNING tool bag. Take the wheel nut wrench out of . the cargo area. Do not use the towing hook except when towing your vehicle. . Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing. Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehicle could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system in a frontal collision. 3. Screw the towing hook into the thread hole until its thread can no longer be seen. – CONTINUED – 9-14 In case of emergency

Rear towing hook: CAUTION If a trailer hitch is installed, it is not possible to install the rear towing hook. To install the rear towing hook, the standard bumper beam must be installed on the vehicle at a SUBARU dealer. Consult a SUBARU dealer for details. Use a hitch ball and follow the instructions below when towing. 2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper 4. Tighten the towing hook securely . The weight of the object being using a screwdriver, and you will find a using a wheel nut wrench. towed must be less than the threaded hole for attaching the towing hook. After towing, remove the towing hook from weight of the vehicle. the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. . Drive the vehicle 20 mph (32 Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper. km/h) or less speed. . Do not drive more than 31 miles WARNING (50 km). Do not use the towing hook except when towing your vehicle. 1. Take the towing hook out of the tool bucket and take the screwdriver out of the tool bag. Take the wheel nut wrench out of the cargo area.

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread hole until its thread can no longer be seen. In case of emergency 9-15

Front tie-down hooks: Rear tie-down hooks: & Using a flat-bed truck

The front tie-down hooks are located The rear tie-down hooks are located near This is the best way to transport your between each of the front tires and the each of the jack-up reinforcements. vehicle. Use the following procedures to front bumper. WARNING ensure safe transportation. 1. Shift the selector lever into the “P” Use the rear tie-down hooks only for position for automatic transmission mod- downward anchoring. If they are els or “1st” for manual transmission used to anchor the vehicle in any models. other direction, cables may slip off 2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly. the hooks, possibly causing a dan- 3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier gerous situation. properly with safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

– CONTINUED – 9-16 In case of emergency

CAUTION towed. must be limited to less than 20 4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to mph (30 km/h) and the traveling If your vehicle has a front under- prevent damage to the vehicle. distance to less than 31 miles (50 spoiler and rear underspoiler (both km). For greater speeds and optional), be careful not to scrape distances, transport your vehicle them when placing the vehicle on WARNING on a flat-bed truck. the carrier and when removing the . Never turn the ignition switch to vehicle from the carrier. the “LOCK” position while the vehicle is being towed because & Towing with all wheels on the the steering wheel and the direc- ground tion of the wheels will be locked. . Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not function when the engine is not running. Because the engine is turned off, it will take greater effort to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel.

CAUTION . If transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a flat- bed truck. 1. Check the transmission and differen- . Do not run the engine while being tial oil levels and add oil to bring it to the towed using this method. Trans- upper level if necessary. mission damage could result if 2. Release the parking brake and put the the vehicle is towed with the transmission in neutral. engine running. 3. The ignition switch should be in the . “ ” For vehicles with automatic Acc position while the vehicle is being transmission, the traveling speed In case of emergency 9-17

Rear gate – if the rear gate CAUTION Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be opened cannot be closed Never operate the rear gate lock In the event that you cannot open the rear release lever with fingers because If the moonroof cannot be closed with the gate by operating the power door locking doing so may cause an injury. Al- moonroof switch, you can close the moon- switches or the remote keyless entry ways use a screwdriver or a similar roof manually. system, you can open it from inside the tool. cargo area.

1. Remove the plug on the roof trim of the cargo area by inserting the end of the flat- 1. Remove the access cover at the 3. Turn the lever to the right position head screwdriver between the roof and bottom-center of the rear gate trim. using a screwdriver. plug and prying it off. 2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever 4. Open the rear gate from outside by behind the rear gate trim panel. holding the rear gate with your hands.

– CONTINUED – 9-18 In case of emergency

2. Insert a hex-head wrench in the end of the motor shaft. To close the moonroof, turn the wrench counterclockwise. Have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer. Appearance care

Exterior care ...... 10-2 Cleaning the interior...... 10-5 Washing...... 10-2 Seat fabric...... 10-5 Waxing and polishing ...... 10-3 Leather seat materials...... 10-5 Cleaning aluminum wheels ...... 10-3 Synthetic leather upholstery...... 10-5 Corrosion protection...... 10-4 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument Most common causes of corrosion ...... 10-4 panel, console panel, and switches ...... 10-5 To help prevent corrosion...... 10-4 Navigation monitor (if equipped) ...... 10-6

10 10-2 Appearance care

Exterior care NOTE system, fuel and brake lines, brake When having your vehicle washed in cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus- & Washing an automatic car wash, make sure pension. beforehand that the car wash is of Thoroughly flush the underbody and in- CAUTION suitable type. side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold The best way to preserve your vehicle’s water at frequent intervals to reduce the . When washing the vehicle, the beauty is frequent washing. Wash the harmful effects of such agents. brakes may get wet. As a result, vehicle at least once a month to avoid Mud and sand adhering to the underbody the brake stopping distance will contamination by road grime. be longer. To dry the brakes, components may accelerate their corro- drive the vehicle at a safe speed Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty sion. while lightly pressing the brake of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash After driving off-road or on muddy or pedal to heat up the brakes. the vehicle with hot water and in direct sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off . sunlight. the underbody. Carefully flush the suspen- Do not wash the engine compart- sion and axle parts, as they are particu- ment and area adjacent to it. If Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree larly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do water enters the engine air in- sap, and bird droppings should be washed not use a sharp-edged tool to remove take, electrical parts or the power off by using a light detergent, as required. caked mud. steering fluid reservoir, it will If you use a light detergent, make certain cause engine trouble or faulty that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use NOTE power steering respectively. strong soap or chemical detergents. All Be careful not to damage brake hoses, . Since your vehicle is equipped cleaning agents should be promptly sensor harnesses, and other parts with a rear wiper, automatic car- flushed from the surface and not allowed when washing suspension compo- wash brushes could become to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly nents. tangled around it, damaging the with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the wiper arm and other compo- remaining water off with a chamois or soft ! Using a warm water washer nents. Ask the automatic car- cloth. . Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) wash operator not to let the ! Washing the underbody or more between the washer nozzle and brushes touch the wiper arm or the vehicle. Chemicals, salts and gravel used for to fix the wiper arm on the rear . Do not wash the same area continu- deicing road surfaces are extremely cor- window glass with adhesive tape ously. rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un- before operating the machine. . derbody components, such as the exhaust If a stain will not come out easily, wash Appearance care 10-3 by hand. Some warm water washers are have a smaller grain-size number and agents. of the high temperature, high pressure could damage the paint. After polishing type, and they can damage or deform the with a compound, coat with wax to restore resin parts such as moldings, or cause the original luster. Frequent polishing with water to leak into the vehicle. acompoundoranincorrectpolishing & technique will result in removing the paint Waxing and polishing layer and exposing the undercoat. When Always wash and dry the vehicle before in doubt, it is always best to contact your waxing and polishing. SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia- Use a good quality polish and wax and list. apply them according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax or polish when NOTE the painted surface is cool. Be careful not to block the windshield washer nozzles with wax when waxing Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, the vehicle. as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of wax on a painted surface leads to loss of the original luster and also quickens the & Cleaning aluminum wheels deterioration of the surface. It is recom- . Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels mended that a coat of wax be applied at clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt least once a month, or whenever the is left on too long, it may be difficult to surface no longer repels water. clean off. . If the appearance of the paint has dimin- Do not use soap containing grit to ished to the point where the luster or tone clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral cannot be restored, lightly polish the cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly surface with a fine-grained compound. with water. Do not clean the wheels with a Never polish just the affected area, but stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed include the surrounding area as well. washing device. Always polish in only one direction. A . Clean the vehicle (including the alumi- No. 2000 grain compound is recom- num wheels) with water as soon as mended. Never use a coarse-grained possible when it has been splashed with compound. Coarse-grained compounds sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other 10-4 Appearance care

Corrosion protection though other parts of the vehicle may be assistance. dry. Repair chips and scratches in the paint as Your SUBARU has been designed and 4. High temperatures will cause corro- soon as you find them. built to resist corrosion. Special materials sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot and protective finishes have been used on dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila- Check the interior of the vehicle for water most parts of the vehicle to help maintain tion. and dirt accumulation under the floor mats fine appearance, strength, and reliable because that could cause corrosion. operation. & To help prevent corrosion Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry. & Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent Most common causes of corrosion of the body and suspension Keep your garage dry. Do not park your corrosion components. Also, wash the vehicle vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated The most common causes of corrosion promptly after driving on any of the garage. In such a garage, corrosion can are: following surfaces. be caused by dampness. If you wash the vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle 1. The accumulation of moisture retain- . roads that have been salted to prevent into the garage when wet or covered with ing dirt and debris in body panel sections, them from freezing in winter snow, that can cause dampness. cavities, and other areas. . mud, sand, or gravel 2. Damage to paint and other protective . coastal roads If your vehicle is operated in cold weather coatings caused by gravel and stone and/or in areas where road salts and other chips or minor accidents. After the winter has ended, it is recom- corrosive materials are used, the door mended that the underbody be given a hinges and locks, and hood latch should Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle very thorough washing. be inspected and lubricated periodically. when: 1. It is exposed to road salt or dust Before the beginning of winter, check the control chemicals, or used in coastal condition of underbody components, such areas where there is more salt in the air, as the exhaust system, fuel and brake or in areas where there is considerable lines, brake cables, suspension, steering industrial pollution. system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are found to be rusted, they should 2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, be given an appropriate rust prevention especially when temperatures range just treatment or should be replaced. Contact above freezing. your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind 3. Dampness in certain parts of the of maintenance and treatment if you need vehicle remains for a long time, even Appearance care 10-5

Cleaning the interior & Leather seat materials & Synthetic leather upholstery The leather used by SUBARU is a high The synthetic leather material used on the Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate quality natural product which will retain its SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap control panel, audio equipment, instru- distinctive appearance and feel for many or detergent and water, after first vacuum- ment panel, center console, combination years with proper care. ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the meter panel, and switches. (Do not use Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe organic solvents.) surface can cause the material to become off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial & brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic Seat fabric cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber leather materials may be used when Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a cloth should be performed monthly, taking necessary. vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the care not to soak the leather or allow water fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum to penetrate the stitched seams. NOTE cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning Strong cleaning agents such as sol- Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly woolen fabrics may be used to remove vents, paint thinners, window cleaner wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry or gasoline must never be used on thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If leather or synthetic interior materials. using a solution of mild soap and luke- your SUBARU is to be parked for a long warm water then dry thoroughly. time in bright sunlight, it is recommended & Climate control panel, audio that the seats and headrests be covered, If the stain does not come out, try a panel, instrument panel, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading console panel, and switches commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use or shrinkage. the cleaner on a hidden place and make Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate Minor surface blemishes or bald patches sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. control panel, audio equipment, instru- may be treated with a commercial leather Use the cleaner according to its instruc- ment panel, center console, combination spray lacquer. You will discover that each tions. meter panel, and switches. leather seat section will develop soft folds NOTE or wrinkles, which is characteristic of NOTE When cleaning the seat, do not use genuine leather. Do not use organic solvents such as benzine, paint thinner, or any similar paint thinners or gasoline, or strong materials. cleaning agents that contain those solvents.

– CONTINUED – 10-6 Appearance care

& Navigation monitor (if equipped) To clean the navigation monitor, wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft cloth. If the navigation monitor is extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with neutral detergent then carefully wipe off any remaining detergent. NOTE . Do not spray neutral detergent directly onto the monitor. Doing so could damage the monitor’s components. . Do not wipe the monitor with a hard cloth. Doing so could scratch the monitor. . Do not use cleaning fluid that contains thinner, gasoline, or any other volatile substance. Such cleaning fluid could erase the lettering on the switches at the bottom of the monitor. Maintenance and service

Maintenance schedule ...... 11-3 Recommended fluid...... 11-21 Maintenance precautions...... 11-3 Front differential gear oil (AT models) ...... 11-21 Before checking or servicing in the engine Checking the oil level ...... 11-21 compartment...... 11-4 Recommended grade and viscosity...... 11-22 When you do checking or servicing in the engine Rear differential gear oil...... 11-22 compartment while the engine is running...... 11-4 Checking the gear oil level...... 11-22 Engine hood ...... 11-5 Recommended grade and viscosity...... 11-23 Engine compartment overview...... 11-6 Power steering fluid ...... 11-24 Non-turbo models ...... 11-6 Checking the fluid level...... 11-24 Turbo models...... 11-7 Recommended fluid...... 11-25 Engine oil...... 11-8 Brake fluid...... 11-25 Checking the oil level ...... 11-8 Checking the fluid level...... 11-25 Changing the oil and oil filter...... 11-9 Recommended brake fluid ...... 11-26 Recommended grade and viscosity ...... 11-11 Clutch fluid (MT models)...... 11-26 Recommended grade and viscosity under severe Checking the fluid level...... 11-26 driving conditions ...... 11-12 Recommended clutch fluid...... 11-27 Synthetic oil...... 11-12 Brake booster ...... 11-27 Cooling system ...... 11-12 Brake pedal ...... 11-28 Cooling fan, hose and connections...... 11-12 Checking the brake pedal free play ...... 11-28 Engine coolant...... 11-13 Checking the brake pedal reserve distance...... 11-28 Air cleaner element...... 11-15 Clutch pedal (MT models) ...... 11-28 Replacing the air cleaner element ...... 11-16 11 Checking the clutch function...... 11-28 Spark plugs ...... 11-18 Checking the clutch pedal free play...... 11-29 Recommended spark plugs ...... 11-18 Hill start assist system (MT models)...... 11-29 Drive belts ...... 11-18 Replacement of brake pad and lining ...... 11-29 Manual transmission oil ...... 11-19 Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ...... 11-30 Checking the oil level ...... 11-19 Parking brake stroke ...... 11-30 Recommended grade and viscosity ...... 11-20 Tires and wheels...... 11-31 Automatic transmission fluid ...... 11-20 Types of tires...... 11-31 Checking the fluid level ...... 11-20 Maintenance and service

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Rear window wiper blade rubber ...... 11-43 (U.S.-spec. models) ...... 11-31 Battery ...... 11-44 Tire inspection ...... 11-33 Fuses...... 11-45 Tire pressures and wear ...... 11-33 Main fuse...... 11-46 Wheel balance...... 11-35 Installation of accessories ...... 11-47 Wear indicators...... 11-35 Tire rotation direction mark ...... 11-36 Replacing bulbs...... 11-47 Tire rotation ...... 11-36 Headlights (models with HID headlights)...... 11-47 Tire replacement ...... 11-37 Headlights (models without HID headlights)...... 11-47 Wheel replacement...... 11-37 Position light ...... 11-50 Wheel covers (if equipped) ...... 11-38 Front turn signal light ...... 11-50 Aluminum wheels...... 11-38 Rear combination lights ...... 11-50 License plate light ...... 11-51 Windshield washer fluid ...... 11-39 Dome light, map light, cargo area light and Replacement of wiper blades...... 11-40 door step light ...... 11-51 Windshield wiper blade assembly ...... 11-41 Other bulbs ...... 11-52 Windshield wiper blade rubber ...... 11-41 Rear window wiper blade assembly ...... 11-42 Maintenance and service 11-3

Maintenance schedule Maintenance precautions . Always be very careful to avoid injury when working on the vehi- The scheduled maintenance items re- When maintenance and service are re- cle. Remember that some of the quired to be serviced at regular intervals quired, it is recommended that all work be materials in the vehicle may be are shown in the “Warranty and Main- done by an authorized SUBARU dealer. hazardous if improperly used or tenance Booklet”. handled, for example, battery If you perform maintenance and service acid. For details of your maintenance schedule, by yourself, you should familiarize yourself . read the separate “Warranty and Main- with the information provided in this Your vehicle should only be ser- tenance Booklet”. section on general maintenance and viced by persons fully competent service for your SUBARU. to do so. Serious personal injury may result to persons not experi- Incorrect or incomplete service could enced in servicing vehicles. cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera- . Always use the proper tools and tion. Any problems caused by improper make certain that they are well maintenance and service performed by maintained. you are not eligible for warranty coverage. . Never get under the vehicle sup- WARNING ported only by a jack. Always use safety stands to support the . Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle. vehicle must NEVER be per- . Never keep the engine running in formed on a single two-wheel a poorly ventilated area, such as dynamometer or similar appara- a garage or other closed areas. tus. Attempting to do so will . Do not smoke or allow open result in transmission damage flames around the fuel or battery. and in uncontrolled vehicle This will cause a fire. movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons . Because the fuel system is under nearby. pressure, replacement of the fuel filter should be performed only . Always select a safe area when by your SUBARU dealer. performing maintenance on your vehicle. . Wear adequate eye protection to

– CONTINUED – 11-4 Maintenance and service

guard against getting oil or fluids & Before checking or servicing & When you do checking or in your eyes. If something does in the engine compartment servicing in the engine com- get in your eyes, thoroughly partment while the engine is wash them out with clean water. WARNING running . Do not tamper with the wiring of . the SRS airbag system or seat- Always stop the engine and set WARNING belt pretensioner system, or at- the parking brake firmly to pre- tempt to take its connectors vent the vehicle from moving. A running engine can be dangerous. apart, as that may activate the . Always let the engine cool down. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, system or it can render it inop- Engine parts become very hot hair and tools away from the cooling erative. NEVER use a circuit when the engine is running and fan, belts and any other moving tester for this wiring. If your remain hot for some time after engine parts. Removing rings, SRS airbag or seatbelt preten- the engine is stopped. watches and ties is advisable. sioner needs service, consult . Do not spill engine oil, engine your nearest SUBARU dealer. coolant, brake fluid or any other fluid on hot engine components. This may cause a fire. . Always remove the key from the ignition switch. When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, thecoolingfanmayoperate suddenly even when the engine is stopped. . Before performing any servicing on a vehicle equipped with a remote engine start system (a dealer option) temporarily place that system in the service mode to prevent it from unexpectedly starting the engine. Maintenance and service 11-5

Engine hood WARNING To open the hood: Always check that the hood is 1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the properly locked before you start windshield, return them to their original driving. If it is not, it might fly open position. while the vehicle is moving and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious bodily injury.

3. Release the secondary hood release by moving the lever between the front grille and the hood toward the left. 4. Lift up the hood. To close the hood: 1. Lower the hood to a height of approxi- 2. Pull the hood release knob under the mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed instrument panel. position and then let it drop. 2. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position. Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal. 11-6 Maintenance and service

1) Power steering fluid reservoir (page 11- Engine compartment overview 24) 2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT) & Non-turbo models (page 11-19) or Differential gear oil level gauge (AT) (page 11-21) 3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26) 4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge (page 11-20) 5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25) 6) Fuse box (page 11-45) 7) Battery (page 11-44) 8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-39) 9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8) 10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-13) 11) Radiator cap (page 11-13) 12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8) 13) Air cleaner element (page 11-15) Maintenance and service 11-7

& Turbo models 1) Power steering fluid reservoir (page 11-24) 2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT) (page 11-19) or Differential gear oil level gauge (AT) (page 11-21) 3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26) 4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge (page 11-20) 5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25) 6) Fuse box (page 11-45) 7) Battery (page 11-44) 8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-39) 9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8) 10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-13) 11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8) 12) Radiator cap (page 11-13) 13) Air cleaner element (page 11-15) 11-8 Maintenance and service

Engine oil & Checking the oil level Check the engine oil level at each fuel NOTE stop. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and . The engine oil consumption rate is stop the engine. not stabilized, and therefore cannot be determined until the vehicle has tra- veled at least several thousand miles (kilometers). Even after break-in, when the vehicle is used under severe driving conditions such as those men- tionedintheWarrantyandMainte- nance Booklet, engine oil is consumed or deteriorated more quickly than un- 1) Notch der normal driving conditions. If you 2) Upper level drive your vehicle under these severe 3) Lower level conditions, you should check the oil 4. Pull out the level gauge again and level at least at every second fuel fill-up check the oil level on it. If it is below the time, and change the oil more fre- lower level, add oil to bring the level up to quently. Please refer to the Warranty 2. Pull out the level gauge that has the the upper level. and Maintenance Booklet for more de- “ ” symbol on top, wipe it clean, and tails. insert it again. . If the oil consumption rate seems 3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly CAUTION abnormally high after the break-in inserted until it stops. period, for example more than 1 quart . Use only engine oil with the per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000 recommended grade and vis- kilometers, contact your SUBARU deal- cosity. er. . Be careful not to spill engine oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine oil gets on the exhaust Maintenance and service 11-9

pipe, be sure to wipe it off. properly.

If you check the oil level just after stopping WARNING the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking Be careful not to burn yourself with the level. hot engine oil. Just after driving or while the engine is warm, the engine oil level reading may be 5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain in a range between the upper level and plug with a clean cloth and tighten it the notch mark. This is caused by thermal securely with a new sealing washer after expansion of the engine oil. the oil has completely drained out. To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not 6. Remove the under cover. add any additional oil above the upper level when the engine is cold. Turbo models & Changing the oil and oil filter Change the oil and oil filter according to the maintenance schedule in the “War- ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more frequently than listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads, when short trips are frequently made, or when driving in extremely cold weather. Non-turbo models 1. Warm up the engine by letting the engine idle for approximately 10 minutes to ease draining the engine oil. Non-turbo models 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and 4. Drain out the engine oil by removing stop the engine. the drain plug while the engine is still 3. Remove the oil filler cap. warm. The used oil should be drained into an appropriate container and disposed of – CONTINUED – 11-10 Maintenance and service

and the time the oil is left flowing out. After Amount of Oil filter color Part number rotation refilling the engine with oil, therefore, you must use the level gauge to confirm that Black 15208AA100 1 rotation the level is correct. 7/8 Blue 15208AA12A 13. Start the engine and make sure that no rotation oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber seal and drain plug. CAUTION 14. Run the engine until it reaches the normal operating temperature. Then stop . Never over tighten the oil filter the engine and wait a few minutes to allow because that can result in an oil the oil drain back. Check the oil level leak. again and if necessary, add more engine . Thoroughly wipe off any engine oil. Turbo models oil that has spilled over the 7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter exhaust pipe and/or under-cover. CAUTION wrench. If spilled oil is not promptly 8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a wiped up, the oil could cause a Be careful not to spill engine oil thin coat of engine oil to the seal. fire. when adding it. If oil touches the 9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad the bottom of engine and install the oil 11. Reinstall under cover. smell, smoke, and/or a fire. filter by hand turning. Be careful not to 12. Pour engine oil through the filler neck. twist or damage the seal. 10. Tighten the oil filter by the amount Oil capacity (guideline): indicated in the following table after the 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt) seal makes contact with the bottom of engine. The oil quantity indicated above is only guideline. The necessary quantity of oil depends on the quantity of oil that has been drained. The quantity of drained oil differs slightly depending on the temperature of the oil Maintenance and service 11-11

& Recommended grade and capabilities viscosity

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark) or API classification SM with the words “ENERGY CONSERVING”

These recommended oil grades can be identified by looking for either or both of the following marks displayed on the oil SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera- container. ture ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst Mark) *: 5W-30 is preferred. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel will add to fuel economy. The following economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide table lists the recommended viscosities better fuel economy. However, in hot and applicable temperatures. weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the CAUTION same API classification and SAE viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU. Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.

API Service label 1) Indicates the oil quality by API designa- tions 2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade 3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving

– CONTINUED – 11-12 Maintenance and service

& Recommended grade and Cooling system shortened to that of the mixing viscosity under severe driv- coolant. ing conditions . Do not splash the engine coolant WARNING If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant areas with very high temperatures, or is Never attempt to remove the radia- may damage the paint surface. used for heavy-duty applications, use of tor cap until the engine has been oil with the following grade and viscosities shut off and has cooled down is recommended. completely. Since the coolant is & Cooling fan, hose and con- under pressure, you may suffer API classification SM (or SL): serious burns from a spray of boil- nections SAE viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W-50, ing hot coolant when the cap is Your vehicle employs an electric cooling 20W-40, 20W-50 removed. fan which is thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific temperature. & Synthetic oil CAUTION If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the coolant temperature high You can use synthetic engine oil that . Vehicles are filled at the factory warning light blinks or illuminates in RED, meets the same requirements given for with SUBARU Super Coolant that the cooling fan circuit may be defective. conventional engine oil. When using does not require the first change Check the fuse and replace it if necessary. synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling classification, viscosity and grade shown years/220,000 km). This coolant system checked by your SUBARU dealer. in this Owner’s Manual, and must follow should not be mixed with any the oil and filter changing intervals shown other brand or type of coolant If frequent addition of coolant is neces- in the maintenance schedule. during this period. Mixing with a sary, there may be a leak in the engine different coolant will reduce the cooling system. It is recommended that life of the coolant. Should it be the cooling system and connections be necessary to top up the coolant checked for leaks, damage, or looseness. for any reason, use only SUBARU Super Coolant. If the SUBARU Super Coolant is diluted with another brand or type, the maintenance interval is Maintenance and service 11-13

! & Engine coolant Changing the coolant ! Checking the coolant level WARNING Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.

Always add genuine SUBARU cooling 3. After refilling the reserve tank and the system conditioner whenever the coolant radiator, reinstall the caps and check that is replaced. the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap Change the engine coolant and add 1) “FULL” level mark are in the proper position. 2) “LOW” level mark genuine SUBARU cooling system conditioner using the following procedures Check the coolant level at each fuel stop. CAUTION according to the maintenance schedule. 1. Check the coolant level on the outside . Be careful not to spill engine 1. Remove the under cover. of the reservoir while the engine is cool. coolant when adding it. If coolant 2. If the level is close to or lower than the touches the exhaust pipe, it may “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is a fire. If engine coolant gets on empty, remove the radiator cap and refill the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe as required. it off. . Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.

– CONTINUED – 11-14 Maintenance and service

room to add genuine SUBARU cooling system conditioner in the radiator. Add genuine SUBARU cooling system conditioner until the coolant level reaches the filler neck. Do not pour the coolant too quickly, as this may lead to insufficient air bleeding and trapped air in the system.

Guideline of coolant quantity (including coolant in reservoir tank): Non-turbo models: MT: 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt) AT: 7.1 US qt (6.7 liters, 5.9 Imp qt) 2. Place a proper container under the Non-turbo models Turbo models: 1) Fill up to this level drain plug and loosen the drain plug. 8.5 US qt (8.0 liters, 7.0 Imp qt) 3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the coolant from the radiator. Then drain the coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the drain plug securely. NOTE (turbo models only) The cap (without tabs) on top of the radiator does not need to be removed. To add coolant, remove the cap (with tabs) on the coolant tank on top of the engine. 4. Install the under cover. Turbo models 1) Fill up to this level 5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to just below the filler neck, allowing enough Maintenance and service 11-15

Air cleaner element

WARNING Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed. The air cleaner element not only filters intake air but also stops flames if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned. 1) “FULL” level mark 7. Put the radiator cap back on and 2) “LOW” level mark tighten firmly. At this time, make sure that CAUTION the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is CAUTION correctly in place. When replacing the air cleaner ele- 8. Start and race the engine at 2,000 to . ment, use a genuine SUBARU air Be careful not to spill engine 3,000 rpm for 5 to 6 times within 40 cleaner element. If it is not used, coolant when adding it. If coolant seconds. there is the possibility of causing a touches the exhaust pipe, it may 9. Stop the engine and wait until the negative effect to the engine. cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or coolant cools down (122 to 1408F [50 to a fire. If engine coolant gets on 608C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add The air cleaner element functions as a the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and to filter screen. When the element is perfo- it off. the reserve tank’s “FULL” level. rated or removed, engine wear will be . Do not splash the engine coolant 10. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap excessive and engine life shortened. over painted parts. The alcohol back on and tighten firmly. contained in the engine coolant The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is may damage the paint surface. unnecessary to clean or wash the element. 6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir tank’s “FULL” level mark.

– CONTINUED – 11-16 Maintenance and service

& Replacing the air cleaner case. element 3. Loosen the screw of the clamp and Replace the air cleaner element according pull the air intake boot out of the air to the maintenance schedule in the cleaner case. “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un- 4. Unsnap the two clips holding the air der extremely dusty conditions, replace it cleaner case cover. more frequently. It is recommended that you always use genuine SUBARU parts. ! Non-turbo models

7. To install the air cleaner case cover, insert the three projections on the air cleaner case cover into the slits on the air cleaner case. 8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

5. Open the air cleaner case cover and remove the air cleaner element. 6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case and case cover with a damp cloth and 1) Connector 2) Clip install a new air cleaner element. 3) Clamp 4) Air intake boot 5) Clip 1. Unplug the connector that is attached to the top of the air cleaner case. 2. Detach the connector cable from the clip on the right side on the air cleaner Maintenance and service 11-17

! Turbo models 2. Unplug the connector that is attached to the top of the air cleaner case. 3. Unsnap the two clips holding the air cleaner case cover.

6. If the air cleaner case cover has been 1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on removed, insert the three projections on the air intake duct, then remove the air the air cleaner case cover into the slits on intake duct. the air cleaner case. 4. Open the air cleaner case cover and 7. Install in the reverse order of removal. remove the air cleaner element. 5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case and case cover with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner element.

1) Connector 2) Clip 11-18 Maintenance and service

Spark plugs & Recommended spark plugs Drive belts

Non-turbo models: FR5AP-11 (NGK) Turbo models: SILFR6A (NGK)

It may be difficult to replace the spark 1) Power steering oil pump pulley plugs. It is recommended that you have 2) Front side belt the spark plugs replaced by your 3) Alternator pulley SUBARU dealer. 4) Air conditioner compressor pulley 5) Rear side belt The spark plugs should be replaced 6) Crank pulley according to the maintenance schedule A) 22 lbf (98 N, 10 kgf) in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book- let”. CAUTION CAUTION The front side belt, which runs in . When disconnecting the spark conjunction with the following com- plug cables, always grasp the ponents, must be used within the spark plug cap, not the cables. specified deflection. . . Make sure the cables are re- Power steering oil pump pulley placed in the correct order. . Alternator pulley . Crank pulley Maintenance and service 11-19

Check the deflection of the front Manual transmission oil side belt and if there is any looseness, cracks, wear or unusual noise & Checking the oil level on the front side belt, contact your SUBARU dealer. Continuing to use the vehicle with the belt outside of the specification may cause the engine to malfunction and the above components to malfunction.

To check the deflection of the front side belt, place a straightedge (ruler) across two adjacent pulleys (alternator pulley and 1) Upper level crank pulley) and apply a force of 22 lbf 2) Lower level (98 N, 10 kgf) midway between the pulleys 3. Pull out the level gauge again and by using a spring scale. The belt deflec- 1) Yellow handle check the oil level on it. If it is below the tion should be the amount specified. If the lower level, add oil through the level Check the oil level monthly. front side belt is loose, cracked or worn, gauge hole to bring the level up to the contact your SUBARU dealer. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and upper level. in (mm) stop the engine. Deflection 2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, and insert it again. CAUTION New belt Used belt 0.28 – 0.35 0.35 – 0.43 Be careful not to spill manual trans- A (7.0 – 9.0) (9.0 – 11.0) mission oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may The rear side belt is a stretch-type belt, cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a therefore the deflection does not need to fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be checked. If there are cracks or wear be sure to wipe it off. confirmed on the belts and a squeaking sound is heard from them, contact your SUBARU dealer. – CONTINUED – 11-20 Maintenance and service

& Recommended grade and Automatic transmission fluid viscosity & Each oil manufacturer has its own base Checking the fluid level oils and additives. Never use different The automatic transmission fluid expands brands together. largely as its temperature rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Oil grade: Therefore, there are two different scales API classification GL-5 for checking the level of hot fluid and cold fluid on the level gauge. Though the fluid level can be checked without warming up the fluid on the “COLD” range, it is recommended to check the fluid level when the fluid is at 1) Yellow handle operating temperature. ! Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot 1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temperature of the transmission fluid up to normal operating temperature; 158 to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera- set the parking brake. ture 3. First shift the selector lever in each position. Then shift it in the “P” position, and run the engine at idling speed. 1) HOT range 2) COLD range 3) Upper level 4) Lower level Maintenance and service 11-21

4. Pull out the level gauge and check the & Recommended fluid Front differential gear oil (AT fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the “ ” models) lower level on the HOT range, add the Use one of the following types of auto- recommended automatic transmission matic transmission fluid. & Checking the oil level fluid up to the upper level. SUBARU ATF ! Checking the fluid level when the IDEMITSU ATF HP fluid is cold When the fluid level has to be checked NOTE without time to warm up the automatic Using any non-specified type of auto- transmission, check to see that the fluid matic transmission fluid could result in level is between the lower level and upper damage inside the transmission. When level on the “COLD” range. If it is below replacing the automatic transmission that range, add fluid up to the upper level. fluid, be sure to use the kind specified. Be careful not to overfill. CAUTION Be careful not to spill automatic 1) Yellow handle transmission fluid when adding it. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and If automatic transmission fluid stop the engine. touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a 2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, fire. If automatic transmission fluid and insert it again. gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

– CONTINUED – 11-22 Maintenance and service

& Recommended grade and Rear differential gear oil viscosity & Each oil manufacturer has its own base Checking the gear oil level oils and additives. Never use different brands together.

Oil grade: API classification GL-5

1) Upper level 2) Lower level 3. Pull out the level gauge again and check the oil level on it. If it is below the 1) Filler plug lower level, add oil to bring the level up to 2) Drain plug the upper level.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill front differ- SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera- ential gear oil when adding it. If oil ture touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off. Maintenance and service 11-23

it off. & Recommended grade and . If the vehicle requires frequent viscosity refilling, there may be an oil leak. Each oil manufacturer has its own base If you suspect a problem, have oils and additives. Never use different the vehicle checked at your brands together. SUBARU dealer. Oil grade: API classification GL-5

1) Filler hole 2) Drain hole 3) Oil level Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil level. The oil level should be kept even with the bottom of the filler hole. If the oil level is below the bottom edge of the hole, add oil through the filler hole to raise the level. CAUTION SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature . Be careful not to spill rear differential gear oil when adding it. If rear differential gear oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If rear differential gear oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe 11-24 Maintenance and service

Power steering fluid WARNING & Checking the fluid level Be careful not to burn yourself because the fluid may be hot.

CAUTION . When power steering fluid is being added, use only clean fluid, and be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank. And never use different brands together. 2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir . Avoid spilling fluid when adding tank. it in the tank. When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has . Be careful not to spill power The power steering fluid expands greatly been run: Check that the oil level is steering fluid when adding it. If as its temperature rises; the fluid level between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on power steering fluid touches the differs according to fluid temperature. the surface of the reservoir tank. exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad Therefore, the reservoir tank has two When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If different checking ranges for hot and cold run: Check that the oil level is between power steering fluid gets on the fluids. “COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it surface of the reservoir tank. off. Check the power steering fluid level 3. If the fluid level is lower than the monthly. applicable “MIN” line, add the recom- 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, mended fluid as necessary to bring the and stop the engine. level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line. If the fluid level is extremely low, it may indicate possible leakage. Consult your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Maintenance and service 11-25

& Recommended fluid Brake fluid clean water. For safety, when performing this work, wearing Use one of the following types of auto- & Checking the fluid level eye protection is advisable. matic transmission fluid. . Brake fluid absorbs moisture SUBARU ATF from the air. Any absorbed moist- IDEMITSU ATF HP ure can cause a dangerous loss “Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis- of braking performance. sion Fluid . If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.

CAUTION . 1) “MAX” level mark When adding brake fluid, be care- 2) “MIN” level mark ful not to allow any dirt into the reservoir. Check the fluid level monthly. . Never splash the brake fluid over Check the fluid level on the outside of the painted surfaces or rubber parts. reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add “ ” Alcohol contained in the brake the recommended brake fluid to MAX . fluid may damage them. Use only brake fluid from a sealed . container. Be careful not to spill brake fluid when adding it. If brake fluid WARNING touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or . Never let brake fluid contact your a fire. If brake fluid gets on the eyes because brake fluid can be exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it harmful to your eyes. If brake off. fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with – CONTINUED – 11-26 Maintenance and service

& Recommended brake fluid Clutch fluid (MT models) advisable.

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 & Checking the fluid level brake fluid CAUTION . Clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed moist- CAUTION ure can cause improper clutch operation. Never use different brands of brake fluid together. Also, avoid mixing . If the vehicle requires frequent DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if refilling, there may be a leak. If they are the same brand. you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer. . Never use different brands of clutch fluid together. Check the fluid level on the outside of the . When clutch fluid is added, be reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level careful not to allow any dirt into mark, add the recommended clutch fluid the tank. to “MAX” level mark. . Never splash the clutch fluid over Use only clutch fluid from a sealed painted surfaces or rubber parts. container. Alcohol contained in the clutch fluid may damage them. WARNING . Be careful not to spill clutch fluid Never let clutch fluid contact your when adding it. If clutch fluid eyes because clutch fluid can be touches the exhaust pipe, it may harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or gets in your eyes, immediately flush a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the them thoroughly with clean water. exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it For safety, when performing this off. work, wearing eye protection is Maintenance and service 11-27

& Recommended clutch fluid Brake booster erly. . You might feel that the brake pedal FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 If the brake booster does not operate as is applied by lighter force and gener- brake fluid described in the following, have it checked ates a greater braking force. by your SUBARU dealer. . You might hear clicking (knocking) 1. With the engine off, depress the brake sounds around brake pedal. pedal several times, applying the same CAUTION Brake assist is not a system that brings pedal force each time. The distance the more braking ability to the vehicle Never use different brands of clutch pedal travels should not vary. beyond its breaking capability. fluid together. Also, avoid mixing 2. With the brake pedal depressed, start DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if the engine. The pedal should move they are the same brand. slightly down to the floor. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine and keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change. 4. Start the engine again and run for approximately 1 minute then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times to check the brake booster. The brake booster operates properly if the pedal stroke decreases with each depression.

NOTE For vehicles equipped with the brake assist system, when you depress the brake pedal strongly or suddenly, the following phenomena occur. However, even though these occur, they do not indicate any malfunctions, and the brake assist system is operating prop- 11-28 Maintenance and service

Brake pedal & Checking the brake pedal Clutch pedal (MT models) reserve distance Check the brake pedal free play and Check the clutch pedal free play and reserve distance according to the main- reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and tenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Maintenance Booklet”. & Checking the brake pedal & Checking the clutch function free play Check the clutch engagement and disen- gagement. 1. With the engine idling, check that there are no abnormal noises when the clutch pedal is depressed, and that shifting into 1st or reverse feels smooth. 2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal 1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm) slowly to check that the engine and Depress the pedal with a force of approxi- transmission smoothly couple without mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure any sign of slippage. the distance between the upper surface of the pedal pad and the floor. When the measurement is smaller than 1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm) the specification, or when the pedal does not operate smoothly, contact with your Stop the engine and firmly depress the SUBARU dealer. brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the brake pedal up with one finger to check the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf (10 N, 1 kgf). If the free play is not within proper specification, contact your SUBARU dealer. Maintenance and service 11-29

& Checking the clutch pedal Hill start assist system (MT Replacement of brake pad free play models) and lining

Ensure that the Hill start assist system operates properly under the following circumstances: 1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by depressing the brake pedal and clutch pedal, with the engine running. 2. Make sure that the vehicle does not move backward even after the brake pedal is released. 3. Then make sure the vehicle starts climbing the grade by following the normal starting procedures. 1) 0.16 – 0.51 in (4.0 – 13.0 mm) If the Hill start assist system does not Lightly press the clutch pedal down with The right front disc brake and the right rear operate as described above, contact with disc brake have audible wear indicators your finger until you feel resistance, and your SUBARU dealer. check the free play. on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear If the free play is not within proper indicator makes a very audible scraping specification, contact your SUBARU deal- noise when the brake pedal is applied. er. If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. CAUTION If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indicator, it will – CONTINUED – 11-30 Maintenance and service

result in the need for costly brake range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut Parking brake stroke rotor repair or replacement. located on the parking brake lever.

& Breaking-in of new brake Parking brake stroke: pads and linings 7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf) When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only genuine SUBARU parts. After replacement, the new parts must be WARNING broken in as follows. A safe location and situation should ! Brake pad and lining be selected for break-in driving. While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake CAUTION pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more times. Pulling the parking brake lever too Check the parking brake stroke according ! Parking brake lining forcefully may cause the rear to the maintenance schedule in the wheels to lock. To avoid this, be “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. 1.Drivethevehicleataspeedof certain to pull the lever up slowly When the parking brake is properly approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). and gently. adjusted, braking power is fully applied 2. With the parking brake release button by pulling the lever up 7 to 8 notches pushed in, pull the parking brake lever gently but firmly (approximately 45 lbf [200 SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a N, 20.4 kgf]). If the parking brake lever force of approximately 33 lbf [147 N, 15 stroke is not within the specified range, kgf]). have the brake system checked and 3. Drive the vehicle for approximately adjusted at your SUBARU dealer. 220 yards (200 meters) in this condition. 4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool down. Repeat this procedure. 5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the parking brake stroke is out of the specified Maintenance and service 11-31

! Tires and wheels Winter (snow) tires the temperature in the garage and the Winter tires are best suited for driving on temperature outside. By way of example, & Types of tires snow-covered and icy roads. However the following table shows the required tire winter tires do not perform as well as pressures that correspond to various out- You should be familiar with type of tires summer tires and all season tires on roads side temperatures when the temperature present on your vehicle. other than snow-covered and icy roads. in the garage is 608F (15.68C). The factory-fitted tires are all-season tires. & Example: ! All season tires Tire pressure monitoring Tire size: P215/65R16 96H All season tires are designed to provide system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. Standard tire pressures: an adequate measure of traction, handling models) Front: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) and braking performance in year-round The tire pressure monitoring system pro- Rear: 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2) driving including snowy and icy road vides the driver with a warning message Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C) conditions. However all season tires do by sending a signal from a sensor that is not offer as much traction performance as installed in each wheel when tire pressure Outside Adjusted pressure winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow is severely low. The tire pressure monitor- temperature [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)] or on icy roads. ing system will activate only when the front rear All season tires are identified by “ALL vehicle is driven. Also, this system may ” “ ” 8 − 8 33 32 SEASON and/or M+S (Mud & Snow) on not react immediately to a sudden drop in 30 F( 1 C) (230, 2.3) (220, 2.2) the tire sidewall. tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object). 8 − 8 35 34 ! Summer tires 10 F( 12 C) (240, 2.4) (235, 2.35) If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm Summer tires are high-speed capability − 8 − 8 37 36 tires best suited for highway driving under garage and will then drive the vehicle in 10 F( 23 C) (255, 2.55) (250, 2.5) dry conditions. cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire Summer tires are inadequate for driving pressures may cause the low tire pressure Example: on slippery roads such as on snow- warning light to illuminate. To avoid this Tire size: P225/55R17 95H covered or icy roads. problem when adjusting the tire pressures Standard tire pressures: 2 If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered in a warm garage, inflate the tires to Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm ) or icy roads, we strongly recommend the pressures higher than those shown on the Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an use of winter (snow) tires. 2 Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C) extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm ) for When installing winter tires, be sure to every difference of 108F (5.68C) between replace all four tires. – CONTINUED – 11-32 Maintenance and service

tires can cause the low tire pressure Outside Adjusted pressure WARNING temperature [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)] warning light to turn off. If the low tire pressure warning light front rear System resetting is necessary when the wheels are changed (for example, a does not illuminate briefly after the 8 − 8 35 33 ignition switch is turned ON or the 30 F( 1 C) (240, 2.4) (230, 2.3) switch to snow tires) and new TPMS valves are installed on the newly fitted light illuminates steadily after blink- 8 − 8 37 35 ing for approximately one minute, 10 F( 12 C) (255, 2.55) (240, 2.4) wheels. Have this work performed by a SUBARU dealer following wheel replace- you should have your Tire Pressure 37 Monitoring System checked at a −108F(−238C) 39 ment. (270, 2.7) (255, 2.55) SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- It may not be possible to install TPMS ble. If the low tire pressure warning light valves on certain wheels that are on the illuminates when you drive the vehicle in If this light illuminates while driving, market. Therefore, if you change the never brake suddenly and keep cold outside air after adjusting the tire wheels (for example, a switch to snow pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the driving straight ahead while gradu- tires), use wheels that have the same part ally reducing speed. Then slowly tire pressures using the method described number as the standard-equipment above. Then, increase the vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe place. wheels. Without four operational TPMS Otherwise an accident involving to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS see that the low tire pressure warning light serious vehicle damage and serious will not fully function and the warning light personal injury could occur. turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire in the instrument panel will illuminate pressure warning light does not turn off, steadily after blinking for approximately If this light still illuminates while the tire pressure monitoring system may one minute. driving after adjusting the tire pres- not be functioning normally. In this event, sure, a tire may have significant go to a SUBARU dealer to have the When a tire is replaced, adjustments are damage and a fast leak that causes system inspected as soon as possible. necessary to ensure continued normal the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have operation of the tire pressure monitoring a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire While the vehicle is driven, friction be- system. As with wheel replacement, there- as soon as possible. tween tires and the road surface causes fore, you should have the work performed When a spare tire is mounted or a the tires to warm up. After illumination of by a SUBARU dealer. the low tire pressure warning light, any wheel rim is replaced without the increase in the tire pressures caused by original pressure sensor/transmitter an increase in the outside air temperature being transferred, the low tire pres- or by an increase in the temperature in the sure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approxi- Maintenance and service 11-33

mately one minute. This indicates approach the curbs as squarely as the TPMS is unable to monitor all possible. Also, make sure the tires are four road wheels. Contact your not pressed against the curb when you SUBARU dealer as soon as possible park the vehicle. for tire and sensor replacement and/ . If you feel unusual vibration while or system resetting. If the light driving or find it difficult to steer the illuminates steadily after blinking vehicle in a straight line, one of the for approximately one minute, tires and/or wheels may be damaged. promptly contact a SUBARU dealer Drive slowly to the nearest authorized to have the system inspected. SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected.

& Tire inspection & Tire pressures and wear Check the tire pressures when the tires Check on a daily basis that the tires are Maintaining the correct tire pressures free from serious damage, nails, and ’ are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust helps to maximize the tires service lives the tire pressures to the values shown on stones. At the same time, check the tires and is essential for good running perfor- for abnormal wear. the tire placard. The tire placard is located mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust on the door pillar on the driver’s side. Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi- the pressure of each tire (including the ately if you find any problem. spare) at least once a month (for example, Driving even a short distance warms up during a fuel stop) and before any long the tires and increases the tire pressures. NOTE journey. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the . When the wheels and tires strike outside temperature. It is best to check tire curbs or are subjected to harsh treat- pressure outdoors before driving the ment as when the vehicle is driven on a vehicle. rough surface, they can suffer damage that cannot be seen with the naked eye. When a tire becomes warm, the air inside This type of damage does not become it expands, causing the tire pressure to evident until time has passed. Try not increase. Be careful not to mistakenly to drive over curbs, potholes or on release air from a warm tire to reduce its other rough surfaces. If doing so is pressure. unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed down to a walking pace or less, and

– CONTINUED – 11-34 Maintenance and service

NOTE . Correct tire pressure (tread worn . Abnormally low tire pressure (tread . The air pressure in a tire increases evenly) worn at shoulders) by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm. . The tires are considered cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has been driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust pressure. Doing so will result in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con- Roadholding is good, and steering is Rolling resistance is high, so fuel controllability and ride comfort, and they responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so sumption is also higher. cause the tires to wear abnormally. fuel consumption is also lower. Maintenance and service 11-35

. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread the tires. The resulting loss of & Wear indicators worn in center) vehicle control could lead to an accident.

& Wheel balance Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can also cause steering and suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If 1) New tread Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire you suspect that the wheels are not 2) Worn tread magnifies the effects of road-surface correctly balanced, have them checked 3) Tread wear indicator bumps and dips, possibly resulting in and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Each tire incorporates a tread wear vehicle damage. Also have them adjusted after tire repairs indicator, which becomes visible when and after tire rotation. If the tire placard shows tire pressures for the depth of the tread grooves decreases the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the NOTE to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be tire pressures to the values that match replaced when the tread wear indicator Loss of correct wheel alignment* current loading conditions. appears as a solid band across the tread. causes the tires to wear on one side ’ WARNING and reduces the vehicle s running WARNING stability. Contact your SUBARU dealer Driving at high speeds with exces- if you notice abnormal tire wear. When a tire’s tread wear indicator sively low tire pressures can cause *: The suspension system is designed to hold becomes visible, the tire is worn the tires to deform severely and to each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to beyond the acceptable limit and rapidly become hot. A sharp in- the other wheels and to the road) for optimum must be replaced immediately. With crease in temperature could cause straight-line stability and cornering perfor- a tire in this condition, driving at tread separation, and destruction of mance. high speeds in wet weather can – CONTINUED – 11-36 Maintenance and service

cause the vehicle to hydroplane. the direction mark facing forward. The resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident. & Tire rotation

NOTE For safety, inspect tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible.

& Tire rotation direction mark

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires 1) Front Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec- maximize the life of each tire and ensure tional tires that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to 1) Front rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move the tires to the positions shown in the illustration each time they are rotated. Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tires at the time of rotation. After tire Example of tire rotation direction mark rotation, adjust the tires pressures and 1) Front make sure the wheel nuts are correctly If the tire has the rotation direction tightened. specification, the tire rotation direction After driving approximately 600 miles mark is placed on its sidewall. (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again When you install a tire that has the tire and retighten any nut that has become rotation direction mark, install the tire with loose. Maintenance and service 11-37

& Tire replacement WARNING WARNING The wheels and tires are important and . integral parts of your vehicle’s design; All four tires must be the same in Use only those wheels that are they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The terms of manufacturer, brand specified for your vehicle. Wheels tires fitted as standard equipment are (tread pattern), construction, de- not meeting specifications could optimally matched to the characteristics gree of wear, speed symbol, load interfere with brake caliper opera- of the vehicle and were selected to give index and size. Mixing tires of tion and may cause the tires to rub the best possible combination of running different types, sizes or degrees against the wheel well housing dur- performance, ride comfort, and service of wear can result in damage to ing turns. The resulting loss of ’ life. It is essential for every tire to have a vehicle s powertrain. Use of dif- vehicle control could lead to an size and construction matching those ferent types or sizes of tires can accident. shown on the tire placard and to have a also dangerously reduce controllability and braking perfor- speed symbol and load index matching NOTE those shown on the tire placard. mance and can lead to an accident. When any of the wheels are removed Using tires of a non-specified size detracts . Use only radial tires. Do not use and replaced for tire rotation or to from controllability, ride comfort, braking radial tires together with belted change a flat tire, always check the performance, speedometer accuracy and bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. tightness of the wheel nuts after driv- odometer accuracy. It also creates incor- Doing so can dangerously re- ing approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro- If any nut is loose, tighten it to the ’ duce controllability, resulting in priately changes the vehicle sground an accident. specified torque. clearance. All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con- & Wheel replacement struction, and size. You are advised to When replacing wheels due, for example, replace the tires with new ones that are to damage, make sure the replacement identical to those fitted as standard equip- wheels match the specifications of the ment. wheels that are fitted as standard equip- For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU ment. Replacement wheels are available recommends replacing all four tires at from SUBARU dealers. the same time.

– CONTINUED – 11-38 Maintenance and service

& Wheel covers (if equipped) ! Installing the wheel cover Aluminum wheels ! Removing the wheel cover Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appearance, performance, and safety. . When any of the wheels are removed and replaced for tire rotation or to change a flat tire, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the specified torque. . Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the Align the valve with the valve hole in the wheel. . 1) Notch cover, then fit the cover on the wheel by Never let the wheel rub against sharp 2) Valve hole tapping your hand evenly around the protrusions or curbs. circumference of the cover. . When wheel nuts, balance weights, or Insert a wheel cover remover into the the center cap is replaced, be sure to notch part on the opposite side of the replace them with genuine SUBARU parts valve hole and pry the wheel cover to designed for aluminum wheels. remove it. Maintenance and service 11-39

Windshield washer fluid level gauge or the “FULL” mark on the tank. Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use clean water. In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-freeze type windshield washer fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies according to how much it is diluted, as indicated in the following table. Washer fluid level gauge Washer Fluid Freezing If you spray washer fluid on the windshield Concentration Temperature but the supply of washer fluid appears to 30% 10.48F(−128C) diminish, check the level of washer fluid in 50% −48F(−208C) the tank. 100% −498F(−458C)

CAUTION Never use engine coolant as washer fluid because it could cause paint damage.

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then In order to prevent freezing of washer check the fluid level indicated by the level fluid, check the freezing temperatures in gauge (attached to the inside of the cap). the table above when adjusting the fluid If the level is near the “Low” mark, add concentration to the outside temperature. “ ” fluid until it reaches the Hi level on the If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with – CONTINUED – 11-40 Maintenance and service a different concentration from the one Replacement of wiper blades carefully return the wiper arms used previously, purge the old fluid from on the windshield by hand. You the piping between the reservoir tank and Grease, wax, insects, or other material on should not return the wiper arms washer nozzles by operating the washer the windshield or the wiper blade results in to the windshield only by the for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if jerky wiper operation and streaking on the return spring. Otherwise, the wi- the concentration of the fluid remaining in glass. If you cannot remove the streaks per arms may be deformed and/ thepipingistoolowfortheoutside after operating the windshield washer or if or the windshield surface may be temperature, it may freeze and block the the wiper operation is jerky, clean the scratched. nozzles. outer surface of the windshield (or rear window) and the wiper blades using a If you cannot eliminate the streaking even CAUTION sponge or soft cloth with a neutral after following this method, replace the detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After wiper blades using the following proce- Adjust the washer fluid concentra- cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper dures. tion appropriately for the outside blades with clean water. The windshield is temperature. If the concentration is clean if beads do not form when you rinse inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid the windshield with water. may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid CAUTION may freeze in the reservoir tank. . Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzine. This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades. . While removing the wiper blades from the wiper arms, do not return the wiper arms to the original positions. Otherwise, the windshield surface may be scratched. . When returning the raised wiper arms to the original positions, Maintenance and service 11-41

& Windshield wiper blade as- & Windshield wiper blade rub- sembly ber 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

1) Metal spines 2. If the new blade rubber is not provided 1) Support with two metal spines, remove the metal 1) Open the cover spines from the old blade rubber and 1. Grasp the locked end of the blade 2) Pull down the wiper blade install them in the new blade rubber. rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the 2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by stoppers on the rubber are free of the opening the cover and pulling it down in support. the direction shown in the illustration. 3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. 4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

3. Align the claws of the support with the – CONTINUED – 11-42 Maintenance and service grooves in the rubber and slide the blade & Rear window wiper blade rubber assembly into the support until it assembly locks. 1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear window.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward you to remove it from the wiper arm. 4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the 1) Claw wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. 2) Stopper 5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly 2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun- lower it in position. 4. Be sure to position the claws at the terclockwise. end of the support between the stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper blade may scratch the windshield. Maintenance and service 11-43

& Rear window wiper blade 2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of rubber the plastic support.

4. Align the claws of the plastic support with the grooves in the blade rubber 1) Metal spines assembly, then slide the blade rubber 1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber assembly into place. assembly to unlock it from the plastic 3. If the new blade rubber is not provided support. with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber and install them in the new blade rubber.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber with the stoppers on the plastic support

– CONTINUED – 11-44 Maintenance and service ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, Battery remove rings, metal watchbands, the wiper may scratch the rear window and other metal jewelry. Never glass. allow metal tools to contact the WARNING positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you . Before beginning work on or near are at the same time in contact any battery, be sure to extinguish with any other metallic portion of all cigarettes, matches, and light- the vehicle because a short cir- ers. Never expose a battery to an cuit will result. open flame or electric sparks. . Keep everyone including children Batteries give off a gas which is away from the battery. highly flammable and explosive. . Charge the battery in a well- . For safety, in case an explosion ventilated area. does occur, wear eye protection or shield your eyes when work- . Battery posts, terminals and re- ing near any battery. Never lean lated accessories contain lead over a battery. and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California . Do not let battery fluid contact to cause cancer and reproductive eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be- harm. Batteries also contain cause battery fluid is a corrosive other chemicals known to the acid. If battery fluid gets on your State of California to cause can- skin or in your eyes, immediately cer. Wash hands after handling. flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the eyes. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and seek medical attention immediately. . To lessen the risk of sparks, Maintenance and service 11-45

Fuses

CAUTION Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with material other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The 1) Cap fuses are located in two fuse boxes. The other one is housed in the engine 2) Upper level compartment. 3) Lower level It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid level or periodically refill with distilled water. However, if the battery fluid level is below the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the upper level with distilled water. CAUTION Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery because it will shorten battery life. One is located under the instrument panel ’ behind the fuse box cover on the driver s The spare fuses are stored in the main seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out. fuse box cover in the engine compartment.

– CONTINUED – 11-46 Maintenance and service

corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, Main fuse replace it. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and turn off all electrical accessories. 2. Remove the cover. 3. Determine which fuse may be blown. Look at the back side of each fuse box cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits” F12-6.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse box in the engine compartment. Main fuse box The main fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. Check the main fuses if any electrical component fails to operate (except the starter motor) and other fuses are good. A melted main fuse must be 4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller. replaced. Use only replacements with the 5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, same specified rating as the melted main replace it with a spare fuse of the same fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is rating. replaced, have the electrical system checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer. 1) Good 6. If the same fuse blows again, this 2) Blown indicates that its system has a problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs. If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do not operate, inspect the Maintenance and service 11-47

Installation of accessories Replacing bulbs following precautions. . Do not replace any headlight Always consult your SUBARU dealer bulbs (both low beam and high before installing fog lights or any other WARNING beam) by yourself. electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such . Do not remove/restore the head- accessories may cause the electronic Bulbs may become very hot while light assemblies by yourself. system to malfunction if they are incor- illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, rectly installed or if they are not suited for turn off the bulbs and wait until the . Do not remove any headlight- the vehicle. bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is assembly components by your- a risk of sustaining a burn injury. self. For replacement, contact your CAUTION SUBARU dealer. Replace any bulb only with a new & Headlights (models without bulb of the specified wattage. Using HID headlights) a bulb of different wattage could result in a fire. For the specified CAUTION wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb ” F chart 12-10. Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while in use. If you touch & the bulb surface with bare hands or Headlights (models with HID greasy gloves, fingerprints or headlights) grease on the bulb surface will develop into hot spots, causing the WARNING bulb to break. If there are finger prints or grease on the bulb surface, High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs wipe them away with a soft cloth are used for the low beams of the moistened with alcohol. headlights. These HID bulbs use an extremely high voltage. To avoid the risk of an electric shock that could result in serious injury, observe the

– CONTINUED – 11-48 Maintenance and service

NOTE ! Low beam light bulbs 2. Use a screwdriver to remove the . If headlight aiming is required, con- secured clip of the washer tank. To make sult your SUBARU dealer for proper it easy to access the bulb, move the adjustment of the headlight aim. washer tank to the horizontal direction . It may be difficult to replace the (left-hand side). bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Right-hand side 1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on the air intake duct, then remove the air intake duct (right-hand side). 3. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it counterclockwise.

Left-hand side Maintenance and service 11-49

7. To install the bulb to the headlight assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks. 8. Reconnect the electrical connector. 9. Install the bulb cover. 10. Install the air intake duct with clips (right-hand side). 11. Set the washer tank to the original place and secure it by clip (left-hand side).

! High beam light bulbs

4. Disconnect the electrical connector 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb. from the bulb.

Right-hand side 1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on the air intake duct, then remove the air intake duct (right-hand side). 5. Remove the bulb from the headlight 3. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly by turning it counterclockwise. assembly by turning it counterclockwise. 6. Replace the bulb with a new one. At 4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this this time, do not touch the bulb surface. time, use care not to touch the bulb – CONTINUED – 11-50 Maintenance and service surface. & Front turn signal light 5. To install the bulb to the headlight It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks. Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU 6. Reconnect the electrical connector. dealer if necessary. 7. Install the air intake duct with clips (right-hand side). & Rear combination lights & Position light

2. Slide the rear combination light assembly rearward and remove it from the vehicle.

1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the upper and lower screws that secure 1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise the rear combination light assembly. and pull out the socket. 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb. 3. Install the bulb socket by turning it clockwise.

1) Brake/tail light 2) Rear turn signal light 3) Back-up light Maintenance and service 11-51

3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear 2. Remove the cover and lens. combination light assembly by turning it 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a counterclockwise. new bulb. 4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and 4. Reinstall the lens and cover. replace it with a new one. 5. Tighten the mounting screws. 5. Set the bulb socket into the rear combination light assembly and turn it & Dome light, map light, cargo clockwise until it locks. area light and door step light

CAUTION When the door is opened, the map light illuminates and becomes very 7. Tighten the upper and lower screws. hot. When replacing the map light bulb, close the door and be careful & License plate light not to burn yourself.

6. Put the rear combination light assembly into place while aligning the clip with the guide on the vehicle.

1. Remove the mounting screws using a Dome light (type A) Phillips screwdriver.

– CONTINUED – 11-52 Maintenance and service

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb. 3. Reinstall the lens. & Other bulbs Other bulbs may be difficult to replace. Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Dome light (type B) Cargo area light

Map light Door step light 1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. Specifications

Specifications...... 12-2 Fuses and circuits ...... 12-6 Dimensions...... 12-2 Fuse panel located in the passenger Engine ...... 12-3 compartment ...... 12-6 Electrical system...... 12-3 Fuse panel located in the engine Capacities...... 12-4 compartment ...... 12-8 Tires ...... 12-5 Bulb chart...... 12-10 Wheel alignment ...... 12-5 Vehicle identification ...... 12-13

12 12-2 Specifications

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice. & Dimensions in (mm) Item Non-turbo models Turbo models Overall length 179.5 (4,560) Overall width 70.1 (1,780) Overall height without roof rail 65.9 (1,675) with roof rail 66.9 (1,700) Wheel base 103.0 (2,615) Tread Front 60.2 (1,530) Rear 60.2 (1,530) Ground clearance*1 8.7 (220) 8.9 (225)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty Specifications 12-3

& Engine

Engine model EJ253 EJ255 (2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo) (2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo) Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,457 (150) Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.9 6 3.1 (99.5 6 79.0) Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1 Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4

& Electrical system

Battery type and capacity (5HR) MT 12V-48AH (55D23L) AT 12V-52AH (65D23L) Alternator Non-turbo models 12V-90A Turbo models 12V-110A Non-turbo engine FR5AP-11 (NGK) Spark plugs Turbo engine SILFR6A (NGK)

AT: Automatic transmission MT: Manual transmission

– CONTINUED – 12-4 Specifications

& Capacities

Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal) Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt) Transmission oil (MT models) 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt) Transmission fluid (AT models) 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt) Front differential gear oil (AT models) 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt) Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt) Engine coolant Non-turbo models MT models 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt) AT models 7.1 US qt (6.7 liters, 5.9 Imp qt) Turbo models 8.5 US qt (8.0 liters, 7.0 Imp qt)

AT: Automatic transmission MT: Manual transmission Each quantity indicated above is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors. Specifications 12-5

& Tires

Tire size P215/65R16 96H P225/55R17 95H 1 1 Wheel size 16 6 6 /2 J166 6 /2 JJ 17 6 7JJ Pressure Front 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) Rear 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) Rear when towing trailer 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2) 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2) Temporary Size T155/70 D17 spare tire Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2) NOTE For the Latin American models, there is a conventional tire installed under the floor of the cargo area.

& Wheel alignment

Toe Front 0 in (0 mm) Rear 0 in (0 mm) Camber Front 0800’ Rear 0800’ 12-6 Specifications

Fuses and circuits Fuse Fuse Circuit panel rating & Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment 1 20A . Trailer 2 Empty 3 15A . Door locking 4 10A . Front wiper deicer relay 5 10A . Combination meter 6 7.5A . Remote control rear view mirrors . Seat heater relay 7 15A . Combination meter . Integrated unit 8 20A . Stop light 9 15A . Front wiper deicer 10 7.5A . Power supply (battery) 11 7.5A . Turn signal unit . Clock 12 15A . Automatic transmission unit . Engine control unit . Integrated unit 13 20A . Accessory power outlet (center console) 14 15A . Position light . Tail light . Rear combination light 15 Empty (FWD connector for AWD AT models) Specifications 12-7

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Circuit Circuit panel rating panel rating 16 10A . Illumination 32 Empty 17 15A . Seat heaters 33 7.5A . ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control unit 18 10A . Back-up light 19 Empty 20 10A . Accessory power outlet (instrument panel) 21 7.5A . Starter relay 22 15A . Air conditioner . Rear window defogger relay coil 23 15A . Rear wiper . Rear window washer 24 15A . Audio unit . Clock 25 15A . SRS airbag system 26 7.5A . Power window relay . Radiator main fan relay . Tail and illumination relay 27 15A . Blower fan 28 15A . Blower fan 29 15A . Fog light 30 30A . Front wiper 31 7.5A . Auto air conditioner unit . Integrated unit

– CONTINUED – 12-8 Specifications

& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment Fuse Fuse Circuit panel rating 1 30A . ABS unit . Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol unit 2 25A . Main fan 3 10A . Secondary air combination valve (turbo models) 4 25A . Sub fan 5 Empty 6 10A . Audio 7 30A . Headlight (low beam) 8 15A . Headlight (high beam) 9 20A . Back-up 10 15A . Horn 11 25A . Rear window defogger . Mirror heater 12 15A . Fuel pump 13 10A . Automatic transmission control unit 14 7.5A . Engine control unit 15 15A . Turn and hazard warning flasher A) Main fuse 16 15A . Tail and illumination relay 17 7.5A . Alternator Specifications 12-9

Fuse Fuse Circuit panel rating 18 15A . Headlight (right hand) 19 15A . Headlight (left hand) 12-10 Specifications

Bulb chart

A: The high mount stop light is the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement. Specifications 12-11

Wattage Bulb No. WARNING 1) High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3) . Bulbs may become very hot while 2) Position light 12V-5W 168 (W5W) illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, turn off the bulbs and wait 3) Low beam headlight until the bulbs cool down. Other- Models with HID light 12V-35W D2R wise, there is a risk of sustaining Models with halogen light 12V-55W H11 a burn injury. 4) Front side marker light 12V-5W 168 (W5W) . For models with HID low beam 5) Map light 12V-8W – headlights, observe the following precautions. Not doing so carries – 6) Dome light 12V-8W the risk of an electric shock that 7) Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4) could result in serious injury 8) Front turn signal light 12V-21W (WY21W) because the HID bulbs use an extremely high voltage. 9) Door step light 12V-5W – – Do not replace any headlight 10) Cargo area light 12V-13W – bulbs (both low beam and 11) Brake/tail light 12V-21/5W 7443 (W21/5W) high beam) by yourself. 12) Rear turn signal light 12V-21W (WY21W) – Do not remove/restore the 13) Back-up light 12V-21W 7440 headlight assemblies by your- 14) Licence plate light 12V-5W 168 (W5W) self. – Do not remove any headlight- assembly components by yourself. For replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED – 12-12 Specifications

CAUTION Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage. Using a bulb of different wattage could result in a fire. Specifications 12-13

Vehicle identification 1) Vehicle identification number 2) Emission control label 3) Tire inflation pressure label 4) Certification label 5) Vehicle identification number plate 6) Model number label 7) Fuel label 8) Air conditioner label ————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————

———————————————————————————————————————— Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A...... 13-2 Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle Tire information...... 13-2 load capacities ...... 13-14 Tire labeling ...... 13-2 Adverse safety consequences of overloading on handling and stopping and on tires ...... 13-14 Recommended tire inflation pressure...... 13-5 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit...... 13-15 Glossary of tire terminology ...... 13-7 Tire care – maintenance and safety p Uniform tire quality grading standards ...... 13-15 ractices...... 13-11 Treadwear ...... 13-16 Vehicle load limit – how to determine...... 13-11 Traction AA, A, B, C...... 13-16 Temperature A, B, C...... 13-16 Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ...... 13-17

13 13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A. Tire information Example: The following information has been & Tire labeling compiled according to Code of Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part Identification Number or TIN) are (1) P = Certain tire type used on 575”. placed on the sidewall of a tire by light duty vehicles such as passen- tire manufacturers. These markings ger cars can provide you with useful infor- (2) Section Width in millimeters mation on the tire. (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height ! Tire size 7 section width). Your vehicle comes equipped with (4) R = Radial Construction P-Metric tire size. It is important to (5) Rim diameter in inches understand the sizing system in ! Load and Speed Rating Descrip- selecting the proper tire for your tions vehicles. Here is a brief review of The load and speed rating descrip- the tire sizing system with a break- tions will appear following the size down of its individual elements. designation. ! P Metric They provide two important facts With the P-Metric system, Section about the tire. First, the number Width is measured in millimeters. designation is its load index. Sec- To convert millimeters into inches, ond, the letter designation indicates divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio the tire’s speed rating. (Section Height divided by Section Width) helps provide more dimen- sional information about the tire size. Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3

Example: WARNING . Speed ratings apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification (6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (3) Tire Type Code indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed. (4) Date of Manufacture maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if the tires are worn out, da- The first two figures identify the For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs “ ” maged, repaired, retreaded, week, starting with 01 to represent (600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580 or otherwise altered from the first full week of the calendar kg). their original condition. If year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 WARNING tires are repaired, retreaded, or otherwise al- means the 1st week of 2001. Load indices apply only to the tered, they may not be sui- ! Other markings tire, not to the vehicle. Putting table for original equipment The following makings are also a load rated tire on any vehicle tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall. does not mean the vehicle can speeds. ! be loaded up to the tire’s rated Maximum permissible inflation pressure load. ! Tire Identification Number (TIN) The maximum cold inflation pres- (7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be system describing a tire’s capability marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “300 kPa to travel at established and prede- sidewall. The TIN is composed of (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS” termined speeds. four groups. Here is a brief review For example, “V” means 149 mph of the TIN with a breakdown of its (240 km/h) individual elements. – CONTINUED – 13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

! Maximum load rating STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE- ” The load rating at the maximum WALL 2 POLYESTER permissible weight load for this tire. ! Uniform Tire Quality Grading For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg (UTQG) (1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) For details, refer to “Uniform tire ” MAX. PRESS. quality grading standards” F13-15. WARNING Maximum load rating applies only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire’s rated load.

! Construction type Applicable construction of this tire. For example, “TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RADIAL” ! Construction The generic name of each cord material used in the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this tire. For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5

& Recommended tire inflation pressure ! Recommended cold tire inflation pressure Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires is as follows. Tire size P215/65R16 96H P225/55R17 95H 1 1 Wheel size 16 6 6 /2 J166 6 /2 JJ 17 6 7JJ Pressure Front 2 32 psi 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm ) (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

2 30 psi Rear 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm ) (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)

2 36 psi Rear when towing trailer 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm ) (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2) Temporary Size T155/70 D17 spare tire Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

– CONTINUED – 13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

! Vehicle placard vehicle control could lead to an accident. ! Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper inflation Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey. Check the tire pressures when the tires are Canada-spec. models cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the The vehicle placard is affixed to the The vehicle placard shows original specific values. Driving even a driver’s side B-pillar. tire size, recommended cold tire short distance warms up the tires inflation pressure on each tire at Example: and increases the tire pressures. maximum loaded vehicle weight, Also, the tire pressures are affected seating capacity and loading infor- by the outside temperature. It is mation. best to check tire pressure out- ! Adverse safety consequences doors before driving the vehicle. of under-inflation When a tire becomes warm, the air Driving at high speeds with exces- inside it expands, causing the tire sively low tire pressures can cause pressure to increase. Be careful not the tires to flex severely and to to mistakenly release air from a rapidly become hot. A sharp in- warm tire to reduce its pressure. crease in temperature could cause tread separation, and failure of the U.S.-spec. models tire(s). Possible resulting loss of Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7

& Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in- . Extra load tire . Accessory weight flated, bears the load. A tire designed to operate at higher The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking loads and higher inflation pressure those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the than the corresponding standard replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall. tire. sion, power steering, power brakes, . Cold tire pressure . Groove power windows, power seats, radio, The pressure in a tire that has been The space between two adjacent and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been tread ribs. items are available as factory-in- standing for three hours or more. . Innerliner stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord The layer(s) forming the inside sur- stalled or not). The strands forming the plies in the face of a tubeless tire that contains . Bead tire. the inflating medium within the tire. The part of the tire that is made of . Cord separation . Innerliner separation steel wires, wrapped or reinforced The parting of cords from adjacent The parting of the innerliner from by ply cords and that is shaped to fit rubber compounds. cord material in the carcass. the rim. . Cracking . Intended outboard sidewall . Bead separation Any parting within the tread, side- (1) The sidewall that contains a A breakdown of the bond between wall, or inner liner of the tire whitewall, bears white lettering components in the bead. extending to cord material. or bears manufacturer, brand, . Bias ply tire . Curb weight and/or model name molding that A pneumatic tire in which the ply The weight of a motor vehicle with is higher or deeper than the cords that extend to the beads are standard equipment including the same molding on the other side- laid at alternate angles substantially maximum capacity of fuel, oil and wall of the tire, or (2) The outward facing sidewall less than 90 degrees to the center- coolant, and if so equipped, air of an asymmetrical tire that has line of the tread. conditioning and additional weight a particular side that must al- . Carcass optional engine. The tire structure, except tread and ways face outward when mount- – CONTINUED – 13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

ing on a vehicle. . Measuring rim . Passenger car tire . Light truck (LT) tire The rim on which a tire is fitted for A tire intended for use on passen- A tire designated by its manufac- physical dimension requirements. ger cars, multipurpose passenger turer as primarily intended for use . Normal occupant weight vehicles, and trucks, that have a on lightweight trucks or multipur- 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) pose passenger vehicles. occupants specified in the second of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less. . Load rating column of Table 1 that is appended . Ply The maximum load that a tire is to the end of this section. A layer of rubber-coated parallel rated to carry for a given inflation . Occupant distribution cords. pressure. Distribution of occupants in a vehi- . Ply separation . Maximum inflation pressure cle as specified in the third column A parting of rubber compound The maximum cold inflation pres- of Table 1 that is appended to the between adjacent plies. sure to which a tire may be inflated. end of this section. . Pneumatic tire . Maximum load rating . Open splice A mechanical device made of rub- The load rating for a tire at the Any parting at any junction of tread, ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or maximum permissible inflation sidewall, or innerliner that extends other materials, that, when pressure for that tire. to cord material. mounted on an automotive wheel, . Maximum loaded vehicle weight . Outer diameter provides the traction and contains The sum of: The overall diameter of an inflated the gas or fluid that sustains the (a) Curb weight new tire. load. (b) Accessory weight . Overall width . Production options weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight The linear distance between the The combined weight of those (d) Production options weight exteriors of the sidewalls of an installed regular production options . Maximum permissible inflation inflated tire, including elevations weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in pressure due to labeling, decorations, or excess of those standard items The maximum cold inflation pres- protective bands or ribs. which they replace, not previously sure to which a tire may be inflated. considered in curb weight or acces- Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9 sory weight, including heavy duty . Rim type designation . Tread rib brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, The industry of manufacturer’s des- A tread section running circumfer- heavy duty battery, and special ignation for a rim by style or code. entially around a tire. trim. . Rim width . Tread separation . Radial ply tire Nominal distance between rim Pulling away of the tread from the A pneumatic tire in which the ply flanges. tire carcass. cords that extend to the beads are . Section width . Treadwear indicators (TWI) laid at substantially 90 degrees to The linear distance between the The projections within the principal the centerline of the tread. exteriors of the sidewalls of an grooves designed to give a visual . Recommended inflation pres- inflated tire, excluding elevations indication of the degrees of wear of sure due to labeling, decoration, or the tread. The cold inflation pressure recom- protective bands. . Vehicle capacity weight mended by a vehicle manufacturer. . Sidewall The rated cargo and luggage load . Reinforced tire That portion of a tire between the plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the A tire designed to operate at higher tread and bead. vehicle’s designated seating capa- loads and at higher inflation pres- . Sidewall separation city. sures than the corresponding stan- The parting of the rubber com- . Vehicle maximum load on the dard tire. pound from the cord material in tire . Rim the sidewall. Load on an individual tire that is A metal support for a tire or a tire . Test rim determined by distributing to each and tube assembly upon which the The rim on which a tire is fitted for axle its share of the maximum tire beads are seated. testing, and it may be any rim listed loaded vehicle weight and dividing . Rim diameter as appropriate for use with that tire. by two. Nominal diameter of the bead seat. . Tread . Vehicle normal load on the tire . Rim size designation That portion of a tire that comes Load on an individual tire that is Rim diameter and width. into contact with the road. determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight,

– CONTINUED – 13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects accessory weight, and normal oc- Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for cupant weight (distributed in accor- various designated seating capacities dance with Table 1 that is appended to the end of this section) Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a and dividing by 2. capacity, number of occupants number of occupants normally loaded vehicle . Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel 2 through 4 2 2 in front. and tire assembly securely during 5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second testing. seat. 2 in front, 1 in second 11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat. 2 in front, 2 in second 16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat. Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11

& Tire care – maintenance and evenly worn tires at the time of as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike safety practices rotation. After tire rotation, adjust carrier, etc., and the tongue load of . Check on a daily basis that the the tire pressures and make sure a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity tires are free from serious damage, the wheel nuts are correctly tigh- can be calculated by the following nails, and stones. At the same time, tened. For information about the method. check the tires for abnormal wear. tightening torque and tightening − . Inspect the tire tread regularly Cargo capacity = Load limit (total sequence for the wheel nuts, refer weight of occupants + total weight and replace the tires before their to “Flat tires” F9-6. tread wear indicators become visi- of optional equipment + tongue load of a trailer (if applicable)) ble. When a tire’streadwear & Vehicle load limit – how to indicator becomes visible, the tire determine For information about vehicle load- is worn beyond the acceptable limit The load capacity of your vehicle is ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle” and must be replaced immediately. determined by weight, not by avail- F8-11. With a tire in this condition, driving able cargo space. The load limit of at even low speeds in wet weather For information about towing capa- your vehicle is shown on the city and weight limits, refer to can cause the vehicle to hydro- vehicle placard attached to the “Trailer towing” F8-17. plane. Possible resulting loss of driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the vehiclecontrolcanleadtoan statement “The combined weight ! Calculating total and load ca- accident. of occupants and cargo should pacities varying seating con- . To maximize the life of each tire never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” figurations and ensure that the tires wear on your vehicle’s placard. Calculate the available load capa- uniformly, it is best to rotate the Thevehicleplacardalsoshows city as shown in the following tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). seating capacity of your vehicle. examples: For information about the tire rota- The total load capacity includes the tion order, refer to “Tire rotation” F total weight of driver and all pas- 11-36. sengers and their belongings, any Replace any damaged or un- cargo, any optional equipment such – CONTINUED – 13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Example 1A 1. Calculate the total weight. Example 1B

2. Calculate the available load capacity by subtracting the total weight from the vehicle capacity weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).

Vehicle capacity weight of the For example, if a person weighing vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the is indicated on the vehicle placard same vehicle (bringing the number with the statement “The combined of occupants to two), the calcula- weight of occupants and cargo 3. The result of step 2 shows that a tions are as follows. should never exceed 900 lbs or further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can 1. Calculate the total weight. 408 kg”. be carried. For example, if the vehicle has one occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300 kg). Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13

2. Calculate the available load ca- with the statement “The combined 2. Calculate the available load capacity. weight of occupants and cargo pacity. should never exceed 408 kg or 900 lbs”. For example, the vehicle has one occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170 kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted 3. The total weight now exceeds 3. The result of step 2 shows that a with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can (10 kg), to which is attached a kg), so the cargo weight must be be carried. trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more. 10% of the trailer weight is applied Example 2B Example 2A to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load = 176 lbs (80 kg)). 1. Calculate the total weight.

For example, if a person weighing Vehicle capacity weight of the 143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same is indicated on the vehicle placard vehicle (bringing the number of – CONTINUED – 13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects occupants to three), and a child 3. The total weight now exceeds The GVWR and front and rear restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5 the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15 GAWRs are determined by not only kg) is installed in the vehicle for the kg), so the cargo weight must be the maximum load rating of tires but child to use, the calculations are as reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more. also loaded capacities of the vehi- follows. cle’s suspension, axles and other & 1. Calculate the total weight. Determining compatibility of parts of the body. tire and vehicle load capaci- Therefore, this means that the ties vehicle cannot necessarily be The sum of four tires’ maximum loaded up to the tire’s maximum load ratings must exceed the max- load rating on the tire sidewall. imum loaded vehicle weight (“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the & Adverse safety conse- maximum load ratings of two front quences of overloading on tires and of two rear tires must handling and stopping and exceed each axle’smaximum on tires loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original Overloading could affect vehicle equipment tires are designed to handling, stopping distance, and fulfill those conditions. vehicle and tire performance in the The maximum loaded vehicle following ways. This could lead to 2. Calculate the available load ca- weight is referred to Gross Vehicle an accident and possibly result in pacity. Weight Rating (GVWR). And each severe personal injury. axle’s maximum loaded capacity is . Vehicle stability will deteriorate. referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat- . Heavy and/or high-mounted ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each loads could increase the risk of axle’s GAWR are shown on the rollover. vehicle certification label affixed to . Stopping distance will increase. the driver’s door. . Brakes could overheat and fail. Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-15

. Suspension, bearings, axles and able cargo and luggage load capa- Uniform tire quality grading other body parts could break or city is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6 standards experience accelerated wear that 150) = 650 lbs) will shorten vehicle life. 5. Determine the combined weight This information indicates the rela- . Tires could fail. of luggage and cargo being loaded tive performance of passenger car . Tread separation could occur. on the vehicle. That weight may not tires in the area of treadwear, . Tire could separate from its rim. safely exceed the available cargo traction, and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consumer & Steps for Determining Cor- and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. in making an informed choice in the rect Load Limit purchase of tires. “ 6. If your vehicle will be towing a 1. Locate the statement The com- trailer, load from your trailer will be Quality grades can be found where bined weight of occupants and transferred to your vehicle. Consult applicable on the tire sidewall be- cargo should never exceed XXX tween tread shoulder and maxi- ” ’ this manual to determine how this pounds on your vehicle s placard. reduces the available cargo and mum section width. For example: 2. Determine the combined weight luggage load capacity of your ve- of the driver and passengers that Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem- hicle. perature A will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of The quality grades apply to new the driver and passengers from pneumatic tires for use on passen- XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. ger cars. However, they do not 4. The resulting figure equals the apply to deep tread, winter type available amount of cargo and snow tires, space-saver or tempor- luggage load capacity. For exam- ary use spare tires, tires with ple, if the “XXX” amount equals nominal rim diameters of 12 inches 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be or less, or to some limited produc- five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in tion tires. your vehicle, the amount of avail- All passenger car tires must con-

– CONTINUED – 13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of grade C corresponds to a level of ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. A tire marked performance which all passenger C may have poor traction perfor- car tires must meet under the & Treadwear mance. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- The treadwear grade is a compara- dards No. 109. Grades B and A tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING represent higher levels of perfor- the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to mance on the laboratory test wheel trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight- than the minimum required by law. government test course. ahead braking traction tests, WARNING For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accel- would wear one and one-half (1- eration, cornering, hydroplan- The temperature grade for this 1/2) times as well on the govern- ing, or peak traction charac- tire is established for a tire ment course as a tire graded 100. teristics. that is properly inflated and The relative performance of tires not overloaded. Excessive depends upon the actual conditions & speed, underinflation, or ex- of their use, however, and may Temperature A, B, C cessive loading, either sepa- depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the rately or in combination, can due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the cause heat buildup and possi- service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of ble tire failure. road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled con- & Traction AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora- The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. Sustained high lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those temperature can cause the material grades represent the tire’s ability to of the tire to degenerate and reduce stop on wet pavement as measured tire life, and excessive temperature under controlled conditions on spe- can lead to sudden tire failure. The Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-17

Reporting safety defects DC 20590. You can also obtain (U.S.A.) other information about motor vehicle safety from If you believe that your vehicle has http://www.safercar.gov. a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc. If NHTSA receives similar com- plaints, it may open an investiga- tion, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, ————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————

———————————————————————————————————————— Index

14 14-2 Index

A Shift lock release...... 7-22 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ...... 7-24 SPORT mode ...... 7-21 Warning light ...... 3-16, 7-25 Temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ...... 3-14 Accessories...... 5-4, 11-47 Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ...... 1-12 Accessory power outlet...... 6-9 AUX unit operation ...... 5-25 Active head restraint...... 1-5 Air cleaner element ...... 11-15 B Air conditioner ...... 4-7, 4-10 Battery ...... 11-44 Air filtration system...... 4-13 Drainage prevention function...... 2-5 Air flow selection...... 4-2 Jump starting ...... 9-10 Alarm system ...... 2-14 Replacement (remote keyless entry system) ...... 2-10 All-Wheel Drive warning light ...... 3-18 Booster seat ...... 1-29 Aluminum wheel cleaning...... 10-3 Bottle holder ...... 6-9 Aluminum wheels...... 11-38 Brake Antenna system...... 5-2 Assist...... 7-24 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 7-24 Booster ...... 7-23, 11-27 Arming the system ...... 2-15 Fluid ...... 11-25 Armrest...... 1-7 Pad and lining...... 11-30 Ashtray...... 6-11 Parking ...... 7-33, 11-30 AT OIL TEMP warning light ...... 3-14 Pedal ...... 11-28 Audio control button ...... 5-26 System...... 7-23 Audio set ...... 5-5 Brake pedal Auto-dimming mirror/compass...... 3-33 Free play...... 11-28 Automatic climate control system ...... 4-8 Reserve distance...... 11-28 Automatic headlight beam leveler...... 3-27 Brake system...... 7-23 Warning light ...... 3-18 Warning light...... 3-17 Automatic transmission ...... 7-16 Braking ...... 7-23 Capacities...... 12-4 Tips ...... 7-23 Fluid...... 11-20 Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings...... 11-30 MANUAL mode ...... 7-19 Bulb Selector lever ...... 7-17 Chart ...... 12-10 Index 14-3

Replacing...... 11-47 Top tether anchorages ...... 1-33 Child safety ...... 5 C Locks...... 2-19 Capacities...... 12-4 Chime Cargo area Key...... 3-5 Cover ...... 6-13 Seatbelt...... 1-12, 3-10 Light...... 6-3 Cleaning Tie-down hooks ...... 6-15 Aluminum wheels ...... 10-3 Catalytic converter ...... 8-3 Interior ...... 10-5 Center Ventilation grille...... 4-12 Console ...... 6-5 Climate control system Ventilators...... 4-3 Automatic ...... 4-8 Center and side ventilators...... 4-3 Manual...... 4-3 Changing Clock ...... 3-22 Flat tire ...... 9-6 Clutch Oil and oil filter ...... 11-9 Fluid ...... 11-26 Charge warning light ...... 3-14 Pedal ...... 11-28 CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator Coat hook...... 6-13 lamp...... 3-12 Coin tray ...... 6-7 Checking Coolant ...... 11-13 Brake pedal free play ...... 11-28 Coolant temperature high warning light...... 3-13 Brake pedal reserve distance ...... 11-28 Coolant temperature low indicator light...... 3-13 Clutch function...... 11-28 Cooling system ...... 11-12 Clutch pedal free play...... 11-29 Corrosion protection...... 10-4 Engine oil level ...... 11-8 Cruise control ...... 7-36 Fluid level ...... 11-20, 11-24, 11-25, 11-26 Indicator light ...... 3-21, 7-39 Gear oil level...... 11-22 Set indicator light...... 3-21, 7-39 Manual transmission oil level...... 11-19 Cup holder ...... 6-8 Child restraint systems ...... 1-23 Front passenger’s...... 6-8 Installation with A/ELR seatbelt...... 1-26 Rear passenger’s ...... 6-8 Lower and tether anchorages ...... 1-30 14-4 Index

D Engine Daytime running light system...... 3-27 Compartment overview...... 11-6 Defogger...... 3-35 Coolant ...... 11-13 Deicer ...... 3-35 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...... 5, 8-2 Differential gear oil Hood ...... 11-5 Front ...... 11-21 Oil ...... 11-8 Rear...... 11-22 Overheating ...... 9-12 Dimensions ...... 12-2 Starting ...... 7-8 Disarming the alarm system ...... 2-17 Stopping...... 7-10 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators...... 7-24 Exterior care ...... 10-2 Dome light ...... 6-2 Door F Locks ...... 2-4 Flat tires...... 9-6 Open warning light ...... 3-18 Floor mat...... 6-12 Drive belts...... 11-18 Fluid level Driving Automatic transmission ...... 11-20 All-Wheel Drive warning light ...... 3-18 Brake...... 11-25 Car phone/cell phone ...... 7 Clutch ...... 11-26 Drinking ...... 6 Power steering ...... 11-24 Drugs ...... 6 Fog light Foreign countries ...... 8-4 Indicator light ...... 3-21 Pets ...... 7 Switch...... 3-28 Snowy and icy roads ...... 8-9 Folding mirror switch...... 3-35 Tips...... 7-16, 8-2, 8-5 Front Tired or sleepy...... 7 Differential gear oil...... 11-21 Fog light indicator light ...... 3-21 E Seatbelt pretensioners ...... 1-20 Electrical system...... 12-3 Seats ...... 1-2 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Turn signal light...... 11-50 system...... 3-17, 7-26 Front fog light...... 3-28 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)...... 1-12 Index 14-5

Front seats High/low beam change (dimmer) ...... 3-26 Forward and backward adjustment...... 1-3 Hill start assist (MT vehicles) ...... 7-35, 11-29 Power seat...... 1-4 Hill start assist warning light...... 3-18, 7-36 Reclining...... 1-3 Horn ...... 3-38 Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat)...... 1-4 Hose and connections...... 11-12 Fuel ...... 7-3 Consumption indicator ...... 3-22 I Economy hints...... 8-2 Ignition switch ...... 3-3 Filler lid and cap ...... 7-4 Light ...... 3-5 Gauge ...... 3-8 Illuminated entry...... 2-9 Requirements ...... 7-3 Illumination brightness control ...... 3-28 Fuses ...... 11-45 Immobilizer ...... 2-2 Fuses and circuits...... 12-6 Indicator light ...... 2-3 Indicator light (security indicator light)...... 3-20 G Indicator light GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ...... 8-13 Coolant temperature low...... 3-13 Glove box ...... 6-5 Cruise control ...... 3-21, 7-39 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) ...... 8-13 Cruise control set ...... 3-21, 7-39 Front fog light...... 3-21 H Headlight...... 3-21 Hazard warning flasher ...... 3-5, 9-2 High beam...... 3-21 Head restraint adjustment Immobilizer ...... 2-3 Front seat ...... 1-5 Security...... 3-20 Rear seat...... 1-8 Selector lever/Gear position ...... 3-21 Headlight SPORT mode ...... 3-20 Beam lever ...... 3-27 Traction control system OFF ...... 3-19 Flasher ...... 3-26 Turn signal ...... 3-21 Indicator light...... 3-21 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF...... 3-20, 7-29 Headlights...... 3-26, 11-47 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation...... 3-19, 7-29 Heater operation (manual climate control system) ...... 4-5 Information display...... 3-22 High beam indicator light ...... 3-21 Inside mirror ...... 3-32 14-6 Index

Interior lights ...... 6-2 Lower and tether anchorage ...... 1-30

J M Jack and jack handle...... 9-5 Main fuse ...... 11-46 Jack-up point...... 9-6 Maintenance Jump starting...... 9-10 Precautions ...... 11-3 Schedule...... 11-3 K Seatbelt...... 1-20 Key Tools...... 9-4 Number ...... 2-2 Malfunction indicator lamp (check engine warning light)... 3-12 Reminder chime...... 3-5 Manual Replacement ...... 2-4 Climate control system ...... 4-3 Keyless entry system ...... 2-7 Seat...... 1-3 Keys ...... 2-2 Transmission ...... 7-15 Transmission oil ...... 11-19 L Map light ...... 6-3 Leather seat materials ...... 10-5 Maximum load limits ...... 8-18 License plate light ...... 11-51 Meters and gauges...... 3-5 Light Mirror defogger ...... 3-35 Cargo area...... 6-3 Mirrors ...... 3-32 Control switch...... 3-25 Moonroof...... 2-23 Dome ...... 6-2 Front fog...... 3-28 N Ignition switch...... 3-5 New vehicle break-in driving ...... 8-2 License plate...... 11-51 Map ...... 6-3 O Rear combination...... 11-50 Odometer/Trip meter ...... 3-6 Loading your vehicle ...... 8-11 Oil filter ...... 11-9 Low fuel warning light...... 3-8, 3-18 Oil level Low tire pressure warning light ...... 3-15 Engine ...... 11-8 Front differential gear ...... 11-21 Index 14-7

Manual transmission...... 11-19 R Rear differential ...... 11-22 Rear Oil pressure warning light...... 3-14 Combination lights ...... 11-50 On-pavement and off-road driving ...... 8-6 Gate ...... 2-22, 9-17 Outside Seats ...... 1-7 Mirror defogger ...... 3-35 Rear differential Mirrors...... 3-34, 3-35 Gear oil...... 11-22 Temperature indicator ...... 3-23 Rear seat Overhead console...... 6-7 Center table...... 6-7 Overheating engine ...... 9-12 Folding down ...... 1-10 Reclining ...... 1-9 P Rear turn signal...... 11-50 Parking Rear window Brake ...... 7-33 Defogger ...... 3-35 Brake stroke...... 11-30 Wiper and washer switch...... 3-32 Tips...... 7-33 Wiper blades...... 11-42 Parking your vehicle...... 7-33 Recommended Periodic inspections ...... 8-4 Automatic transmission fluid...... 11-21 Petrol fuel ...... 7-3 Brake fluid ...... 11-26 Power Clutch fluid ...... 11-27 Door locking switch ...... 2-6 Engine oil ...... 11-11, 11-12 Outside mirrors ...... 3-35 Front differential gear oil...... 11-22 Seat ...... 1-4 Manual transmission oil...... 11-20 Steering...... 7-23 Power steering fluid ...... 11-25 Steering fluid ...... 11-24 Rear differential gear oil ...... 11-23 Windows...... 2-20 Spark plugs ...... 11-18 Precautions against vehicle modification ...... 1-23, 1-60 Refueling...... 7-4 Preparing to drive ...... 7-8 Remote engine start system ...... 7-11 Remote keyless entry system ...... 2-7 Replacement Brake pad and lining...... 11-29 14-8 Index

Wiper blades ...... 11-40 Safety tips ...... 1-11 Replacing Warning light and chime ...... 1-12, 3-10 Air cleaner element ...... 11-16 Seatbelts ...... 1-11 Battery (remote keyless entry system) ...... 2-10 Security ID plate...... 2-3 Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system)...... 2-11 Security indicator light ...... 3-20 Replacing bulbs ...... 11-47 Selector lever...... 7-17 Cargo area light...... 11-51 Position indicator ...... 3-21 Dome light ...... 11-51 Shift lock release...... 7-22 Door step light ...... 11-51 Shock sensors ...... 2-19 Front turn signal light...... 11-50 Shopping bag hook...... 6-12 Headlight ...... 11-47 Snow tires ...... 8-10, 11-31 License plate light ...... 11-51 Snowy and icy roads ...... 8-9 Map light...... 11-51 Sounding a panic alarm ...... 2-10 Position light...... 11-50 Spark plugs ...... 11-18 Rear combination light ...... 11-50 Specifications...... 12-2 Rocking the vehicle...... 8-11 Speedometer ...... 3-6 Roof molding and crossbar ...... 8-14 SPORT mode ...... 7-21 Roof rails ...... 8-13 SPORT mode indicator light...... 3-20 SRS S Curtain airbag ...... 1-49 Safety Frontal airbag...... 1-38 Precautions when driving ...... 4 Side airbag ...... 1-49 Symbol ...... 2 SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)... 4, 1-34 Warnings ...... 2 SRS airbag system Seat Monitors ...... 1-59 Fabric...... 10-5 Servicing ...... 1-59 Heater ...... 1-6 Warning light...... 3-11 Seat height adjustment ...... 1-4 Starting the engine ...... 7-8 Seatbelt ...... 4 State emission testing (U.S. only) ...... 7-7 Maintenance...... 1-20 Steering wheel Pretensioners ...... 1-20 Power ...... 7-23 Index 14-9

Tilt ...... 3-37 All wheels on the ground...... 9-16 Tilt/telescopic...... 3-38 Flat-bed truck...... 9-15 Stopping the engine ...... 7-10 Tie-down hooks...... 9-13 Storage compartment ...... 6-5 Weight ...... 8-18 Sun shade ...... 2-25 Traction Control system Sun visors...... 6-4 OFF indicator light ...... 3-19 Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS)...... 1-34 Trailer Synthetic leather upholstery ...... 10-5 Connecting ...... 8-16 Hitch...... 8-15 T Hitches...... 8-21 Tachometer ...... 3-8 Towing ...... 8-17 Temperature warning light Towing tips ...... 8-23 AT OIL TEMP ...... 3-14 Trip meter...... 3-6 Temporary spare tire ...... 9-2 Turn signal Tether (child restraint system) ...... 1-30, 1-33 Indicator lights...... 3-21 Tie-down hooks ...... 9-13 Lever ...... 3-27 Tilt steering wheel ...... 3-37 Tire U Chains...... 8-11 Under-floor storage compartment...... 6-16 Inspection ...... 11-33 Pressures and wear ...... 11-33 V Replacement ...... 11-37 Valet mode ...... 2-17 Rotation...... 11-36 Vanity mirror ...... 6-5 Types ...... 11-31 Vehicle Tire pressure monitoring system Capacity weight...... 8-12 (TPMS)...... 3-15, 7-32, 9-9, 11-31 Identification ...... 12-13 Tires...... 12-5 Symbols ...... 3 Tires and wheels...... 11-31 Vehicle Dynamics Control Tools ...... 9-4 OFF indicator light ...... 7-29 Top tether anchorages ...... 1-30, 1-33 OFF switch ...... 7-31 Towing...... 9-12 Operation indicator light...... 3-19, 7-29 14-10 Index

System ...... 7-27 Balance...... 11-35 Warning light ...... 3-19, 7-29 Covers ...... 11-38 Ventilator ...... 4-2 Replacement...... 11-37 Windows ...... 2-20 W Windshield Warning and indicator lights ...... 3-9 Washer fluid...... 11-39 Warning light Wiper and washer switches ...... 3-30 ABS ...... 3-16, 7-25 Wiper blades...... 11-41 All-Wheel Drive...... 3-18 Wiper deicer ...... 3-35 AT OIL TEMP ...... 3-14 Winter Automatic headlight beam leveler...... 3-18 Driving ...... 8-8 Brake system ...... 3-17 Tires ...... 8-10, 11-31 Charge ...... 3-14 Wiper and washer ...... 3-29 CHECK ENGINE ...... 3-12 Wiper deicer ...... 3-35 Coolant temperature high...... 3-13 Door open...... 3-18 Hill start assist ...... 3-18, 7-36 Low fuel...... 3-8, 3-18 Low tire pressure ...... 3-15 Oil pressure ...... 3-14 Seatbelt ...... 1-12, 3-10 SRS airbag system ...... 3-11 Vehicle Dynamics Control ...... 3-19, 7-29, 7-30 Warranties ...... 1 Warranties and maintenance ...... 8-17 Washing ...... 10-2 Waxing and polishing ...... 10-3 Wear indicators...... 11-35 Wheel Alignment...... 12-5 Aluminum...... 11-38 ————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————

———————————————————————————————————————— ————————————————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————————————

———————————————————————————————————————— 3

12 4

10 5

9 8 6 7 000134 GAS STATION REFERENCE & Fuel: & Fuel capacity: ! Non-turbo models 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal) Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or & Engine oil: higher. Use only the following oils. ! Turbo models . ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with the ILSAC Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 certification mark (Starburst mark) AKI or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline with an octane . or API classification SM with the words “ENERGY CON- rating of 91 AKI is not available, regular unleaded gasoline with SERVING” octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For optimum engine performance and driveability, it is required that For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to the following sections. you use premium grade unleaded gasoline with an octane . “ ” F rating of 91 AKI or higher. Recommended grade and viscosity 11-11 . “Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driving & Fuel octane rating: conditions” F11-12 This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and & Engine oil capacity: Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel octane rating” F7-3. 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt) & Cold tire pressure:

Tire size P215/65R16 96H P225/55R17 95H 1 1 Wheel size 16 6 6 /2 J166 6 /2 JJ 17 6 7JJ Pressure Front 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) Rear 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) Rear when towing trailer 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2) 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2) Temporary Size T155/70 D17 spare tire 2 Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm ) NOTE For the Latin American models, there is a conventional tire installed under the floor of the cargo area. 2010 FORESTER Owner’s Manual

2010 FORESTER Owner’s Manual

A8150BE-A Issued February 2009 Printed in USA 03/09 2010A FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. TOKYO, JAPAN MSA5M1003A